SAV Precisioncatalogue

PRECISION WORKHOLDING ANDCLAMPING SYSTEMSMAGNETIC - HYDRAULIC - MECHANICAL - VACUUM

PRECISIONEFFICIENCYRELIABILITY

WORKHOLDING AND AUTOMATION

®

SPANN- AUTOMATIONS- NORMTEILETECHNIK GMBH

PRÄZISIONS- UND SPANNSYSTEMEMAGNETISCH - HYDRAULISCH - MECHANISCH - VAKUUMTECHNISCH

INNOVATIVWEGWEISEND

ERFAHREN

CATALOGUE

Pages 01 - 16

Pages 17 - 32

Pages 33 - 78

Pages 79 - 92

Pages 93 - 100

Pages 101 - 116

Pages 117 - 124

Pages 125 - 170

Pages 171 - 182

Pages 183 - 192

Pages 193 - 230

Pages 231 - 244

Pages 245 - 250

Pages 251 - 260

Pages 261 - 280

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

Permanent Magnetic ChucksRectangular and Circular

Electro Magnetic ChucksRectangular and Circular

Electro-Permanent Magnetic ChucksRectangular and Circular

Demagnetizing equipment and Control UnitsMagnetic Field and Holding Force Measuring Equipment

Magnetic Quick Mould and Die Change Systems forInjection Moulding Machines. Magnetic Separators

Sine Tables, with and without Magnetic ChuckAngular and Tilting Tables with Scale

Lifting MagnetsMagnetic Handling, Holding Magnets

Palletising and Automation SystemsClamping Products for EDM Applications

Electro Holding Magnets and Electro Magnetic BarsMagnetic Blocks, Laminated Blocks and Laminated Bars

Magnetic Accessories, Magnetic Prism BlocksMagnet Stands

01chapter

Technical Informationfor Magnetic Workholding

Vacuum Chucks Accessories for Vacuum Workholding Systems

Machine Vices and Pull Down VicesMulti-prism clamping blocks

Grinding Wheel Dressing and Profiling Devices, Indexers,Circular Grinding Equipment, Tool Setting Equipment

Holding Magnets, Magnetic MaterialMagnetic Tape, Organizing Magnets

SAV - The Company

The Company

SAV Workholding and Automation is a globally organised and respected manufacturer and supplier of high quality workholding and automation systems with emphasis on quality, precision and cost efficiency.

With almost 25 years of manufacturing experience and 180 employees SAVdevelops unique workholding, clampingand automation solutions, standard products and components that can be used for different applications.

SAV is presently one of the leadingmanufacturers and suppliers of Workholding solutions from-one-source in Europe and even the World. Among her customers are strong and leading automotiveindustries, leading machine tool manufacturers and distributors and moreover many high demanding end-users.

SAV focuses on innovation, new technologies and applications.

Wit her own qualified development and production facilities in Nurembergand Mittweida SAV is capable to react quick and flexible on specific customer requirements.

SAV Production GmbH Nuremberg

SAV-Mittweida GmbHMittweida

EXPERIENCED INNOVATIVE DIRECTIVE

SAV Spann- Automations- Normteiletechnik GmbH Nuremberg-Headquarters

Sales and Marketing Manufacturing / Engineering

SAV - The Company

The SAV group is represented worldwide

SAV Spann- Automations-Normteiletechnik GmbHSchießplatzstraße 36+38aD-90469 NurembergGermanyTel.: +49 - 911 - 9483-0Fax: +49 - 911 - 4801426Email: [email protected]

SAV Produktions GmbHNuremberg-EibachGundelfinger Straße 8D-90469 Nuremberg-EibachGermany

SAV Mittweida GmbHLeipziger Straße 29-31D-09648 MittweidaGermany Tel.: +49 - 37 27 / 99 95 - 0Fax: +49 - 37 27 / 99 95 - 346Email:[email protected]:www.sav-spanntechnik.de

F&K Prototypen undErodiertechnik GbRLeipziger Straße 31D-09648 MittweidaGermany Tel.: 037 27 / 99 95 - 265Fax: 0 37 27 / 99 95 - 257Email: [email protected]: www.fukpro.de

PARTEC Automatisierungstechnikund Handlingsysteme GmbHLeipziger Straße 29D-09648 MittweidaGermany Tel.: +49 - 3727 - 99950Fax: +49 - 3727 - 9995346Email: [email protected]: www.partec-chemnitz.de

EMATECH GmbHElektronik- und MagnettechnikLuitpoldstraße 32D-87700 MemmingenGermany

Germany HeadquartersSales and Marketing – Germany, Austria, Switzerland

NetherlandsSales and Marketing – International

Czech RepublicSales and Marketing – Central and Eastern Europe

North America Sales and Marketing – North America

SAV Workholding and AutomationSteenenstraat 8NL-3262 JM Oud-BeijerlandNetherlandsTel.: +31 - 186 - 626 469Fax: +31 - 186 - 627 153Email: [email protected]: www.sav-workholding.nl

SAV CZECH spol. s. r. o.Kotojedy 56CZ-767 01 KromerízCzech RepublicTel.: +420 - 573 - 334 062Fax: +420 - 573 - 331 456Email:[email protected]: www.sav-workholding.cz

Poland SAV POLSKA sp. z o.oul. Hetmanska 38PL-85-039 BydgoszczPolandTel.: +48 - 52 321 91 40Fax: +48 - 52 321 91 41Email: [email protected]: www.sav-polska.pl

SAV-North America Inc.250 Nutmeg Road South STE NSouth Windsor, CT. 06074USATel.: +1 - 860 - 882 - 0841Fax: +1 - 860 - 882 - 0844Email: [email protected]: www.sav-workholding-na.com

SAV ChinaHong Kong

coming soon

PolandSales and Marketing – Poland

ChinaSales, Service and Marketing – Asia

SAV - The Company

Product groups Workholding from one source

for milling

precision turning and sine table

dressing- and circular grinding tools

vacuum special solutions

vacuum chucks,round and square

standard and special pallets

pallet robots

for precision circular grinding

for hard turning for Quick Mould Change for lifting of loads

for precision surface grinding for a variety ofapplications

SAV Palletising and Automation

SAV Magnetic-Systems

SAV Precision-Systems SAV Vacuum Workholding

for precision profile grinding

SAV - The Company

multiple clamping on machine vices

multiple clamping of ejector pins

Digital precision indexer with mandrel

SAV mechanical clamping SAV jigs and fixtures

SAV Norm parts SAV Indexers

Product groups Workholding from one source

SAV - The Company

Production facilities

Production facilitiesFor the manufacturing of the CAD designed products a range of modern machines is available in the German production facilities.

We produce exclusively in our production facilities in Nuremberg and Mittweida Germany.

SAV - The Company


Naturally we apply our own standard products in our workshops. This allows our designers and engineers to test and improve our products and to initiate further development for our customers. The for our customers essential quality is constantly controlled by our quality management.

SAV - The Company


50 CNC-machining centres up to

5000 mm machining length

3 off 5 axis HSC milling machines

50 profile / surface / coordinate /

circular (internal and outside)

grinding machines up to 4000 mm

machining length.

9 wire cutting machines

3 sinker EDM machines

4 CNC turning machines

1 horizontal turning machine

up to diameter 3000 mm

4 coordinate measuring machines

range: x = 600 mm y = 1000 mm,

z = 465 mm

1 injection moulding machine

SAV - The Company

Engineering, Research and Development

Engineering of standard and special solutions

Using modern CAD work stations our staff design precisionproducts for standard and special applications and are thus able to offer our customers matured and state-of-the-art technology.Magnetic workholding requires specific experience which we have made available for our customers.To ensure the most flexible application of our catalogue products, weapply the many years of experience in the field of special workholdinginto the design of even more effective standard products.

Static FEM analysis for Electropermanent round chuck in segmented design.Diameter 2800 mm, extending over machine table; load 10 000 N.

Magnetostatic FEM-analysis for high energy magnetic systems for clamping of railway-rail; system magnetically saturated

Research and development are for SAV the basis for success.We develop for our customers magnetic, hydraulic, mechanical and vacuum workholding solutions, but also moulds and prototypesto customer specifications.Available are 11 linked CAD working stations in different locations.All are equipped with 3D systems and FEM calculation modulesfor magnetostatic, thermal, static and dynamic analysis.We work with Solid Works 2005, Catia V5, NesCAD 2005,AutoCAD R14, Mechanical Desktop and Euklid Design.The information exchange with customers can be made with following interfacing: IGES, DXF (all versions), DWG, STEP, VDA, PARASOLID, UNIGRAPHIC, CATIA-EXPORTED, CATIA-MODELL, VRML and STL.The designs are transferred to our manufacturing through CAC/CAM-applications NC-WORKS96 and PEPS CAD/CAM V4.2.7.

Leading in technology – for SAV not just words

SAV - The Company

Catalogue usage

Some chapters start with technical explanations and application examples.In chapter 15 you will find a summary of magnetic principles and experiences from praxis, which will help you to find your best solution.

Icons are used for different application fields:

Grinding Sinker-EDM Measuring Milling Drilling Turning Lifting Demagnetizing DressingWire cutting

General tolerances, unless specified differently;Dimensions to DIN 7168-mShape and Conditions to DIN 7168-sMetric ISO-threads to tolerance class middle

Holding forces, unless specified differently:The specific holding forces as mentioned in chapters 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 and 9 as holding forces of workpiece surfaces in N/cm2 are to be considered nominal holding forces!These refer to a test workpiece of 100 mm length, 100 mm width and 40 mm height made of ST 37 and with a ground surface. In case the application is based on different parameters these values do no longer apply.

In chapter 7 the break away forces for the lifting magnets are specified in daN. The break away force is the average of the maximum weights the tool could hold during several tests. This value may not be used to choose a lifting magnet for an application. Using the nominal holding force for ST 37 the right lifting magnet can be selected. The indicated values for flat and round lifting are to be considered for everyapplication. The values for round materials apply only in the specified diameter range. The thickness of the workpiece, as well as the material specification and surface conditions are to be taken into consideration. For further reference see chapter 15.

The nominal holding forces in N for electro and permanent-electro magnets in chapters 2 and 9 as well as for the magnetic auxiliary tools of chapter 10 and the pot magnets in chapter 11 shall be applied for100% coverage of the holding surfaces by a ground workpiece out of ST37. Holding force indications for the bare magnets of chapter 11 are not possible. These depend very much to the application geometries.

Regarding the electrical devices:In case no other information is presented, the relative rating in % refers to a period of 10 minutes.

All technical data subject to changeWe cannot be hold responsible for any printing errors.We will appreciate any indications of such errors.

Copyright:

© SAV Spann- Automations- und Normteiletechnik GmbH 2009 Layout: Design-Agentur-Otto 2009

1Chapter 1

CHAPTER 1 Page 01 - 16

Permanent Magnetic Chucks Remarks Pole pitch SAV-No. Page

Permanent Magnetic Workholding Systems application examples - - 02

Permanent Magnetic Vertical Chuck fine transverse poles P = 1.9 mm 242.90 03

Permanent Magnetic Chuck fine transverse poles P = 1.9 mm 243.01 03

Permanent Magnetic Chuck fine transverse poles P = 1.9 mm 243.07 04

Permanent Magnetic Chuck extreme low field height P = 1.9 mm 243.09 04

Neodymium Magnetic Chuck extreme high holding force P = 6 mm 243.10 05

Permanent Magnetic Chuck enhanced holding force P = 15 mm 243.11 06

Permanent Magnetic Chuck transverse poles P = 13 mm 243.12 07

Laminated Circular Top Plates

Laminated Circular Top Plate for circular magnetic chucks P = 3 / 1 mm 248.01 08

Laminated Circular Top Plate for circular magnetic chucks P = 6 mm 248.05 10

Laminated Circular Top Plate for circular magnetic chucks 248.06 13

Short Taper Adapters, Morse Taper Adapters

Short Taper Adapter without mounting bolts - 248.90 14

Short Taper Adapter with bayonet ring fixing - 248.91 14

Short Taper Adapter with camlock fixing - 248.92 15

Morse Taper Adapter - - 248.94 15

Accessories for Magnetic Circular Chuck - - - 16

Permanent Magnetic Circular Chucks

Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck parallel poles P = 8 / 5 mm 244.02 08

Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck parallel poles P = 6 mm 244.03 09



Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck radial poles - 244.06 10

Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck extreme high holding force P = 6 mm 244.07 12



2

Product Applications

Chapter 1 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

Permanent magnetic beam with high-energy magnetic system and mechanical actuation with roller bearings. With magneticisolated stop for grinding of workpieces and 20° angle.

HSC machining with magnetic pallet SAV 220.31 (see chapter 8)

Circular grinding with permanent circular magnetic chuck.In this application upto 300 different workpieces can be machined using 4 sets of pole raisers.

Spark-erosion with Neodymium circular magnet.

Milling on magnetic chuck.

3

Ordering example:Ordering key:


Chapter 1SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com

SAV 242.90Permanent Magnetic Vertical Chuck

Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.01

Other sizes available on request.

Use:Primarily for horizontal machining of workpieces.

Features: T-section block made from St 52-3 and supplied complete with permanent magnetic chuck SAV 243.01. Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1.4 mm steel. The T-section can also be supplied with other permanent, electro or electro-permanent chucks.

Parallelism and angularity: 0.005 / 100 mm Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2 Magnetic field height: 6 mmPole plate wearing limit: 8 mm

Permanent Magnetic Vertical Chuck SAV 242.90 - 500Name SAV - No. - A

Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.01 - 500 x 200Name SAV - No. - A x B

Use:For small, medium and large workpieces.

Features:Uninterrupted transverse pole arrangement.Constant holding force over the entire pole-surface area and along the side faces.Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1.4 mm steel.

Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2 Magnetic field height: 6 mmPole plate wearing limit: 8 mm

Available with flushing channels for spark erosion applications.

With fine transverse pole pitch P = 1.9 mm


0.51.4

A B C D E250 150 190 30 156 38.0350 150 190 30 156 52.0400 200 240 30 175 75.0500 200 240 30 175 93.5

Dimensions in mm Weightin kg

–2A B C+0,5 D140* 70 49 103 3.7175 100 49 147 7.0200 100 49 172 8.1250 100 49 220 13.2255 130 49 222 14.5150 150 51 115 9.8250 150 51 215 16.4300 150 51 265 19.7350 150 51 315 23.0


–2A B C+0,5 D400 150 51 365 26.2450 150 51 415 30.0300 200 51 267 26.2400 200 51 367 35.0500 200 51 466 43.7600 200 51 566 52.4500 250 56 464 58.5500 300 56 456 70.2600 300 56 557 84.2


C

A

C

BD5

*without mounting slots, actuation with tie-bar on short side. Stainless execution see chapter 8, SAV 243.16

A

B

C

E

D

9

4




SAV 243.07Permanent Magnetic Chuck

Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.09

Use: Very suitable for thin parts.

Features: Extremely low height. ON-OFF switching from above. Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1.4 mm steel. Flushing channel(s) available at a surcharge. Suitable for adaption on zero reference system on request (see chapter 8).

Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2

Magnetic field height: 6 mmPole plate wearing limit: 6 mm



Use:For small and medium size workpieces. Especially suitable for thin parts.

Features:Aluminium body with St 37 / V4A pole plate.Threaded holes for side stops and angle stops possible.

Magnetic field height: 4 mmPole plate wearing limit: 3 mmNominal holding force: 80 N/cm2

Pole pitch: 1.9 mm

Suitable for adaption on zero reference system on request (see chapter 8).


With pole pitch P = 1.9 mm, extremely low field height for spark erosion (EDM)

A

B

CE

D

F

1.4 0.5

A B C+0,5 D E F175 100 32.0 185 12.0 122 4.5255 130 32.0 265 11.5 200 8.5150 150 34.5 160 11.5 96 6.0250 150 34.5 260 11.5 194 10.0300 150 34.5 310 11.5 246 12.5350 150 34.5 360 11.5 295 14.0450 150 34.5 460 11.5 396 18.0400 200 35.0 410 11.5 344 23.0


A B C+0,5 D200 200 46 - 1 15.0240 240 46 204.5 2 19.0280 280 50 204.5 2 25.0320 320 58 246.0 2 32.0320 160 58 246.0 1 16.0480 280 62 204.5 4 40.0650 340 65 246.0 4 65.0


Switching sections

1,4 0,5

–2

–2

B

CD

A

5



SAV 243.10Neodymium Magnetic Chuck

Use: For workpieces that are particularly difficult to clamp, such as ferrotic and hard metals containing cobalt, as well as very small workpieces.

Features: Extremely high holding force due to a specially developed construction. Stable all-steel body. ON-OFF control on both end faces.Larger models - with power-operated switching mechanism - available on request. Laminations 4 mm St and 2 mm cast resin with NdFeB magnets in the pole gaps.


Magnetic field height: ca. 10 mmPole plate wearing limit: 3 mm

Neodymium Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.10Name SAV - No.

With transverse pole pitch P=6 mm neodymium-iron-boron magnets, extremely high holding force

A

BC

D D

A B C+0,5 D400 150 82 171 35.0


–2

Special sizes on request.

6




Use:Heavy machining, such as milling and planing. The dense, concentrated magnetic field enables it to be used for small, medium and large workpieces, including those with rough or uneven surfaces. The magnetic field is without any stray fields, preventing magnetization of the tool.

Features:Exceptionally strong neodymium magnetic system. ON-OFF control by means of hand lever. In the OFF position, a weak opposing field eases the removal of the workpiece. The magnets are equipped with longitudinal and transverse stop rails.

Laminations 3 mm brass / 12 mm steel.Suitable for use with laminated topplates:SAV 248.02 and SAV 248.03(see Page 14/15).


Magnetic field height: ca.12 mmPole plate wearing limit: 5 mm


With transverse pole pitch, P = 15 mm, neodymium-magnets, enhanced holding force

A B C+0,5 D250 150 56 199 17.0300 150 56 244 20.0350 150 56 289 24.0400 200 56 349 35.0500 200 56 439 44.0600 200 56 544 52.0600 300 56 544 67.0


–2

A

C

BD

7




Use:Heavy machining, such as milling and planing. The low magnetic field prevents the magnetization of the cutting tools. ON-OFF control by means of hand lever. Longitudinal and transverse end stops available on request. Suitable for use with laminated topplates:SAV 248.02 and SAV 248.03(see Page 14/15).

Features:Double magnet arrangement in stable cast iron housing.Laminations: 5 mm brass / 8 mm steel


Magnetic field height: ca.10 mmPole plate wearing limit: 7 mm


With transverse pole pitch, P = 13 mm, enhanced holding force

A B C+0,5 D F450 200 93 445 20 1 45.0500 200 93 495 20 1 50.0600 200 93 595 20 1 62.0800 200 93 795 20 2 82.0450 250 93 445 20 1 47.0500 250 93 495 20 1 64.0600 250 93 595 20 1 78.0750 250 93 745 20 2 97.0

1000 250 93 945 20 2 129.0400 300 93 395 20 1 72.0500 300 93 495 20 1 90.0600 300 93 595 20 1 100.0800 300 93 795 20 2 130.0900 300 93 895 20 2 153.0

1000 300 93 995 20 2 180.0

Dimensions in mm Number of levers

B 5

58

C

DF

A

–2

Weightin kg

8




SAV 244.02Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck

Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.02 - 500Name SAV - No. - A

Use:Sizes A = 200 to 500 mm for turning and grinding, sizes 100 to 160 for grinding.

Features: Exceptional strong magnetic field. Concentric grooves simplify the centring of the workpiece. A centre drilling of up to diameter E is permis-sible, depth of drilling must not exceed 8 mm forA = 100 to 200 mm and 15 mm for A = 250 to 500 mm. Also available with flange (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see Page 14/15). For additional top plates see 248.01.

With parallel pole arrangement, enhanced magnetic system

Nominal holding force: 140 N/cm2 (A= 200 to 500 mm)70 N/cm2

(A= 100 to 160 mm)

Magnetic field height: 10 mm

Pole plate wearing limit: 8 mm

DDØCH7

ØA

ØFG

B

ØE

Dimensions in mm Weightin kgA B+0.5 C D E F G

100 62 70 2.5 - 91 3 x M5 4/1.5 2/1.5 1 3.0130 62 90 2.5 - 120 4 x M6 4/1.5 2/1.5 1 5.0160 75 125 3.0 - 142 4 x M8 6/5 1 8.0200 80 150 4.5 - 182 4 x M8 8/5 1 13.0250 80 200 4.5 20 232 4 x M8 8/5 1 20.0300 85 250 4.5 20 285 4 x M8 8/5 1 29.0350 85 300 4.5 20 334 4 x M8 8/5 1 40.0400 100 300 5.0 20 350 6 x M10 8/5 1 59.0450 100 350 5.0 20 400 6 x M10 8/5 2 70.0500 100 400 5.0 20 450 6 x M10 8/5 2 90.0

Pole pitchsteel / brass

Switchingpositions

–2

SAV 248.01Laminated Circular Top Plate

Use: Clamping of profiled workpieces on circular chucks with parallel pole arrangement. Only usable in conjunction with circular magnetic chuck SAV 244.02 and 244.05.

Features: Silver brazed steel/brass construction. Can be machined to any required shape, or custom machined during manufacture. Connection to magnet to be agreed upon.Lamination must be parallel to magnetic chuck.

Pole pitch: steel 3 mm, brass 1 mm

Laminated Circular Top Plate SAV 248.01 - 500Name SAV - No. - A

Dimensions in mm

For use on circular chucks with parallel pole arrangement

1

3

B

ØA

A B155 25 4.0200 25 6.0250 25 10.0300 25 14.0350 25 19.0400 30 30.0450 30 37.5500 30 46.0

Weightin kg

9






Use: Clamping of small and thin to medium-sized workpieces.

Features: Extremely low height due to use of neodymium-iron-boron magnets. Pole pitch P = 2.5 mm. Holding force continuously variable. Available with flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see Page 14/15).



Other sizes on request.

With fine parallel pole pitch P = 2.5 mm

B

E A

D

G

CF

B

E A

D

CF

Dimensions in mm Weightin kgA B+0.5 C D E F G

160 43 125 2 140 4 x M8 14 6.5200 43 160 2 180 4 x M8 14 10.0250 43 200 2 224 4 x M10 14 15.0300 45 230 3 260 4 x M10 14 25.0

Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.03

Use: Small and medium-sized workpieces.

Features: Special magnetic configuration enabling the maximum holding force to be reached with workpieces as thin as 1 mm. ON-OFF control by means of a detachable socket wrench (radial adjustment). Available with flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see Page 14/15).




With parallel pole pitch P = 7 mm, flat edition

Dimensions in mmWeightin kgA B+0.5 C D E

100 32 80 87.5 3 1.1150 32 130 137.5 3 2.6

7

M5

–1

B

E

ØD

ØA

ØCH

7

–2

10






Use:For cylindrical and ring-shaped workpieces.

Features: High holding force. Concentric grooves to simplify workpiece alignment. Through hole possible up to maximum diameter D. Supplied as standard without through hole in centre. Central region (diameter C) not magnetically active. Available with flange on request(SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see Page 14/15). For additional top plates see 248.05Bigger diameters available with T-slots on request.

Number of poles

With radial pole arrangement

I

ØH

ØA

FB

ØC

ØGØEH7

ØDJ

Dimensions in mm Weightin kgA B+0.5 C D E F G H I J

100 48 14 - 51 6 76 - M6 8 6 3130 57 16 20 50 5 100 - M6 10 10 6150 57 20 24 50 5 80 120 M6 8 10 8200 57 28 30 60 5 110 180 M6 8 12 14250 70 30 50 80 5 140 220 M6 8 16 27300 73 40 58 150 6 180 260 M8 10 16 41350 73 40 58 170 6 220 300 M8 12 20 55400 75 40 58 200 8 260 340 M8 12 20 75

–2


Features: Can be machined to any required shape, or custom machined during manufacture.Suitable for SAV 244.06.Mounting to be agreed upon.

Machinable depth: max. 8 mm

For bigger profiling depth, available with size B up to 25 mm


Larger sizes available on request

B

For use on circular chuck 244.06 with radial poles

Dimensions in mmA B

150 20 10 3.0200 20 12 5.0250 20 16 8.0300 25 16 14.0350 25 20 19.0400 25 20 24.5

Weightin kg

Number of poles

ØA


Pole plate wearing limit: 5 mm (for A = 150 to 300 mm) 10 mm (for A = 350 to 400 mm)

4 mounting holes per pitch circle

11






Switchable

Use:As an auxiliary magnet to be used on a circular chuck for holding smaller, delicate workpieces. Also suitable for fixtures and as a holding magnet.

Features:Switchable permanent magnet, holding surface on the upper face.

Pole arrangement: ø 50 mm 1.5 mm brass / 6 mm steel, ø 80 mm 2 mm brass / 8 mm steel

B

ØCH7

ØD

ØA

E

Nominal holding force

in N

Dimensions in mmWeightin kgA B+0.5 C D E

50 50 25 35 4 x M5 85 0.780 65 50 60 4 x M6 500 2.2

–2

Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.05


Use: For workpieces that are difficult to clamp.

Features: Extremely high holding force combined with slim construction. Available with flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see Page 14/15). Laminations 3 mm steel / 2 mm brass / 8 mm steel.


Magnetic field height: 15 mmTop plate wearing limit: 10 mm

With parallel pole arrangement P = 5 / 10 mm, enhanced magnet system

3 8

ØCH7

4B15

ØDØA

E

Dimensions in mm Weightin kgA B+0.5 C D E

125 55 100 112 M6 (4x) 4.5160 55 125 140 M8 (4x) 7.5200 55 160 180 M8 (4x) 12.0250 55 200 224 M10 (4x) 18.0315 55 250 280 M10 (4x) 29.0400 55 315 355 M10 (4x) 47.0

–2

12



Neodymium Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.07

Neodymium Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.07 - 160Name SAV - No. - A

Use: For workpieces that are particularly difficult to clamp, such as ferrotic and hard metals containing cobalt, as well as very smallworkpieces.

Features: Aluminium housing, pole plate made from tool steel. Extremely high holding force through a specially developed construction using neodymium-iron-boron magnets. Available with flange on request(see SAV 248.90 to 248.94).

Nominal holding forceon induced steel surface: 180 N/cm2


Pole plate wearing limit: 3 mm

Available with adapters for reference system(see chapter 8)

For difficult workpieces, with parallel pole arrangement, P=6 mm

L

H

KJ

I G

Pole configuration

Ø A

F

B

Ø CH7

Ø E

D

9,5

Also suitable for small parts

G

100

10

6

6

5

0,8 mm thickness

A B+0.5 C D E F G H I J K L100 65 70 4 90 M6 (4x) - - 48 - - 74 2.0125 65 95 4 110 M8 (4x) - 88 54 - 98 67 3.0160 65 125 4 140 M10 (4x) - 104 54 - 134 61 4.5180 65 125 4 160 M10 (4x) 124 84 64 134 97 61 6.5200 65 125 4 180 M10 (4x) 134 104 74 158 110 73 8.5

–2

Dimensions in mmWeightin kg

13




Laminated Circular Top Plate SAV 248.06


Features: Can be machined to any required shape, or custom machined during manufacture. The maximum machined depth must not exceed 12 mm.Suitable for SAV 244.08.

With radial pole arrangement for chuck SAV 244.08

B

ØA

Dimensions in mm

A B150 20 2.8180 20 4.0200 20 4.9250 20 7.7300 20 11.1350 20 15.1400 25 24.7450 25 31.3500 25 38.6600 25 55.6

Weightin kg



Use: Clamping of medium and large workpieces.For light turning.Features: Robust construction. Holding force continuously variable. Concentric grooves to simplify alignment of the workpieces. Available with flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 06). For additional top plates see 248.06. Nominal holding force 80 N/cm2


With parallel pole arrangement

ØA

D

ØE

F

B

ØCH7parallel pole arrangement

Dimensions in mm Weightin kgA B+0.5 C D E F

150 52 100 6 120 4 x M6 6.0180 52 100 6 120 4 x M6 8.0200 52 120 6 150 4 x M6 11.0250 70 120 8 230 3 x M10 19.0300 70 120 8 270 3 x M10 27.0350 70 120 8 270 3 x M10 46.0400 75 120 8 270 3 x M10 63.0450 75 120 8 270 3 x M10 112.0500 80 120 8 270 3 x M10 150.0600 80 120 10 270 3 x M10 200.0

–2

3 resp. 4 mounting holes per pitch circle

14




SAV 248.90

Use: Mounting of circular magnetic chucks or other clamping tools to short taper spindle noses of type DIN 55026 (55021) form A and B, ISO 702/I A1 and A2, ASA B5.9 A1 and A2.

Features: Mild steel adapter in accordance with DIN, ISO and ASA-standards. Fully prepared on spindle-side. Preparations for chuck side carried out in accordance with customer‘s requirements (please supply suitable drawing). Rotary magnets can be supplied ready fitted with adapter.

Short Taper Adapter SAV 248.90 - 4 - DIN 55026Name SAV - No. - Spindle nose size - Standard

* For spindle nose type DIN 55026** For spindle nose type DIN 55021

Short Taper Adapter without mounting boltsTo fit circular magnetic chucks to spindle nose

B

ØA

ØC

Dimensions in mm

A B C3 75.0 18 454* 82.6 18 454** 85.0 18 455 104.8 24 606 133.4 28 808 171.4 32 90

11 235.0 35 12015 330.2 42 120

Spindle nose size

SAV 248.91Short Taper Adapter with bayonet ring fixingTo fit circular magnetic chucks to spindle nose

Use: Mounting of circular magnetic chucks or other clamping tools to short taper spindle noses of type DIN 55027 (55022) and ISO 702/III

Features: Mild steel adapter in accordance with DIN, ISO and ASA-standards with studs and bayonet ring fixing. Fully prepared on spindle-side. Preparations for chuck side carried out in accordance with customer‘s requirements (please supply suitable drawing). Circular chucks can be supplied ready fitted with adapter.

Short Taper Adapter SAV 248.91 - 15 - DIN 55027Name SAV - No. - Spindle nose size - Standard

* For spindle nose type DIN 55027** For spindle nose type DIN 55022

B

ØA

ØC

Dimensions in mm

A B C3 75.0 18 40 34* 82.6 18 45 34** 85.0 18 45 35 104.8 24 60 46 133.4 28 80 48 171.4 32 90 4

11 235.0 35 120 615 330.2 42 120 6

Spindle nose size

Number of studs

Sizes B, C, and D as well as mounting holes pitch circle according requirements or customer specification.


15




SAV 248.92Short Taper Adapter with camlock fixingTo fit circular magnetic chucks in accordance with DIN 6353

Use: Mounting of circular magnetic chucks or other clamping tools to short taper spindle noses of type DIN 55029, ISO 702/II and ASA b5.9 D1.

Features: Mild steel adapter in accordance with DIN, ISO and ASA-standards. Fully prepared on spindle-side. Preparations for chuck side carried out in accordance with customer‘s requirements (please supply suitable drawing). Circular chucks can be supplied ready fitted with adapter.

Short Taper Adapter with camlock fixing SAV 248.92 - 15Name SAV - No. - Spindle nose size

Dimensions in mm

A B C3 70.6 28 45 34 82.6 28 45 35 104.8 30 60 66 133.4 35 80 68 171.4 40 90 6

11 235.0 45 120 615 330.2 50 120 6

Spindle nose size

Number of studs

B

ØA

ØC

SAV 248.94Morse Taper AdapterTo fit circular magnetic chucks to morse taper sockets

Morse Taper Adapter SAV 248.94 - MK 6 Name SAV - No. - Morse taper size

Use: Mounting of circular magnetic chucks or other clamping tools to morse taper sockets of type DIN 228

Features: Mild steel adapter in accordance with DIN. Fully prepared on spindle-side. Preparations for chuck side carried out in accordance with customer‘s requirements (please supply suitable drawing). Circular chucks can be supplied ready fitted with adapter.Hardened and ground version made from case hardening steel available on request.

D

ØA

ØC

ØB

Dimensions in mm

A B C DMK 0 9.045 6.4 — 50.0MK 1 12.065 9.4 M 6 53.5MK 2 17.780 14.6 M 10 64.0MK 3 23.825 19.8 M 12 81.0MK 4 31.267 25.9 M 16 102.5MK 5 44.399 37.6 M 20 129.5MK 6 63.348 53.9 M 24 182.0

Taper size


Sizes accordingrequirements orcustomer application.

16 Chapter 1 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

Accessories for Magnetic Circular Chuck

Top plates

Circular Magnetic Chucksare available with flanges and top plates.

Flanges

17Chapter 2SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com


Electro Magnetic Rectangular Chucks Remarks Pole pitch SAV-No. Page

Electro Magnetic Workholding Systems information and application examples - - 18-19

Electro Magnetic Chuck fine transverse poles P = 4 mm 243.40 20-21

Electro Magnetic Chuck fine logitudinal poles P = 4 mm 243.41 22-23

Electro Magnetic Chuck transverse poles P = 13/18/25 mm 243.42 24-25

Electro Magnetic Circular Chucks

Electro Magnetic Circular Chuck radial poles - 244.40 26-27

Electro Magnetic Chuck concentric poles P = 4.5/9/18 mm 244.41 28-29

Electrical connections to circular chucks

Slip Ring Body for circular magnetic chucks - 248.81 30

Carbon Brush Holder for circular magnetic chucks - 248.83 30

Electro Magnetic Circular Chucks examples of electrical connections - - 31-32



Electro Magnetic Circular Chuck in segmentsDiameter 5400 mm for machining of toothed rings.

Production of housing for circular magnets, milled from one piece, tension-free annealed.

Special Electro Magnetic Chuck With 16 individual switchable magnetic segments, for automatic grinding of ferrite cores.

Electro Magnetic Circular ChuckDiameter 1500 mm with T-slots for mounting of pole raisersfor 3-side machining of large rings.


Electro Magnetic Chucks

The achievable magnetic holding forces of electro magnets are linear to the required direct current coils and because of that with the dimensions of the magnets and their thermal behaviour.

Electrical power supply has to be ensured on the magnet while in operation. Consequently the use of slip ring systems and carbon brushes is necessary when using round magnets on turning machines. Similar to electro motors these are subject to wear and will have to be replaced after certain time of use. To supply these chucks electronic polarity reversing control units are used, which do not only supply the required energy but at the same time can demagnetize workpiece and chuck after operation.

Clarifications and application examples

Electro magnetic chucks

Particularly for turning applications specific control features are required to ensure constant voltage supply, also at emergency stop.

Since the supplied energy will transfer completely into heat, these chucks will show dimensional growth of several 0.01 mm, depending on chuck size.

The indicated nominal holding forces per effective workpiecedimension relate to a test workpiece made of ST37, length100 mm x width 100 x thick 40 mm with ground surface. Clarifications to the function and influences on holding forces can be found in the applicable chapters and in more detail in the technical clarifications as presented in chapter 15.

Components for electro circular chucksIn contrary to many other power actuated chucks, the electro magnetic and also the electro permanent chucks (Chapter 3) require only three components for the energy supply:Electronic Polarity-Reversing Control unit; hand control unit (remote) and the set of slip ring body and carbon brushes.The control unit converts the available mains alternating voltage into the required direct voltage and is used for demagnetizing. Any required interlocking to the machine can be made to customer specifications.

Slip ring body and carbon brushes: see chapter 2/3Electronic Polarity-Reversing Control units: see chapter 4

Electro circular chuck in special executionCircular electro-permanent magnetic chuck for hard turning application diameter 4000 mm manufactured out of 2 piecesturning application diameter 4000 mm manufactured turning application diameter 4000 mm manufactured


Electromagnetic system with very narrow pole pitch. Especially suitable for thin workpieces. Workpiece positioning in length direction of the chuck.

Auxiliary equipment:- sidestop rail on short and long face

- connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face

- lifting bolts on larger models

Nominal operating voltage: 24 V DC up to 118 W110 V DC for all sizes

Features:- especially fine, uninterrupted transverse pole pitch, 3 mm steel and 1 mm brass

- glued lamination with additional pull anchors cross to lamination

- fine grid pole plate to body connection

- 8 mm pole plate wearing limit

- low magnetic field height of only 4 mm

- mounting slots in both short faces

- through holes in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification

- robust and waterproof

- sealed to IP 65

- suitable for continuous (100%) operation

- for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04)

SAV 243.40Electro Magnetic ChuckWith fine transverse pole pitch P = 4 mm

Nominal holding force: 100 N/cm2,adjustable with control unit with encoded switch

2

90

Use:Clamping of thin, plate shaped workpieces with form and positional tolerances of 0.01 to 0.02 mm.

- for workpiece positioning cross to pole pitch

- for thin workpieces of min. 2 mm thick

- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions 40 x 40 mm

40

21



Powerratingin W

Electro Magnetic ChuckName

Other sizes and operating voltages available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be made by flush mounting several units.Please refer to SAV 876.10 to SAV 876.06, for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating (chapter 04).

SAV 243.40Electro Magnetic ChuckWith fine transverse pole pitch P = 4 mm

1

3

C

B

-1A B C 0 D450 175 87 397 106 51.0

400 200 87 349 118 52.0500 200 87 453 140 64.0600 200 87 549 162 77.0800 200 87 749 206 103.0

500 250 87 453 150 81.0600 250 87 549 180 97.0800 250 87 749 233 129.0

500 300 87 453 175 97.0600 300 87 549 206 116.0800 300 87 749 268 155.0

1000 300 87 949 330 193.0


Powerratingin W-1A B C 0 D

600 350 87 549 235 135.0800 350 87 749 305 180.0

1000 350 87 949 375 225.0

600 400 87 549 265 155.0700 400 87 653 310 181.0800 400 87 749 345 206.0

1000 400 87 949 425 258.01200 400 87 1149 510 310.0

800 500 87 749 422 257.01000 500 87 949 510 322.01200 500 87 1149 605 386.0


SAV 243.40 - 1200 x 500 - 110 VSAV - No. - A x B - Operating voltage

AD


SAV 243.41Electro Magnetic Chuck

Electromagnetic system with very narrow pole pitch. Especially suitable for thin workpieces. Workpiece positioning in cross direction of the chuck.

Use:Clamping of thin, plate shaped workpieces with form and positional tolerances of 0.01 to 0.02 mm.



- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions 40 x 40 mm

Auxiliary equipment:- sidestop rail on short and long face




Features:- especially fine, uninterrupted longitudinal pole pitch, 3 mm steel and 1 mm brass

- glued lamination with additional pull anchors cross to lamination



- low magnetic field height


- through holes for mounting in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification


- sealed to IP 65


- for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (chapter 04)

With fine longitudinal pole pitch P = 4 mm

Nominal holding force:100 N/cm2,adjustable with control unitwith encoded switch

402

90

23




Electro Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.41 - 300 x 150 - 110 VName SAV - No. - A x B - Operating voltage

Other sizes and operating voltages available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be made by flush mounting several units.Please refer to SAV 876.10 to SAV 876.06, for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating

With fine longitudinal pole pitch P = 4 mm

A

B

CD


600 350 87 301 235 135.0800 350 87 301 305 180.0

1000 350 87 301 375 225.0

600 400 87 349 265 155.0700 400 87 349 305 180.0800 400 87 349 345 206.0

1000 400 87 349 425 258.01200 400 87 349 510 310.0

800 500 87 453 420 257.01000 500 87 453 510 322.01200 500 87 453 612 386.0



200 100 87 53 30 13.0300 100 87 53 45 20.0

300 150 87 101 65 29.0400 150 87 101 90 39.0

450 175 87 125 106 51.0

400 200 87 149 118 52.0500 200 87 149 140 64.0600 200 87 149 162 77.0800 200 87 149 206 103.0

500 250 87 197 150 81.0600 250 87 197 180 97.0800 250 87 197 233 129.0

500 300 87 253 175 97.0600 300 87 253 206 116.0800 300 87 253 268 155.0

1000 300 87 253 330 193.0


1

3


This chuck is particularly notable for its high power, robust construction and long-life. The pole pitch gives real N and S-poles.

Features:- solid contructed pole plate with either 13 mm, 18 mm or 25 mm pole pitch

- real magnetic (N/S) poles

- water cooling system on request

- air pressure release system on request for P = 18 or 25 mm

- gap free construction of pole plate




- through holes in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification


- sealed to IP 65


- for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04)Nominal holding force:

90 N/cm2, at pole pitch P = 13 mm110 N/cm2, at pole pitch P = 18 mm115 N/cm2, at pole pitch P = 25 mmadjustable with control unit with encoded switch Auxiliary equipment:

- sidestop rail on short and long face




SAV 243.42Electro Magnetic ChuckWith transverse pole pitch P = 13 mm, 18 mm and 25 mm

Use:For universal clamping of workpieces with form and positional tolerances of 0.01 to 0.02 mm.


- for workpieces with min. thickness = x: 4.5 mm at P = 13 mm 6.0 mm at P = 18 mm 8.5 mm at P = 25 mm

- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions = a: 25 mm x 25 mm at P = 13 mm 32 mm x 32 mm at P = 18 mm 45 mm x 45 mm at P = 25 mm

xa

90

25




Electro Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.42 - 2000 x 800 - 25 - 110 VName SAV - No. - A x B - P - Operating voltage

With transverse pole pitch P = 13 mm, 18 mm and 25 mm

Other sizes and operating voltages available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be made by flush mounting several units.Please refer to chapter 04, SAV 876.10 to SAV 876.06, for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating(see chapter 04).

A

C

Powerratingin W-1A B C 0 D P

600 400 90 525 18 166 134.0700 400 90 697 18 187 156.0800 400 90 741 18 208 179.0

1000 400 90 921 18 255 224.01200 400 90 1101 18 329 269.0

800 500 90 730 25 254 224.01000 500 90 930 25 341 280.01200 500 90 1130 25 374 336.01250 500 90 1180 25 390 350.01500 500 90 1430 25 458 420.01600 500 90 1530 25 489 438.02000 500 90 1930 25 576 560.0

1000 600 90 930 25 361 382.01200 600 90 1130 25 441 459.01250 600 90 1180 25 459 478.01500 600 90 1430 25 487 573.01600 600 90 1530 25 520 611.02000 600 90 1930 25 607 764.0

1500 800 90 1430 25 730 764.01600 800 90 1530 25 693 815.02000 800 90 1930 25 810 1018.0


Powerratingin W-1A B C 0 D P

200 100 90 120 13 19 11.0300 100 90 224 13 31 17.0

300 150 90 224 13 42 25.0400 150 90 328 13 52 34.0

450 175 90 381 18 64 44.0

400 200 90 309 18 66 45.0500 200 90 417 18 83 56.0600 200 90 525 18 89 67.0800 200 90 741 18 120 90.0

500 250 90 417 18 94 70.0600 250 90 525 18 109 84.0800 250 90 741 18 127 112.0

500 300 90 417 18 110 84.0600 300 90 525 18 128 101.0800 300 90 741 18 171 134.0

1000 300 90 921 18 209 168.0

600 350 90 525 18 148 118.0800 350 90 741 18 191 157.0

1000 350 90 921 18 239 196.0


B

D

P

D

P


SAV 244.40Electro Magnetic Circular Chuck

These circular electro magnets are notable for their very high holding force. Radial T-slots can be provided in the pole plates for added flexibility.

Use:Grinding of circular and ring-shaped workpieces on carrousel internal and external grindingmachines. Also suitable for turning with form and position tolerances of 0.01 to 0.02 mm.

- equal pole pitch within circle range; therefore very suitable for circular and ring shaped workpieces

- for ring-shaped workpieces the minimum height is 35% of the pole pitch at the given circle segment

- also for thin rings

Nominal operating voltage: 24 V DC up to 90 W110 V DC all sizes

Scope of supply:- Lifting bolts for transportation on larger models.

- T-slots and pole extensions not included as standard.

- Terminals for electrical connection in middle of back side in standard execution.

- Optional with integrated slip ring body for the bigger diameters.


Nominal holding force:120 N/cm2,adjustable by control unit with encoded switch

Features:- solid designed pole plate

- radial pole arrangement, especially suitable for the use of pole raisers. This is absolutely essential for the runout of the tool or the grinding wheel at three side operation. Therefore available with T-slots (T) according DIN 650-10H10 on request.

- pole plate wearing limit 8 mm

- sealed to IP 65


- for use with control unit type 876.10 (see chapter 04)

- available with adapter flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 01)

0.35

x P

P

=

=

di <

0.9

do

27




Electro Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.40 - 800 - T - 110 VName SAV - No. - A - Execution - Operating voltage

Other sizes up to diameter A = 3100 mm available on request. Please refer to SAV 876.03 to SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04), for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating. Bigger sizes can be constructed out of several segments.


B

ØA

H

ØE

FØCH

7

D

G

number of pole pairs P

I

Dimensions in mm

A B 0 C D E F G H I P100 80 60 3 80 M8 (3x) 12 30 10 3 16 4150 80 90 3 120 M10 (3x) 14 30 10 3 30 9200 90 110 3 140 M10 (4x) 14 40 10 4 48 18250 90 140 3 170 M12 (4x) 16 50 10 4 66 29300 90 160 3 190 M12 (4x) 16 60 10 6 90 42400 90 210 4 250 M12 (6x) 16 70 15 6 150 76500 90 280 4 320 M12 (6x) 16 100 15 8 190 120600 100 350 4 390 M16 (6x) 18 100 15 8 265 195700 100 400 4 450 M16 (6x) 18 120 15 8 350 265800 100 450 4 500 M16 (6x) 18 150 18 12 440 365

1000 100 550 4 620 M16 (8x) 18 200 18 12 660 5501200 125 300 25 18 960 9901400 125 300 25 18 1100 13501500 125 300 25 18 1440 15501600 125 300 25 18 1630 1760

-1

Rear detail as requiredRear detail as requiredRear detail as requiredRear detail as required

Powerin W

Weightin kg*

*in execution with T-slots the height increases with 10 mm


These circular electro magnets generate a strong, ring-shaped and low magnetic field.

Features:- gap free construction of pole plate

- fine grid poleplate to body connection


- sealed to IP 65


- for use with control unit type 876.10 (see chapter 04)

- available with adapter flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 01)

Nominal operating voltage: 24 V DC up to 90 W110 V DC all sizes

Scope of supply:- Lifting bolts for transportation on larger models.

- Terminals for electrical connection in middle of backside in standard execution.

- Optional with integrated slip ring body for the bigger diameters.

SAV 244.41Electro Magnetic Circular Chuck With concentric pole arrangement

Nominal holding force:P = 4.5 mm: 80 N/cm2

P = 9 mm: 100 N/cm2

P = 18 mm: 110 N/cm2

adjustable by control unit with encoded switch

Use:Mainly for grinding of disc shaped work pieces on internal and external grinders with rotary tables. Not suitable for thin rings. Because of the concentric pole arrangement it is also suitable for holding groups of randomly placed workpieces.Also suitable for turning with form and position tolerances of 0.01 to 0.02 mm.

- for circular grinding

- uniform holding force distribution due to concentric pole arrangement; therefore suitable for thin and flat workpieces (e.g. saw blades)

- multiple workpiece operation on segments possible

- for workpieces with min. thickness = x: 2 mm at P = 4.5 mm 4 mm at P = 9.0 mm 8 mm at P = 18.0 mm

- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions 45 mm x 45 mm

x

45

29




Electro Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.41 - 800 x 18 - 110 VName SAV - No. - A x P - Operating voltage

Other sizes available on request. Please refer to SAV 876.03 to SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04), for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating.

With concentric pole arrangement

Dimensions in mm

A B 0 C D E F G H I P100 80 60 3 80 M8 (3x) 12 22 9 4.5 16 4150 80 90 3 120 M10 (3x) 14 30 12 4.5 30 9200 90 110 3 140 M10 (4x) 14 40 16 4.5 48 18250 90 140 3 170 M12 (4x) 16 45 16 4.5 66 29300 90 160 3 190 M12 (4x) 16 55 16 4.5 90 42

400 105 210 4 250 M12 (6x) 16 46 21 9 150 92500 105 280 4 320 M12 (6x) 16 74 21 9 190 144600 105 350 4 390 M12 (6x) 18 66 21 9 264 208700 105 400 4 450 M12 (6x) 18 76 21 9 350 283800 105 450 4 500 M16 (6x) 18 129 22 9 440 369

1000 105 550 4 620 M16 (8x) 18 131 22 9 660 577

400 105 210 4 250 M12 (6x) 16 46 21 18 150 92500 105 280 4 320 M12 (6x) 16 74 21 18 190 144600 105 350 4 390 M12 (6x) 18 66 21 18 264 208700 105 400 4 450 M12 (6x) 18 76 21 18 350 283800 105 450 4 500 M16 (6x) 18 138 22 18 440 369

1000 105 550 4 620 M16 (8x) 18 140 22 18 660 577

1200 125 22 131 23 9 960 9891400 125 22 136 26 9 1100 13461500 125 22 101 26 9 1440 15451600 125 22 129 26 9 1630 1760

1200 125 22 140 23 18 960 9891400 125 22 136 26 18 1100 13461500 125 22 128 26 18 1440 15451600 125 22 138 26 18 1630 1760

-1


Powerin W

Weightin kg


B

ØA

ØHØE

F

ØCH

7

D

G

P

I

30 Chapter 2



Technical data subject to change without prior notice

SAV 248.81Slip-Ring Body

Carbon Brush Holder SAV 248.83

Slip Ring Body SAV 248.81 - 1600Name SAV - No. - Max. circular chuck diameter

Carbon Brush Holder SAV 248.83 - 1600 - 110 VName SAV - No. - Max. chuck size - Operating voltage

Use:These carbon brush holders are required to supply current to the slip-ring bodies SAV 248.81 for use with circular electromagnetic chucks.Available in three sizes, and supplied with terminals.

Execution: Spring-loaded carbon brushes. Mounting on taps.

Use:Slip-ring bodies are used in combination with carbon brushes to supply power to circular electromagnetic chucks. The slip-ring body can be mounted separately to the hollow machine spindle.When installing it must be assured that the insulation components do not come into contact with coolant or other fluids. Suitable protection must be provided to prevent contact with live components.Mounting:- shrinking at 130 oC- pressing with 0.5 mm oversize- glueingExecution:The slip-ring body is supplied with a small through hole only. The required adapterthrough-bore is to be machined in accordance with the machine spindle dimensions and taking the maximum size E into account.

For electric power supply to circular electromagnetic chucks

For electric power supply to circular electromagnetic chucks

Dimensions in mm

A B C D Eto 300 24 2 80 40.0 20 M5 28 - 38 3600 1.1to 900 110 3 90 61.5 22 M6 30 - 45 3200 2.0to 1600 110 3 120 84.0 25 M8 40 - 65 2500 3.5

Max. r.p.m.

For circular magnet - Ø

Chuck voltage

in V

Number of

contacts

Weight in kg

A B C D E F Gto 300 24 2 140 40 M8 12.5 6.3 20 27.0 0.10to 900 110 3 140 40 M8 12.5 6.3 20 25.0 0.17to 1600 110 3 140 60 M8 20 8.0 25 36.5 0.20


Chuck voltage

in V

Number of

contacts

Weight in kg

A

E

ØC

D F

B

D

BC

ØA

Ø

G

Distance G to slip ring body

ØE

Dimensions in mm


Electro Magnetic Circular ChucksElectric power supply with external slip ring unit

Carbon Brush Holder Flange

E-Connection

Circular ChuckMachine SpindleSlip Ring Body


Electro Magnetic Circular ChuckElectric power supply with central flat slip ring unit with vertical mounting for larger magnetic chucks

Pole Plate

Axial Carbon Brush Holder

Magnetic Chuck Housing

Removable Cover

Flat Slip-Ring Body



Electro-Permanent Magnetic Rectangular Chucks Remarks Pole pitch SAV-No. Page

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Workholding Systems Information and application examples - - 34-45

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Transverse poles P=13/18/25mm 243.70 46-47

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Fine longitudinal poles P = 4 mm 243.71 48-49

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Fine longitudinal poles P = 4 mm 243.72 50-51

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Fine transverse poles P = 4 mm 243.73 52-53

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Modular poles 140 x 105 mm 243.74 54-55

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Fine transverse poles P=27.5/55/85 243.77 56-60

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck In special execution for milling of rails - 243.77 RAIL 61

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Hexagonal poles 60 mm 243.79 62-63

Pole raisers

Pole raisers fixed and flexible - 248.70 64

Pole raisers Information and application examples - - 64-65

Electro-Permanent Circular Chucks

Hard-turning applications Information and application examples - - 66

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck radial poles - 244.70 68-69

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck radial poles, enhanced system - 244.71 70-71

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck concentric poles P=4.5/9/18mm 244.72 72-73

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck fine parallel poles P = 4 mm 244.73 74-75

Electrical connections to circular chucks

Carbon Brush Holder for circular magnetic chuck - 248.84 76

Slip-Ring Body for circular magnetic chuck - 248.85 76

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chucks Examples of electrical connections - - 77-78



Milling of pole plates

Milling of train rails

Milling of prism beams of cast iron

Grinding application of magnetic chuck housing

Special magnetic fixtureWith enhanced holding force for laser cutting and welding of car parts



Electro-permanent magnetic system in high energy execution with changeable pole beams for grinding of linear guides,lengh 4000 mm.

Electro permanent swivelling chuck, for machining of press brake tools, 4 separate switchable magnetic systems, changeable pole blocks, length 1000 mm, with NC indexer



Electro permanent magnetic chuckwith pole beams, for hard milling of tools

Electro-permanent magnetic chucks:With separate magnetizable side stops for workpiece positioning.Automatic 3 shift operation. Milling of thin steel sheets.

Electro permanent magnetic chucksfor milling of press-top-plates with extreme air gaps.With mechanic swivelling side stops for 5 side machining

Electro permanent magnetic milling chuck:In special execution with separate magnetizable side stops for small workpieces.Extreme high holding forces through sidewaysmagnetic coupling.



Electro permanent magnetic chucks:For grinding of linear guides on changing fixtures. With integrated hydraulic side stop.

Electro permanent magnetic chucksas changing pallet for grinding of linear guides. Machining of 2 workpieces on top of each other; 4 slots are ground simultaneously.

Electro permanent magnetic chucks:For high precision, use for grinding of measuring foiles. Air-pressure holes integrated in the pole plate for easyremoval of the workpieces.



Electro-permanent magnetic chuck:for square grinding of linear guides. Length 2000 mm.

Electro-permanent magnetic chuck:for grinding of linear guides, with magnetic active side stops. Length 1300 mm.

Electro-permanent magnetic chuck:with transverse movable magneticactive side stops. Length 1300 mm,for grinding of linear guides.

Electro-permanent magnetic chuck:in precision execution with transverse poles, enhanced magneticsystem. Total length 4322 mm; monoblock construction, for grinding of 2 linear guides clamped on top of each other.



Electro-permanent magnetic chuckfor parallel milling of plates. Combined pole pitch 27.5 mm and modular poles for machining of bigger plates and narrow strips.

Electro-permanent magnetic chucks:For precise grinding of cyclo-gear parts. Special long poles with enhanced holding force.3 slots for mechanical centring elements.

Electro-permanent magnetic chuckwith profiled top plate.


Permanent-electro, as well as electro-permanentmagnetic chucks provide versatile use forworkpiece clamping.

Electro-permanent magneticclamping fixture for machining of cast iron parts on machining centers in first and second clamping on pallet systems.

1st clampingDrilling and milling operation against fixed side stops. Positioning of workpieces on fixed and flexible pole raisers. Anti-rotation feature for circular milling through changeable side stops.

2nd clampingDrilling and milling operation. Workpiece holding over socket pins. Fixed positioning of ready-milled surfaces on pole raisers and bridges.

SAV 095.34according to your requirements

Technical advice and application examples for permanent, electro, and electro-permanent magnetic chucks (rectangular and circular) instandard execution can be derived from chapters1, 2 and 3. Further details, especially regardingpossible holding forces, are summarizedin chapter 15.




Grinding of pole plates on electropermanent magnetic chucks.

Electro-permanent magnetic fixturefor hard milling of crank-shaft moulds.Clamping cube with 4 angular magnets.Dimensions 1400 x 1400 mm.

Electro permanent magnetic chucks:In precision execution for grinding ofextreme thin foils.



Electro-permanent magnetic milling fixture:Size 1900 x 750 mm, for heavy chip removal, including pole beams for 5-side machining and swivelling, position-monitored, side stops.



Flexible pole raisersfor 5 side machining of uneven workpieces

Electro permanent magnet: With mounted profiled special adapter plate for grinding of knives.

Electro-permanent magnetic beams in special executions.With Neodymium magnetic system for milling operation of linear guides.

44 Chapter 3



Product Applikation Electro-Permanent Magnetic PalletsWith magnetic, hydraulic, mechanical and vacuum workholding

General requirements:The workholding system as designed to customer specifications is utilized on a horizontal/vertical milling machine as a replacement of 2 worn-out NC-machining centres.

Relevant requirements:- high machining flexibility and quality for a wide range of workpieces- 4 to 5 side machining of complex parts of different sizes for drilling and milling- Short set-up times- Easy cleaning- Easy maintenance- To be modified to existing grid clamping system- Flatness and positioning accuracy 0.02 mm on 2.8 m.- Also thin parts shall be clamped free of tension- Combination of magnetic, mechanical, hydraulic and vacuum clamping principles.

Execution:To be able to meet the requirements a special magnet was designed on basis of the SAV 243.77, with vacuum, hydraulics and with a grid system:

Special vacuum-magnetic cuck with hydraulics and grid system

Combined application with hydraulic and magnetic clamping using pole extension

Hydraulic vices:The vices with a length of 1327 mm and 130 mm width provide a maximum clamping force of 38 kN.The clamping range can be set stepless using spindle and grid. The compact design can be cleaned easily due to the integrated hydraulic supplies.The hydraulic interface is realised using quick-connector-couplings in magnet and vices. After positioning with ball-bolts the vices are clamped magnetically.

Magnetic chuck:The total chuck in size of 2,800 x 1,030 mm consistsof 5 magnets which can be controlled individually. The neodymium-high energy magnetic system provides a strong magnetig field over the entire width and with a high force depth suitable for milling. The electro-permanent principle allows for highest precision without heat related growth. Milling of uneven parts can be assured by using fixed and flexible pole extensions as top tooling.

Vacuum system:To be able to clamp also non-magnetic parts, the magnetic pole plate has a vacuum field integrated with a grid of 80 mm. Unused vacuum channels can be individually closed. In the last of the connected chucks a differential pressure switch will give machine release on sufficient vacuum pressure. The supply lines inside the chucks also provide additional vacuum capacity.

Grid system:The grid system allows for free positioning on tappedholes over the entire length of 2,800 mm with an accuracyof 0.02 mm.


Clamping control:With the conveniently arranged clamping control panel the 4 different clamping principles can be selected.A supervisory SPS releases the machine with clamped magnet, vacuum system or vices.

With magnetic, hydraulic, mechanical and vacuum workholding

Milling operation on non-magnetic Aluminium-partson hydraulic vices.

Milling machine with control panel

Detailed view on grid clamping

We manufacture magnets combined with other clamping principles on customer specification in any required size. For further questions, please do not hesitate to contact us.We are happy to give you our technical support.

Vacuum display in % Clamping type selector switch

Machine release

Indicator choosenChuck for hydraulics

Presetting

Hydraulic vice

Indicators for selected magnets

Holding force selectorRange settingfor hydraulics

Display hydraulic pressure inBar and holding force in kN

Release for selectedHydraulic ranges

10 step holding force selector switch for hydraulics

Applications of Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chucks

46 Chapter 3



SAV 243.70

Use:For universal clamping of precision workpieces.


- for workpiece with min. thickness = x 4.5 mm at P = 13 mm 6.0 mm at P = 18 mm 8.5 mm at P = 25 mm

- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions = a: 25 mm x 25 mm at P = 13 mm 32 mm x 32 mm at P = 18 mm 45 mm x 45 mm at P = 25 mm

This range of magnetic chucks belongs to the new generation of electro-permanent magnetic chucks and is notable for its very robust, homogeneous design and its precision. The magnetic force is produced by permanent magnets that are magnetized and demagnetized by short electric current pulses. This chuck is particularly notable for its high power and long-life. The pole pitch gives real N and S-poles.

Auxiliary equipment:- side stop rail on short and long face- connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face- lifting bolts on larger models

Nominal operating voltage:210 V DC up to size A x B = 600 x 400 360 V DC above size A x B = 450 x 175

Features:- solid contructed pole plate with either 13 mm, 18 mm or 25 mm transverse pole pitch- real magnetic (N/S) poles- switching off through demagnetizing cycle- heat treated tension free body- electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure- air pressure release system on request for P = 18 or 25 mm- gap free construction of pole plate- fine grid pole plate to body connection- extra enhanced systems available on request- pole plate wearing limit 8 mmpole plate exchangeable- mounting slots in both short faces- through holes for mounting in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification- robust and waterproof- sealed to IP 65- for use with control unit type SAV 876.03 / SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04)

Nominal holding force: 90 N/cm2, at pole pitch P = 13 mm110 N/cm2, at pole pitch P = 18 mm115 N/cm2, at pole pitch P = 25 mmadjustable with control unit with encoded switch

Electro-Permanent Magnetic ChuckWith continuous transverse pole arrangement P = 13, 18 and 25 mm

90

xa

47



SAV 243.70

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.70 - 2000 x 800 - 25 - 360 V Name SAV - No. - A x B - P - Operating voltage

Electro-Permanent Magnetic ChuckWith continuous transverse pole arrangement P = 13, 18 and 25 mm

A B C0 D P200 100 80 120 13 11.0 210 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

300 100 80 224 13 17.0 210 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

300 150 80 224 13 25.0 210 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

400 150 80 328 13 34.0 210 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

450 175 80 381 18 44.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

400 200 80 309 18 45.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

500 200 80 417 18 56.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

600 200 80 525 18 67.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

800 200 80 741 18 90.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

500 250 80 417 18 70.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

600 250 80 525 18 84.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

800 250 80 741 18 112.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

500 300 80 417 18 90.0 210 / 360 30 876.10

600 300 80 525 18 108.0 210 / 360 30 876.10

800 300 80 741 18 145.0 210 / 360 30 876.10

1000 300 80 921 18 180.0 210 / 360 30 876.10

600 350 80 525 18 126.0 210 / 360 30 876.10

800 350 80 741 18 168.0 210 / 360 30 876.10

1000 350 80 921 18 210.0 210 / 360 30 876.10

Dimensions in mm

-1

Other sizes and operating voltages available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be made by flush mounting several units.Please refer to SAV 876.10 to SAV 876.03, for details regarding suitable control units, based on max. current or control voltage(see Chapter 04).

A

BC

D

P

A B C0 D P600 400 80 525 18 145.0 210 / 360 30 876.10

700 400 80 697 18 169.0 360 30 876.10

800 400 80 741 18 193.0 360 30 876.10

1000 400 80 921 18 240.0 360 30 876.10

1200 400 90 1101 18 289.0 360 30 876.10

800 500 80 730 25 241.0 360 30 876.10

1000 500 80 930 25 301.0 360 30 876.10

1200 500 90 1130 25 361.0 360 30 876.10

1250 500 90 1180 25 376.0 360 30 876.10

1500 500 90 1430 25 450.0 360 30 876.10

1600 500 90 1530 25 480.0 360 60 876.10

2000 500 90 1930 25 602.0 360 60 876.10

1000 600 80 930 25 361.0 360 30 876.10

1200 600 90 1130 25 433.0 360 30 876.10

1250 600 90 1180 25 451.0 360 30 876.10

1500 600 90 1430 25 542.0 360 30 876.10

1600 600 90 1530 25 578.0 360 60 876.10

2000 600 90 1930 25 722.0 360 60 876.10

1500 800 90 1430 25 723.0 360 60 876.10

1600 800 90 1530 25 771.0 360 60 876.10

2000 800 90 1930 25 963.0 360 60 876.10

Dimensions in mm

-1

Chuckvoltage

in VWeightin kg

Suitable control unit

Control unitmax. current

in A

Chuckvoltage

in VWeightin kg


SAV 243.71

Electro-permanent magnetic system with very small pole pitch.The magnetic force is produced by permanent magnets that are magnetized and demagnetized by short electric current pulses. This chuck is particularly notable for its high power, robust construction and long-life. Especially suitable for thin parts; workpieces cross to length of chuck.

Use:For clamping of thin and flat high precision workpieces.



- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions of 40 mm x 40 mm

- high precision due to fine grid poleplate to body connection

- switching off through demagnetizing cycle


- low magnetic field height

- heat treated tension-free body

- electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure


- extra enhanced systems available on request

- through holes for mounting in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification


- sealed to IP 65

- for use with control unit type SAV 876.03-SF0-EP up to size A x B= 400 x 150 / SAV 876.10 above size A x B= 400 x 150 (see chapter 04)

Auxiliary equipment:- side stop rail on short and long face


- with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request




Electro-Permanent Magnetic ChuckWith fine longitudinal pole pitch P = 4 mm

Features:- pole plate with very small longitudinal pole pitch of 3 mm steel and 1 mm brass

- glued lamination with additional pull anchors in length direction of chuck

- gap free construction of pole plate

402

90

49



SAV 243.71

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.71 - 1200 x 500 - 360 V Name SAV - No. - A x B - Operating voltage

Other sizes and operating voltages available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be made by flush mounting several units.Please refer to SAV 876.10 to SAV 876.03, for details regarding suitable control units, based on max. current or control voltage(see Chapter 04).

Electro-Permanent Magnetic ChuckWith fine longitudinal pole pitch P = 4 mm

1

3

A B C 0 D200 100 77 53 12.0 210 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03300 100 77 53 18.0 210 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

300 150 77 101 26.0 210 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03400 150 77 101 34.0 210 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

450 175 77 125 44.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

400 200 77 149 45.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03500 200 77 149 56.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03600 200 77 149 67.0 210 / 360 30 876.10800 200 77 149 90.0 210 / 360 30 876.10

500 250 77 197 70.0 210 / 360 30 876.10600 250 77 197 84.0 210 / 360 30 876.10800 250 77 197 112.0 360 30 876.10

500 300 77 253 86.0 360 30 876.10600 300 77 253 103.0 360 30 876.10800 300 77 253 137.0 360 60 876.10

1000 300 77 253 172.0 360 60 876.10

600 350 77 301 120.0 360 30 876.10800 350 77 301 160.0 360 60 876.10

1000 350 77 301 200.0 360 60 876.10

600 400 77 349 137.0 360 30 876.10700 400 77 349 160.0 360 30 876.10800 400 77 349 183.0 360 30 876.10

1000 400 77 349 229.0 360 60 876.101200 400 87 349 275.0 360 60 876.10

800 500 77 453 229.0 360 60 876.101000 500 77 453 286.0 360 60 876.101200 500 87 453 344.0 360 60 876.10

Chuck voltage

in V


in A-1

CB D

A




SAV 243.72Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck

This newly developed clamping system with magnetic stop rails provides a simple, reliable and secure method for positioning and clamping workpieces for machining. This helps to avoid positioning errors, particularly when used in multi-shift operation. The magnetic force is produced by permanent magnets that are magnetized and demagnetized by short electric current pulses. Especially suitable for thin parts.

Use:Best suited for precision grinding of mass production components. For toolmaking, the system facilitates µm-precise machining with respect to the datum edge. Also for light milling.

- control of magnetizable side stops can be operated in time sequence

- for thin workpieces of up to 12 mm thick. (depends on heigth of stoppers)

- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions 40 mm x 40 mm.

- especially fine, uninterrupted longitudinal pole arrangement- glued lamination with additional pull anchors in length direction of chuck- gap free construction of pole plate- high precision due to fine grid pole plate to body connection- switching off through demagnetizing cycle- pole plate wearing limit 8 mm- low magnetic field height- heat treated tension free body- electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure- mounting slots in both short faces- extra enhanced systems available on request- robust and waterproof- sealed to IP 65- for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04)


Nominal operating voltage:360 V DC

Standard equipment:- 1 or 2 magnetizable stop rails- connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face- with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request- lifting bolts on larger models

With fine longitudinal pole pitch P = 4 mm and magnetizable stop rails

Features:- 2 strong bipolar magnets for the stop rails and 2 longitudinal pole magnets to provide accurate and secure alignment of the workpieces- the magnetization of the stop rails takes place prior to that of the main clamping surface, using a special control routine. The workpiece is thus pulled firmly into the lower edge of the stop rail.

1240

51



SAV 243.72Electro-Permanent Magnetic ChuckWith fine longitudinal pole pitch P = 4 mm and magnetizable stop rails

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.72 - 800 x 400 - 360 VName SAV - No. - A x B - Operating voltage

*Other heights on request. The table gives a summary of the standard sizes available. Custom-made versions are available on request. Please refer to SAV 876.10 for control unit details.

The magnetizing cycle starts with magnetizing just the stop rails. The workpiece is thus pulled with a force FA, at an angle of 45°, into the corner between the stop rail and the chuck surface.

Approximately 1 second later, the main chuck surface is switched on to generate the main clamping force FH.

Control unitmax.current

in A-1

A

BC

D

FAF H

F H FA

1

3

A B C 0 D*400 200 77 12 1 45.0 30 x 2 876.10500 200 77 12 1 56.0 30 x 2 876.10600 200 77 12 1 67.0 30 x 2 876.10

400 300 77 12 2 68.0 30 x 2 876.10500 300 77 12 2 86.0 30 x 2 876.10600 300 77 12 2 103.0 30 x 2 876.10

600 400 77 12 2 137.0 30 x 2 876.10800 400 77 12 2 183.0 30 x 2 876.10

Number of stop rails

Weightin kg


Dimensions in mm



Electro-permanent magnetic system with very small pole pitch. The magnetic force is produced by permanent magnets that are magnetized and demagnetized by short electric current pulses. Especially suitable for thin parts; workpiece positioning in length direction of chuck.

Features:- pole plate with very small longitudinal pole pitch of 3 mm steel and 1 mm brass- glued lamination with additional pull anchors in length direction of chuck- gap free construction of pole plate- high precision due to fine grid pole plate to body connection- switching off through demagnetizing cycle- pole plate wearing limit 8 mm- low magnetic field height - heat treated tension free body- electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure- mounting slots in both short faces- extra enhanced systems available on request- through holes for mounting in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification- robust and waterproof- sealed to IP 65- for use with control unit type SAV 876.03-SF0-EP up to size A x B = 600 x 300 SAV 876.10 above size A x B = 600 x 300 (see chapter 04)

Auxiliary equipment:- side stop rail on short and long face- connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face- with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request- lifting bolts on larger models



With fine transverse pole pitch P = 4 mm

Use:For clamping of thin and flat high precision workpieces.


- for thin workpieces of min. 2 mm thick.

- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions of 40 mm x 40 mm.

402

90

53





With fine transverse pole pitch P = 4 mm

A B C 0 D450 175 77 397 44.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03

400 200 77 349 45.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03500 200 77 453 56.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03600 200 77 549 67.0 210 / 360 30 876.10800 200 77 749 90.0 360 30 876.10

500 250 77 453 70.0 210 / 360 30 876.10600 250 77 549 84.0 210 / 360 30 876.10800 250 77 749 112.0 360 30 876.10

500 300 77 453 90.0 210 / 360 30 876.10600 300 77 549 108.0 210 / 360 30 876.10800 300 77 749 145.0 360 30 876.10

1000 300 77 949 180.0 360 60 876.10

600 350 77 549 126.0 360 30 876.10800 350 77 749 168.0 360 30 876.10

1000 350 77 949 210.0 360 60 876.10

600 400 77 549 145.0 360 30 876.10700 400 77 653 169.0 360 30 876.10800 400 77 749 193.0 360 30 876.10

1000 400 77 949 240.0 360 60 876.101200 400 87 1149 289.0 360 60 876.10

800 500 77 749 241.0 360 30 876.101000 500 77 949 300.0 360 60 876.101200 500 87 1149 361.0 360 60 876.10

Dimensions in mm Suitable controlunit

Weightin kg

Chuck voltagein V


in A

1

3

-1

Other sizes and operating voltages available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be made by flush mounting several units. Please refer to SAV 876.10 to SAV 876.03, for details regarding suitable control units, based on max. current or control voltage (see Chapter 04).

C

BAD


SAV 243.74Electro-Permanent Magnetic ChuckWith modular pole arrangement for milling

Features:- optimized high energy magnetic system- holding forces in physically maximum range- modular pole arrangement 140 mm x 105 mm for universal use- cost efficient system, magnetically optimized- total chuck surface active, no "dead" zones- solid mono-block construction- real magnetic (N/S) poles - electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure- pole separation with brass for optimal wear behaviour- pole plate wearing limit 8 mm- mounting slots in both short faces- through holes in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification- robust and waterproof- sealed to IP 65- for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04)

Use:For milling applications with coarse chip removal. Ideal for use on indexing pallet systems

- for heavy duty milling

- for workpieces of min. 15 mm thick

- for workpieces with min. dimensions of 140 mm x 105 mm

Auxiliary equipment:- connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face- with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request- lifting bolts on larger models


Nominal holding force:16.5 kN per module

This clamping system with neodymium-iron-boron magnets was developed in accordance with the most modern standards in magnet technology. Exceptionally high holding forces arise through the use of AlNiCo/ Neodymium magnets in an electro-permanent magnetic configuration. Magnetization and demagnetization are achieved through short electric current pulses.

1510

5

140

special fixed pole raisers on request

55



SAV 243.74


Other sizes available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be created by using two or more chucks adjacently. Please refer to SAV 876.10, for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating (see Chapter 04).

Electro-Permanent Magnetic ChuckWith modular pole arrangement for milling

Dimensions in mm Weightin kgA B C 0

560 315 80 12 107.0 30 876.10

560 420 80 16 140.0 60 876.10840 420 80 24 209.0 60 876.10

1120 420 80 32 280.0 60 x 2 876.101680 420 80 48 420.0 60 x 2 876.10

1050 560 80 40 348.0 60 x 2 876.10

840 630 80 36 316.0 60 x 2 876.101120 630 80 48 417.0 60 x 2 876.101400 630 80 60 520.0 60 x 3 876.101680 630 80 72 620.0 60 x 3 876.101960 630 80 84 729.0 60 x 4 876.10

1400 840 80 80 693.0 60 x 4 876.10


in ANumber of modules

-1

A

B

140

105

C



SAV 243.77Electro-Permanent Magnetic ChuckWith transverse pole arrangement, suitable for milling work Pole pitch P = 27.5, 55 and 85 mm

This clamping system with neodymium-iron-boron magnets was developed in accordance with the most modern standards in magnet technology. Exceptionally high holding forces arise through the use of AlNiCo/ Neodymium magnets in an electro-permanent magnetic configuration. Magnetization and demagnetization are achieved through short electric current pulses.

Features:- optimized high energy magnetic system- holding forces in physically maximum range- due to transverse pole arrangement high flux concentration to the workpiece- due to deep magnetic field bigger air gaps can be bridged- total chuck surface active, no "dead" zones- solid mono-block construction- real magnetic (N/S) poles- electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure- pole separation with brass for optimal wear behaviour- pole plate wearing limit 8 mm- tapped holes grid for fixed or flexible pole raisers on request (M)- T-slots possible on pole pitch P = 85 mm according DIN 650-10H10 (T)- mounting slots in both short faces- through holes for mounting in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification- robust and waterproof- sealed to IP 65- for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04)

Auxiliary equipment:- connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face- with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request- lifting bolts on larger models

Use:For heavy milling work with coarse chip removal. Ideal for use on indexing palette systems

- for workpiece with min. thickness = x: 8.0 mm at P = 27.5 mm 20.0 mm at P = 55.0 mm 35.0 mm at P = 85.0 mm

- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions a: 45 x 45 mm2 at P = 27.5 mm 95 x 95 mm2 at P = 55.0 mm 150 x 150 mm2 at P = 85.0 mm

Nominal holding force:195 N/cm2 on full induceable steel load 110 N/cm2 at P = 27.5 mm150 N/cm2 at P = 55.0 mm170 N/cm2 at P = 85.0 mmadjustable with control unit with encoded switch


xa

special edition with totaltransversal pole-pitchand pole-beams

57



Electro-Permanent Magnetic ChuckSuitable for milling work

SAV 243.77 - 27.5

Use:Heavy milling of thin plates- min. thickness of workpiece: 5 - 8 mm- min. size of workpiece: 45 x 45 mm2

- nominal holding force: 110 N/cm2

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.77 - 1180 x 500 - 27.5 - 360 V Name SAV - No. - A x B - P - Chuck voltage

A B C 0 D P410 200 80 100 27.5 2 15 30 46.0 30 876.10520 200 80 100 27.5 2 19 38 58.0 30 876.10630 200 80 100 27.5 2 23 46 71.0 30 876.10

520 300 80 100 27.5 3 19 57 87.0 60 876.10630 300 80 100 27.5 3 23 69 107.0 60 876.10800 300 80 100 27.5 3 29 87 135.0 60 876.10

630 400 80 150 27.5 3 23 69 143.0 60 x 2 876.10800 400 80 150 27.5 3 29 87 180.0 60 x 2 876.10

1015 400 80 150 27.5 3 37 111 228.0 60 x 2 876.10

800 500 80 200 27.5 3 29 87 225.0 60 x 2 876.101015 500 80 200 27.5 3 37 111 285.0 60 x 2 876.101180 500 80 200 27.5 3 43 129 331.0 60 x 3 876.10


in A

Number of threads total (M)

-1

Optional number of threads per pole (M)

Number of poles (M)

Weightin kg

Dimensions in mm

Small transverse pole arrangement

A

P

B

D

(option M)

M8

C

SAV 243.77-27.5

58 Chapter 3



Electro-Permanent Magnetic ChuckSuitable for milling work

SAV 243.77 - 55

A

P

B

DC

(option M)

M8Use:For universal maching and heavy milling.- min. thickness of workpiece: 20 mm- min. size of workpiece: 95 x 95 mm2


Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.77 - 1580 x 500 - 55 - 360 VName SAV - No. - A x B - P - Chuck voltage

A B C 0 D P480 300 97 60 55 4 9 36 94.0 30 876.10590 300 97 60 55 4 11 44 116.0 30 876.10810 300 97 60 55 4 15 60 159.0 30 876.10

1030 300 97 60 55 4 19 76 202.0 30 876.101140 300 97 60 55 4 23 92 224.0 30 x 2 876.10

810 400 97 80 55 5 15 75 212.0 30 876.101030 400 97 80 55 5 19 95 270.0 60 876.101140 400 97 80 55 5 23 115 299.0 60 876.101580 400 97 80 55 5 29 145 414.0 60 876.102020 400 97 80 55 5 37 185 529.0 60 x 2 876.10

1030 500 97 70 55 7 19 133 337.0 60 876.101140 500 97 70 55 7 23 161 373.0 60 876.101580 500 97 70 55 7 29 203 517.0 60 x 2 876.102020 500 97 70 55 7 37 259 661.0 60 x 2 876.10


in ANumber of threads

total (M)-1


Number of poles (M)

Weightin kg

Dimensions in mm

Middle transverse pole arrangement


SAV 243.77-55

59



SAV 243.77-85

Use:For heavy milling of largeand thick workpieces.For large air gaps.

- min. thickness of workpiece: 35 mm- min. size of workpiece: 150 x 150 mm2


SAV 243.77 - 85

A

P

B

DC

M8(option M) (option T)

10H10

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.77 - 1600 x 600 - 85 - 360 VName SAV - No. - A x B - P - Chuck voltage

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck

A B C 0 D P580 300 110 90 85 3 7 21 129.0 30 876.10750 300 110 90 85 3 9 27 167.0 30 876.10

750 400 100 90 85 4 9 36 203.0 60 876.101090 400 100 90 85 4 13 52 294.0 60 876.101430 400 100 90 85 4 17 68 386.0 60 876.101600 400 100 90 85 4 19 76 432.0 60 876.10

750 500 110 90 85 5 9 45 278.0 60 876.101090 500 110 90 85 5 13 65 405.0 60 876.101430 500 110 90 85 5 17 85 531.0 60 876.101600 500 110 90 85 5 19 95 594.0 60 x 2 876.10

1090 600 110 90 85 6 13 78 486.0 60 876.101430 600 110 90 85 6 17 102 637.0 60 x 2 876.101600 600 110 90 85 6 19 114 713.0 60 x 2 876.10


in A-1


Number of poles (M) / T-slots (T)

Weightin kg

Dimensions in mm

Large transverse pole arrangement

Suitable for milling work


Number of threadstotal (M)



Rail milling fixture, 12 m, hydraulic centering, magnetic changeable pole plates


SAV 243.77 RAILElectro-Permanent Magnetic ChuckSpecial execution for milling of rails.

This clamping system with neodymium-iron-boron magnets was designed specifically to clamp rail sections for milling operations. This multiple section system is used in such a way that in the first stage the side support is activated after which the main magnetic base is activated, thus ensuring optimal alignment and support of the rail section.

Use:For heavy milling work with coarse chip removal. Milling of rails according to customers requirements.

Nominal holding force:195 N/cm2, on full induceable steel load


Features:- optimized high energy magnetic system- holding forces in physically maximum range- due to deep magnetic field bigger air gaps can be bridged- solid mono-block construction- real magnetic (N/S) poles- electro-permanent-magnetic system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure- robust and waterproof- sealed to IP 65- for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04)

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.77 - 1960 x 315 - 360 V - Rail Name SAV - No. - Length x Width - Operating voltage


Standard equipment:- connecting cable- with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request

- FH is generated in the second step to provide the main force at the base of rail.

- FA is for alignment of rail.This is done normally with a transvers-pole pitch of 120 mm. This magnet creates a deep magnetic field to handle large air gaps.

FA

FH


Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.79With hexagonal poles for milling

Application:

For heavy milling with high feed.Ideal for application on pallet exchange systems.

- for work pieces with min. thickness of X = 16 mm- for flat work pieces with min. a = 100 x 100 mm2

Developed especially for universal use on milling machines.Double, enhanced magnetic system for extreme high holdingforces at low magnetic field height.

Use:For heavy milling operation with high chip removal.Ideal for use on pallet changing systems.

- for milling operations, high chip removal- for workpieces min. 16 mm thick- for workpieces with min. dimensions of 100 x 100 mm²

Execution:- optimized high energy magnetic system- low design- holding forces in physically possible maximum- multidimensional flux lines- low stray losses – high efficiency- equally spread holding forces- hexagonal pole configuration allows a universal application- the magnetic system with high intensity also bridges bigger air gaps- total chuck surface active, no dead zones- low magnetic field height- electro-permanent magnetic system for absolute safe operation during power failure- pole separation with brass for optimal wear behaviour- tapped holes M8 for optional pole raisers- pole surface wearing limit 8 mmclamping edges on both longitudinal sides- robust und waterproof- sealed to IP 65- for use with control unit type SAV 876.10

Nominal operating voltage:- 360 V DC- Control unit 400 V AC

Nominal holding force:- 150 N/cm²- 450 daN per pole- adjustable with control unit with encoded switch

Scope of supply:- connecting cable, 3 m, on right-hand short side, back- clamps- on request available with industrial watertight plug-in type connector- lifting bolts on larger models.

ax

63



Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.79

Ordering example: Ordering key:

Full pole-raiser SAV 248.70 - 55-PVS-RVName SAV - No. - Execution

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.79 - 770 x 500 - 360 VName SAV - No. - A x B - Chuck voltage

Dimension in mm Numberof poles

Chuckvoltage in V

Weightin kg

Control unit max.imp. current

in A

Suitablecontrol unitA B C 0

360 250 68 12 360 45 30 876.10500 350 68 30 360 88 60 876.10630 450 68 48 360 143 60 876.10770 500 68 56 360 194 60 x 2 876.10

-1

A

BC

With hexagonal poles for milling

Accessory pole raisers:

full pole raiserSAV 248.70-55-

PVS-RV

half pole raiserSAV 248.70-55-

PVS-RH

flexible pole raiserSAV 248.70-60-

PVF-RV

64 Chapter 3




Advantages for use: - 5-side-access possible- free space for tools and through holes - reduction of air-gaps- even manufacturing of bended blanks- mechanical stopper or negative pattern of workpiece for increased shearing forces and easy set up

Directions for use:- magnetic short cuts between N- and S-pole are to be avoided- pole raisers shall not cross the pole gaps (brass)- holding force increases with the number of pole raisers (contact surface)- to select the number of pole raisers, the restoring force of flexible pole raisers shall be less than the weight of workpiece

SAV 248.70Pole Raisers fixed and flexibleTo accommodate workpiece geometry and allow 5-side machining

Pole Raisers SAV 248.70 - 70 - PVS 3Name SAV - No. - A - Type

Use: As a raised support for workpieces on a magnetic chuck. Only useable on magnetic chucks SAV 243.77-55 and SAV 243.77-85.

Features: Made of cold-drawn steel, the pole raisers can be machined to any shape. The table shows an extract from our standard range.Can be supplied with specific machined dimensions, prepared for costumer‘s workpiece dimension.Restoring force per pole raiser about 10 N.Custom designs available on request.

Type PVS 3 and PVS 4: Rigid, for fixed support.

BC

8,5

Dimensions in mm

A B CPVS 3 48 40 53.5 0.8PVS 4 70 70 86.5 3.3PVF 3 48 40 56.0 0.8PVF 4 70 70 89.0 3.5

Weight in kgType

Flexible Pole RaisersSpring loaded in axial direction. For clamping of rugged workpieces with bended shapes. Suitable for reaching evenness in a first set up.

Fixed Pole RaisersProfiled shapes possible. Workpiece is pulled down by magnetic forces. Suitable for reaching high parallelity.

workpiece

flexible pole raisers

fixed pole raisers

workpiece

fixed pole raisers

Type PVF 3 and PVF 4: Mechanically flexible, for light components.

Application of Pole Raisers

stro

ke 5

mm

BC

8,5

A A


Product Application for Pole raisersFor turning and milling operations

Pole raisers for face milling: - Tool steel - Dimensions 400 x 400 x 80 mmTool: - Tipped face mill - Diameter D = 150 mmCutting parameters - Number of cuts 6 x 150 mm - Speed n = 450 1/min - Feed f = 540 mm/minMachine- and cutting power - Machine power P = 23 kW - Cutting rate Q = 486 cm3/min

Pole raisers for turning applicationsHard turning of thin roller bearings on 3 sides with fixed and flexibel pole raisers. The pole raisers for circular magnets must the adjusted individually.We design and produce pole raisers for special applicationson request.Please inform us of your application in order to give a good solution for your clamping needs.

Workpiece - Tool steel - Dimensions 1000 x 1000 x 200 mmTool - Tipped face mill - Diameter D = 315 mmCutting parameters - Number of cuts 6 x 300 mm - Speed n = 130 1/min - Feed f = 390 mm/minMachine- and cutting power - Machine power P = 22,6 kW - Cutting rate Q = 702 cm3/min

Pole raisers for the welding chamfer preparation

Workpiece - Low carbon steel - Dimensions 2000 x 800 x 15 mmTool - End mill - Diameter D = 30 mm

Cutting parameters - Number of cuts 12 x 15 mm cutting depth - Speed n = 2000 min-1

- Feed f = 1200 mm/min

Machine- and cutting power - Machine power P = 8.7 kW - Cutting rate Q = 216 cm3/min

Pole raisers for contour millingObective is to reduce the air-gap at uneven workpiecesand to prevent deformation of workpiece.


Hard Turning Applications

Electro-permanent magnetic chucks combine the advantages of the reliablility and minimum maintenance needs with ease of operation and automation comfort.

The magnetizing of the system is realized through a short current impulse. From that moment a permanent magnetic holdingforce is available. The electric supply can be removed during operation, which does not only give handling advantages (especially in use as changing pallet), but also a high safety standard can be guaranteed.

Special developed electro-permanent magnetic systems allow for an uncomplicated use of Neodymium magnets for the design of very strong systems, which mark the present state of magnetic technology.

For activation of the electro-permanent magnets, electronic polarity reversing control units are available, which do not only used for current supply, but also for demagnetizing of workpiece and pole plate.

By magnetizing through current impulse no heat is generated so that no deformation of the pole plate takes place. Thereby the highest demands in terms of dimensional, form and surface tolerances can be accomplished.

Under certain circumstances, the pole plate of the magnetic chucks can give a (functional dependant) deformation of some µm due to the holding force. We therefore advice that the surface of the pole plate will be slightly turned-off or ground in switched-on position. To guarantee the maximum available holding forces one should, in all circumstances, take themaximum consumption of the top plate into account.

The indicated holding forces per workpiece surface are based on a test workpiece made from St 37 (mild steel),100 x 100 x 40 mm (l x w x h) with ground surfaces. Further influences on the holding forces can be derived from the applicable chapters and the detailed technical information in chapter 15.

Advice and application examples

Hard turning on electro-permanent circular magnet

Studies performed on hard turning of roller bearings resulted in excellent results with the use of SAV magnetic workholding technology. In the picture a similar circular magnetic chuck with large diameter is shown.

The clamping was made on fixed pole raisers, so that one face, as well as inner- and outer diameter can be machined in one set-up. Conventional clamping tools only allow for the machining of only 2 sides.

The surface conditions, dimensional and formtolerances of competitive workholding solutions such as radial mandrel, axial clamping chuck and pendle-jaw chucks could be reduced and reproducedsignificantly with the use of magnetic clamping technology. See table on right.

Despite the unfavourable roller bearing material (100CrMo73 with 15% rest-austenite), at virtually static load a magnetic holding forces of 6 kN could be realized.The magnetic chuck could withstand the process parameters, ap = 25 mm cutting depth andf = 0.8 mm/turn feed, without problems (passive force approx. 1 kN).

Circular magnetic chuck with electro-permanent magnetic switchable, enhanced system: SAV 244.71.

Electro-permanent magnetic chucks:

* potential improvement of reproducable qualities with use the electro-permanent magnetic chuck SAV 244.71 in comparison with conventional methods, such as radial mandrel, axial clamping chuck and pendle-jaw chucks, under the described conditions.

Form- resp. surface qualityReproducable quality

magnetic chuckPotential

improvement *

Arith. Middle roughness 0,3 µm 0 % to 25 %Circular form difference 0,5 µm 75 % to 90 %Cylindrical form failure 10 µm 80 % to 85 %Wall thickness variation 25 µm 60 % to 80 %

Test results



Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck for grinding of bearing rings, diameter 2800 mm

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck for hard-turning,diameter 1200 mm

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck forhard-turning, including mechanical centering system

More application examples on page 78


SAV 244.70Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck

Nominal holding force:120 N/cm2,adjustable by control unit.

Nominal operating voltage:210 V DC up to 250 mm diameter 360 V DC above 250 mm diameter

These circular electro magnets are not able for their very strong, evenly distributed holding force.The magnetic force is produced by permanent magnets which are magnetized and demagne-tized by short electric current pulses.

Scope of supply:- Lifting bolts for transportation on larger models. - T-slots and pole extensions not included as standard.- Terminals for electrical connection in middle of back side in standard execution.- Optional with integrated slip ring body for the bigger diameters.- with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request


Use:Mainly for precision grinding of small to large workpieces on rotary tables and circular grinders.

- for circular grinding and turning

- equal pole pitch within circle range; therefore very suitable for circular workpieces

- the minimum workpiece height; 35% of the pole pitch at the given circle segment


Features:- solid designed pole plate- switching off through demagnetizing cycle- electro-permanent magnetic system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure- high precision due to fine grid pole-plate-to-body connection- pole separation with brass in-lays for optimal wear behaviour- pole plate exchangeable- radial pole arrangement, especially suitable for the use of pole raisers. This is absolutely essential for the runout of the tool or the grinding wheel at three side operation. Therefore available with T-slots (T) according DIN 650-10H10 on request.- pole plate wearing limit 8mm- sealed to IP 65- suitable for use with control unit type 876.10 (see chapter 04)- available with adapter flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 06)

0.35

x P

P

=

=

di <

0.9

do

69



SAV 244.70

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.70 - 1600 - T - 360 VName SAV - No. - A - Execution - Operating voltage

Bigger sizes up to A = 5400 available on request. Please refer to SAV 876.03 to SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04), for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating.


B

ØA

H

FØCH

7

D

G

ØE

I


Dimensions in mmA B 0 C D E F G H I P

100 100 60 3 80 M8 (3x) 12 35 10 3 4 210 30 876.10 / 876.03150 100 90 3 120 M10 (3x) 14 35 10 3 9 210 30 876.10 / 876.03200 100 110 3 140 M10 (4x) 14 45 10 4 18 210 30 876.10 / 876.03250 100 140 3 170 M12 (4x) 16 45 10 4 29 210 30 876.10300 100 160 3 190 M12 (4x) 16 60 10 6 42 210 / 360 30 876.10400 100 210 4 250 M12 (6x) 16 70 15 6 76 210 / 360 30 876.10500 110 280 4 320 M12 (6x) 16 100 15 8 120 360 30 876.10600 110 350 4 390 M16 (6x) 18 100 15 8 195 360 30 876.10700 110 400 4 450 M16 (6x) 18 120 15 8 265 360 30 876.10800 110 450 4 500 M16 (6x) 18 150 18 12 365 360 30 876.10

1000 125 550 4 620 M16 (8x) 18 200 18 12 550 360 60 876.101200 125 300 25 18 990 360 60 x 2 876.101400 150 300 25 18 1350 360 60 x 2 876.101500 150 300 25 18 1550 360 60 x 2 876.101600 150 300 25 18 1760 360 60 x 2 876.10


Weightin kg

-1

Chuck voltage in Vdc

Control unit max. current

in A


Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck

For execution with T-slots, the height increases with 10 mm.



Nominal holding force:160 N/cm2,adjustable by control unitwith encoded switch.

This new design of circular magnet, using high-energy magnetic materials, provides extremely high holding forces. Magnetization and demagnetization through a short electric direct current pulse. The homogeneous nature and precision of this circular magnet makes it suitable for turning hardened steels as well as general heavy cutting.


Scope of supply:- Lifting bolts for transportation on larger models. - T-slots and pole extensions not included as standard.- Terminals for electrical connection in middle of back side in standard execution.- Optional with integrated slip ring body for the bigger diameters.- with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request

Enhanced magnetic system with radial pole arrangement and exceptional holding force

Features:- evenly distributed strong magnetic field- solid constructed pole plate- switching off through demagnetizing cycle- electro-permanent magnetic system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure- high precision due to fine grid pole-plate-to-body connection- pole separation with brass in-lays for optimal wear behaviour- pole plate exchangeable- radial pole arrangement, especially suitable for the use of pole raisers. This is absolutely essential for the runout of the tool or the grinding wheel at three side operation. Therefore available with T-slots (T) according DIN 650-10H10 on request.- pole plate wearing limit 8mm- sealed to IP 65- suitable for use with control unit type 876.10 (see chapter 04)- available with adapter flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 06)

Use:Turning of hardened steel and heavy cutting of small to large workpieces. Also for highest precision grinding.

- for turning and hard turning

- equal pole pitch within circle range; therefore very suitable for circular and ring-shaped workpieces

- the minimum workpiece height is 35% of the pole pitch at the given circle segment


0.35

x P

P

=

=

di <

0.9

do

71




Segment-shaped pole raisers ensure an undisturbed tool path during 3-side machining. A solid axial mounting face is provided by 3 rigid pole extensions, the remainder being floating types. For workpieces with differing diameters, the pole raisers can be repositioned along the radial milled slots (available on request).

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.71 - 1600 - T - 360 VName SAV - No. - A - Execution - Operating voltage

Enhanced magnetic system with radial pole arrangement and exceptional holding force

Dimensions in mm

A B 0 C D E F G H I P200 100 110 3 140 M10 (4x) 14 45 10 4 24 360 30 876.10250 100 140 3 170 M12 (4x) 16 45 10 4 39 360 30 876.10300 100 160 3 190 M12 (4x) 16 60 10 6 54 360 30 876.10400 100 210 4 250 M12 (6x) 16 70 15 6 85 360 30 876.10500 110 280 4 320 M12 (6x) 16 100 15 8 150 360 30 876.10600 110 350 4 390 M16 (6x) 18 100 15 8 210 360 30 876.10700 110 400 4 450 M16 (6x) 18 120 15 8 280 360 30 876.10800 110 450 4 500 M16 (6x) 18 150 18 12 380 360 30 876.10

1000 125 550 4 620 M16 (8x) 18 200 18 12 680 360 60 876.101200 125 300 25 18 975 360 60 x 2 876.101400 150 300 25 18 1600 360 60 x 2 876.101500 150 300 25 18 1850 360 60 x 2 876.101600 150 300 25 18 2105 360 60 x 2 876.10

Weightin kg

Rear detail as required

Rear detail as requiredRear detail as required


B

G

H

ØA

ØCH

7

ØE

D

I


F



in A-1

Bigger sizes up to A = 5400 available on request. Please refer to SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04), for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating.

tool

workpiecepole raisers

magnetic chuck

For execution with T-slots, the height increases with 10 mm.



Nominal holding force:P = 4.5 mm: 80 N/cm2

P = 9 mm: 100 N/cm2

P = 18 mm: 110 N/cm2

adjustable by control unit with encoded switch

These circular magnets with concentric magnetic poles permit the clamping of several workpieces outside the central region. The strong magnetic field is distributed evenly over the entire surface.

Nominal operating voltage:210 V DC up to 500 mm diameter360 V DC above 500 mm diameter

Features:- gap free construction of pole plate- evenly distributed, strong magnetic field- solid constructed pole plate- switching off through demagnetizing cycle- electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure- high precision due to fine grid pole-plate-to-body connection- pole separation with brass in-lays for optimal wear behaviour- pole plate exchangeable- pole plate wearing limit 8 mm- sealed to IP 65- suitable for use with control unit type 876.10 (see chapter 04)- available with adapter flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 06)

Scope of supply:- Lifting bolts for transportation on larger models. - Terminals for electrical connection in middle of backside in standard execution.- Optional with integrated slip ring body for the bigger diameters.


Use:Mainly for precision grinding of small to large workpieces on rotary tables and cylindrical grinders. Because of the concentric pole arrangement it is also suitable for holding groups of randomly placed mass-production pieces.

- for circular grinding

- uniform holding force distribution due to concentric pole arrangement; therefore suitable for thin and flat workpieces (e.g. saw blades)

- multiple workpiece operation on segments possible

- for workpieces with min. thickness = x: 2 mm at P = 4.5 mm 4 mm at P = 9.0 mm 8 mm at P = 18.0 mm

- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions 45 mm x 45 mm

x

45

73




Larger sizes on request. Please refer to SAV 876.03 to SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04), for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating.

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.72 - 1600 x 18 - 360 VName SAV - No. - A x P - Operating voltage


A B 0 C D E F G H I P300 105 160 3 190 M12 (4x) 16 76 16 4.5 52 210 30 876.10

400 105 210 4 250 M12 (6x) 16 90 21 9 89 210 30 876.10500 105 280 4 320 M12 (6x) 16 96 21 9 141 210 30 876.10600 105 350 4 390 M12 (6x) 18 80 21 9 204 360 30 876.10700 105 400 4 450 M12 (6x) 18 96 21 9 278 360 30 876.10800 105 450 4 500 M16 (6x) 18 96 22 9 383 360 30 876.10

1000 105 550 4 620 M16 (8x) 18 96 22 9 578 360 60 876.10

400 105 210 4 250 M12 (6x) 16 66 21 18 89 210 30 876.10500 105 280 4 320 M12 (6x) 16 92 21 18 141 210 30 876.10600 105 350 4 390 M12 (6x) 18 70 21 18 204 360 30 876.10700 105 400 4 450 M12 (6x) 18 92 21 18 278 360 30 876.10800 105 450 4 500 M16 (6x) 18 92 22 18 383 360 30 876.10

1000 105 550 4 620 M16 (8x) 18 92 22 18 578 360 60 876.10

1200 125 22 80 23 9 990 360 60 x 2 876.101400 125 22 166 26 9 1350 360 60 x 2 876.101500 125 22 166 26 9 1550 360 60 x 2 876.101600 125 22 166 26 9 1765 360 60 x 2 876.10

1200 125 22 70 23 18 990 360 60 x 2 876.101400 125 22 166 26 18 1350 360 60 x 2 876.101500 125 22 166 26 18 1550 360 60 x 2 876.101600 125 22 166 26 18 1765 360 60 x 2 876.10




in A



Rear detail as requiredRear detail as requiredRear detail as required


Rear detail as requiredRear detail as requiredRear detail as required

B

ØA

H

ØE

ØCH

7D

G

PF

I

-1


SAV 244.73With parallel pole pitch P=4 mm


Nominal operating voltage- 360 V DC

Nominal holding force- 100 N/cm²- adjustable with control unit with encoded switch

Scope of supply:- lifting bolts on larger models.- electrical connection with terminals in centre of backside - on request available with industrial watertight plug-in type connector

Fine pole pitch for thin workpieces.

Developed especially for universal use oncircular grinding machines. Double, enhancedmagnetic system for extreme high holding forces at low magnetic field height.

Use:For grinding of thin, plate-shaped workpieces.

- Grinding of thin plates, wide rings withsmall thickness and minimum width of 40 mm

- for workpieces with minimum thickness X = 2 mm

- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions of a = 40 x 40 mm²

Execution:- pole plate with very small pole pitch, 3 mm steel and 1 mm brass- low height- laminations glued and reinforced with tie bars- high precision due to fine grid pole plate to body connection- low magnetic field height- switching off through demagnetizing cycle - heat treated tension free body- threaded mounting holes in backside. Through holes on request.- electro-permanent magnetic system for absolute safe operation during power failure- pole plate surface wearing limit 8 mm- robust und waterproof- sealed to IP 65- for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 4)

402

75



SAV 244.73Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular ChuckWith parallel pole pitch P=4 mm

Dimensions in mmA B C D E F G H I

300 100 160 3 190 M12 (4x) 16 213 16 55 360 V 30 876.10400 100 210 4 250 M12 (6x) 16 231 21 98 360 V 30 876.10500 100 280 4 320 M12 (6x) 16 391 21 153 360 V 30 876.10600 100 350 4 390 M12 (6x) 18 481 21 220 360 V 60 876.10700 100 400 4 450 M12 (6x) 18 581 21 300 360 V 60 876.10800 100 450 4 500 M16 (6x) 18 681 22 392 360 V 60 876.10



in A


B

ØA

ØE

ØCH

7D

G

F

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.73 - 800 - 360 VName SAV - No. - Diam.- chuck voltage

Weightin kg

Other dimensions available on request.

I

H

76 Chapter 3




SAV 248.84Carbon Brush Holder

Slip-Ring Body SAV 248.85

Carbon Brush Holder SAV 248.84 - 1600Name SAV - No. - Max. circular chuck diameter

For circular Chuck Control unitmax. current

in ANumber Dimensions in mm Weight

magnet-ø voltage in V of contacts A B C D E F G in kg

to 800 210 / 360 30 3 140 40 M8 12,5 6,3 20 27,0 0,17to 1000 360 60 3 140 40 M8 12,5 6,3 20 25,0 0,17to 1600 360 60 x 2 4 140 50 M8 20,0 8,0 25 33,5 0,23

A

E

ØC

D F

B

Ø E

D

BC

ØA

Ø

G

Distance G to slip-ring body

For electric power supply to Electro-Magnetic Circular Chucks

Use:Slip-ring bodies are used in combination with carbon brushes to supply power to circular electromagnetic chucks. The slip-ring body can be mounted sepa-rately to the hollow machine spindle.When installing it must be assured that the in-sulation components do not come into contact with coolant or other fluids. Suitable protection must be provided to prevent contact with live components.

Execution:The slip-ring body is supplied with a small through hole only. The required adapterthrough-bore is to be machined in accordance with the machine spindle dimensions and taking the maximum size E into account.

For electric power supply to Electro-Magnetic Circular Chucks

Use:Slip-ring bodies are used in connection with carbon brushes to supply power to circular electro-permanent magnets. The slip-ring body can be mounted separately to the hollow machine spindle. While installing it must be assured that the insulation components do not come into contact with coolant or other fluids. Suitable protection must be provided to prevent contact with live components.

Mounting method:- shrinking at 130 oC- pressing with 0.5 mm oversize- gluing

Features:The slip-ring bodies are delivered with only one small centre-drilling. This has to be machined to suit the spindle of the machine, within range E.

A B C D Eto 800 210 / 360 30 3 70 61.5 20 M5 25 - 34 4100 1.1to 1000 360 60 3 100 65.5 25 M8 30 - 52 3000 2.5to 1600 360 60 x 2 4 100 79.0 25 M8 42 - 55 3000 3.0


Chuck voltage

in V

Number of

contacts

Max. r.p.m.


in A

Dimensions in mm

Slip Ring Holder SAV 248.85 - 1600Name SAV - No. - Max. circular chuck diameter


Possible electrical connections

Pole Plate Connector

Magnetic Chuck Housing

Pole Plate Axial Carbon BrushesRemovable Cover

Magnetic Chuck Housing Flat Slip-Ring Body

Power Supply to Circular Magnets with integrated flat Slip-Ring Body for vertical spindles

Carbon Brush Holder FlangeE-Connection

Circular MagnetMachine Spindle

Slip-Ring Body

Power Supply to Circular Magnets with external Slip-Ring Body and carbon brushes

Power Supply to Circular Magnets with industrial watertight connector;for magnetizing and demagnetizing, removed during operation (for Electro Permanent Magnets only).



Hard Turning of thin Rings:

Higher Productivity realized by substitutionof grinding process.3-side-access in one set up.Easy automation.Adequate holding force.

Better Quality realized by distributed magnetic force.Drastically improved roughness and roundness-tolerances.


Electro-Permanent Circular Magnetic Chuck:For hard turning application, execution in 2 segments,high maximum rotation speed 200 r.p.m.Diameter 3100 mm



Demagnetizers Remarks SAV-No. Page

Demagnetizing devices and control units information and application examples - 80

Table demagnetizers for continuous duty 890.01 81

Table demagnetizers with conveyor 890.03 81

Tunnel demagnetizers for continuous duty 890.40 82

Tunnel demagnetizers with conveyor 890.41 82

Manual demagnetizers for universal use 890.70 83

Manual demagnetizers for tools 890.71 83

Gauss meter, holding force tester, Tesla-meter

Mini-Gauss meter measurement of fields with small flux density 486.04 84

Holding force tester comparison of magnetic clamping systems 486.40 84

Tesla meter compact device with large measurment range 878.05 85

Mini magnetic field meter with digital reading 878.06 85

Polarity reversing units, control units, compact controls

Electronic polarity reversing control units for holding force regulation and demagnetizing 876.10 86-88

Remote control unit for manual control 876.02 89

Electronic compact control for electro (permanent) magnetic chucks 876.03 90

Rectifier unit for general purpose and clamping magnets 876.06 91


Demagnetizers and controls

Principle of demagnetizing:To demagnetize a workpiece it must be moved through an alternating and reducing magnetic field. The repetitive polarity changes of such a magnetic field makes it possible to reduce the induction and eventually bring this to practically zero.The lined orientation of the elementary magnets in the material are brought to a chaotic disorientation.

For safe operation

Reducing alternating magnetic fieldsfollow with applied magnetic field H (in A/m) practically parallel to the hysteresis curve. When reducing the field step by step the remanence Br of almost 0 mT (Gauss) can be reached.

Further clarifications to the magnetic principles can be found in chapter 15.

The elimination of the field is reached as follows:- Automatically by a polarity-reversing control unit with degressive magnetic circuits.- By slowly and constantly moving the workpiece over the pole surface of a table demagnetizer.- By slowly moving the piece through a tunnel-demagnetizer at a constant speed. At the tunnel exit, the piece must be brought far away enough from the alternating field.

Choosing a demagnetizer:Generally it is necessary to give the exact details regarding the problems that need to be solved:Shape, dimensions and steel composition for the pieces to be magnetized as well as the necessary type of function of the device.The length of the workpiece is not important. It is enough when they are narrower than the plate-demagnetizer or the pieces go through the opening of the tunnel device. Tables consist of several standard plates. Arranged beside one another on a base plate, they facilitate the demagnetizing of wide pieces.Attention should be paid to the occurring holding forces, which must be overcome when handling the parts and this limits the surface which can be achieved.When choosing between plate and tunnel device, It is very important to take the thickness of the workpiece into consideration. For demagnetizing of massive workpieces, we recommend tunnel-demagnetizers, which operate on all sides and in as far as the metallic inner part of the piece.The type of operation is given as a percentage of the total cycle length.

Example:Device in operation ton = 1 minute device not in operation: toff = 3 minutesLength of cycle: tcycle= ton + toff = 4 minutes

relative duty cycle: Duty cycle= 100 % x ton / tcycle = 25 %

Operation mode:It is very important to carry out the demagnetizing with a slow and constant speed, and at the same time the piece should be moved rectangutar to the poles. After the demagnetization the workpiece should be moved as far away as possible from the device, or else the demagnetization is incomplete. Besides that, the supply current must never be turned off during the cycle. The process should be repeated several times in one direction for massive pieces. Versions with degressive magnetic circuits need only to be pushed through once.

B

H

81Chapter 4



SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com

Table demagnetizer SAV 890.01For continuous duty

Use:For demagnetizing of workpieces after magnetic holding. The robust type of construction allows the use of demagnetizers also in rough applications.

Design: Pole plate made of laminated silicon plate with low loss of power caused by eddy currents.

Electrical supply: 230 V / 50 HzProtection: IP 21Duty cycle: 100%

Application:The demagnetizing is realized by moving the workpiece, either once or several times, in the same direction over the pole plate. The best results are obtained when, after each move, the workpiece is completely moved away from the alternating magnetic field.

Table Demagnetizer SAV 890.01 - 300Name SAV No. - A

A B C180 180 115 11.5 375260 250 135 32.0 990300 400 145 57.0 2000

Weight in kg

Power in VA

Dimensions in mm

A B

C

Table demagnetizers SAV 890.03With conveyor

Use:For automatic demagnetization on the conveyor belt with continuous plastic conveyor belt and AC-motor.The workpieces are moved over the pole plate at a speed of approx. 0.15 m/sec.

Belt operation and demagnetizer are separately switchable. For workpieces that are difficult to de-magnetize, a low-frequency generator can be used (optional).

Nominal voltage:Demagnetizer: 230 V, 50 – 60 HzDriving motor: 230/400 V, 50-60 Hz, 3-phase

Dimensions in mm Weight PowerA B C D E in kg in VA

260 250 350 240 1200 97.0 990300 400 400 300 1800 130.0 2000

Table demagnetizer SAV 890.03 - 300Name SAV No. - A

A

B

C

D

E

= =

ca. 8

50

CE

82 Chapter 4



Tunnel-Demagnetizers SAV 890.40 / SAV 890.41For continuous duty

Application SAV 890.40After operation, steel and casted workpieces can haverestmagnetism, which can be quite disturbing. When these parts need to be demagnetized prior to further usage, this can in most cases easily be achieved with tunnel demagnetizers.The tunnels are especially suitable for demagnetizing of biggerparts with smaller wall thickness.It is particularly advantageous, when series of workpieces in continous operation have to be demagnetized.

ConstructionThe demagnetizing coils are casted in plastic and are providedwith M8 mounting holes and on/off switch with signal lamp.

Tunnel demagnetizer SAV 890.41 - 550 x 550Name SAV No. - A x B

Dimensions in mm Power WeightA B C D E F G in VA in kg

SAV 890.40 stand alone unit

150 100 320 270 140 180 70 1500 25.0260 130 430 300 140 290 70 1800 35.0250 250 420 420 230 280 160 2300 66.0400 350 570 520 350 430 270 4500 137.0550 550 720 720 350 580 270 6500 190.0

SAV 890.41 with conveyor belt and table

260 130 430 70 140 200 - 1800 -250 250 420 190 230 200 - 2300 -400 350 570 290 350 350 - 4500 -550 550 720 490 350 450 - 6500 -

Application SAV 890.41For automatic demagnetizing with continous plastic conveyor belt and driving motor.

The workpieces are moved through the tunnel with a speed of approx. 0.2 m/sec. For parts which are difficult to demagnetize, a (optional) low frequency generator can be used.

Protection: IP 65

Duty cycle: 100%

Supply voltage: 230 V

Frequency: 50 – 60 Hz

Other voltages available on request

CAF

D B

Eca. 1800

1200 600

ca. 8

50

AC 75

E

G

D20F

ø 30M 8

105

B

Type SAV 890.40

Type SAV 890.41

83Chapter 4




Manual demagnetizer SAV 890.70For individual use

Application:For demagnetizing the surfaces of bigger workpieces. Mobile use.

Execution:Light-weight housing for easy use.

Nom. voltage: 230 V, 50 HzWeight: 2.8 kgActive surface: 150 x 95 mm²

Penetration: ca 40 mmRating: 220 VA

Hand demagnetizer SAV 890.70Name SAV No.

Manual demagnetizer SAV 890.71For bar material and tools

Application:For demagnetizing of workpieces, tools, punches,cutters, etc.

Execution:Stable, plastic housing, with high power. Usagealso in rough environment.Not suitable for continuous duty!Including thermo-fuse and LED for operation mode.

Hole diameter: Ø40 mmNominal voltage: 230 V / 50 HzDuty cycle: 10%Max. operation time: 10 seconds

Hand demagnetizer SAV 890.71Name SAV No.

84 Chapter 4




SAV 486.04Mini Gauss-MeterFor measurement of fields with small flux density

Use:For residual remanence measurement on workpieces and tools.

Attention:The device is only to be used for residual field measurement and not for concentrated magnetic fields.

Measurement range: ± 50 Gauss (± 5 mT)Diameter: 65 mmWeight: 0.14 kg

Mini Gauss-Meter SAV 486.04Name SAV No.

Holding Force Tester SAV 486.40For comparison of magnetic clamping systems

Use:For measuring the holding force of:- permanent magnetic chucks- electro magnetic chucks- electro permanent magnetic chucks

Application:By turning the screw clockwise with an Allen key, the necessary pressure is built up. The built-in piston is displaced until the holding force limit is reached and the measuring cylinder is lifted from the magnetic plate. The indicated pressure given in Bar corresponds to the comparative break-away force in daN/cm2.

Measurement range:0 – 25 Bar equals 0 – 25 daN/cm2

Weight: 2.0 kg

Holding Force Tester SAV 486.40Name SAV No.

85Chapter 4




SAV 878.06Mini magnetic field meterWith display for digital measurement value reading

Application:For magnetic field and remanence measure-ment on workpieces and tools.Handy, quick and simple in use.The measurement value information is very usefulfor employees in measuring rooms, warehouse,control, engineering and laboratorium and further in many production processes.

Execution:Light-weight and compact execution.Self-calibrating for each use and therefore very precise and realistic measurement values.

Indication: selection 0-200 Gs / 0-2000 GsAccuracy: +/- 1%Resolution: +/- 0.1 Gs (0 – 200 Gs) +/- 1 Gs (0 – 2000 Gs)Application temperature: 17 - 23°C

Delivery with 3LR50 battery.Battery lifetime 40.000 measurements with duration of 2 seconds.

Dimensions in mm WeightLength Width Height in kg

138 48 17 0.07

Mini magnetic field meter SAV 878.06Name SAV No.

SAV 878.05Tesla MeterCompact device with large measurement range

Use:For residual remanence measurement on workpieces and tools, in drillings and fixtures. Suitable for both micro-magnetic and very strong magnetic fields. Also for measuring magnetic flux and field structure on magnetic chucks.

Design:Light and compact design. Dirt protective housing. Economized energy use for long battery life. Liquid-crystal display with digital reading. Sensor can easily be exchanged and ordered separately (SAV 876.05 – S)

Features:- automatic ranging- display is either Tesla (T) of Gauss (G)- static and dynamic measurement- max. indication for dynamic measurement- pole indication (N/S)- zero settingRange for static fields: 0 – 1500 mTRange for dynamic fields: 0 – 750 mTAccuracy: ± 5%Ambient Temperature: 0 – 40 oCDimensions: 150 x 150 x 25 mmWeight: 0.25 kg

Tesla Meter SAV 878.05Name SAV No.


SAV 876.10Electronic Polarity-Reversing Control UnitWith integrated microprocessor and holding force control

Use:State-of-the-art control unit with up-to-date technology and electronics for magnetizing, demagnetizing and holding force regulation of electromagnetic and electro-permanent magnetic chucks and systems. Suitable for integration in existing machine control cabinet.

Application:Electronic polarity-reversing control units supply continuous DC-current to electro-magnetic chucks. For electro-permanent magnetic chucks this control unit is supplying the current impulse for switching the chuck on and off.The integrated, microprocessor controlled, pole reversing function demagnetizes the magnetic system and also eliminates the remanence magnetism in the workpiece. Due to this the workpieces can easily be released from the chuck, any chips are easy to remove, and, even more important, separate demagnetization of the workpiece is no longer required. Additional pole reversing programs are available for workpieces which are extremely difficult to (de)magnetize.When control unit and magnetic chuck are ordered as a set, it will be programmed with the most optimum settings in time and function.The control unit continuously monitors the main supply voltage / current, its outputs, all connectingcables and magnet coils. Status indications arepresented on the LCD-display.

Functional description:The control units comply with the following standards/guidelines:

- Accident prevention law VBG 7 n6 – 11.08 § 11/01.01.59

- Machine guideline 93/68/EWG ABI. No. L220

- Low voltage guideline 93/68/EWG ABI. No. L220126220

- EMC guideline 92/31/EWG ABI.Nr. L126

A safety contact in the control unit can be used to prevent accidental machining of a workpiece when the magnetic chuck is not magnetized.Manual operation through illuminated push-buttons (control unit SAV 876.02). Optional connection to CNC-controls through 24 Vdc signalling voltage.An 8-step holding force regulation function is standard built-in and operated through a coded switch.

Note: When using the lowest holding force settings, the safety according VBG 7 n6 can no longer be guaranteed.

Technical data:Maximum ambient temperature: 45 °CInput voltage: 230 / 400 Vac

Frequency: 50 / 60 Hz

Duty cycle for electro magnets: 100 % (electromagnetic chucks)

Cycle time for electro-permanent magnets: > 3 min.

Smaller cycles on request.

Features:- small and compact- fully closed (IP 54 with Box version S) and shock-proof- operator-friendly LCD display, indicating operation status and fault messages in text- foil covered keys for simple and easy setting of parameters- universal use for all magnet types and voltages- safe and reliable

For use on pallet changers or circular magnets, a heavyindustrial quick connector in combination with aparking station is possible. This is to prevent movement of the magnetic chuck and damaging of the supply cable during loading and unloading of the machine.

Build-in version E


SAV 876.10Electronic Polarity-Reversing Control Unit

Magnet terminals

Control signal Terminals(plugable)

Mains terminals

LCD-Display:Indicates operation status and fault messages in text

Foil covered keys:For simple setting of parameters- Magnet type and voltage- Demagnetizing cycle (coarse)- Demagnetizing cycle (fine)- Holding force characteristic (1-16 steps)- Number of voltage impulses- Impulse length- Holding force value for machine clearance

Inverse BCD-codingFor holding force control on terminals 15 to 18 (see terminal plan).

In 8 step control terminal 18 remains unused.

Terminal closed or on 24V-signal: 1,Terminal open: 0.

Please refer to BCD-coding table!Only apply proper control unit SAV 876.02 – SE2-1.Special programs on request.

8 steps - 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8

Terminal 15 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 Terminal 16 - 1 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 1 - 1 - 0 - 0 Terminal 17 - 1 - 0 - 1 - 0 - 1 - 0 - 1 - 0 Terminal 18 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

16 steps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Terminal 15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Terminal 16 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Terminal 17 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 Terminal 18 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Terminal plan

* = NC connection for ground terminal 12.Machine interlocking possible over terminals 6, 7 and 8 (normally use jumper betweenterminals 7 and 8).

For magnets with a required current of60 A x 2 a double control unit is available with double terminal set. In case the unit isconnected to a control unit SAV 876.02-SE1, Terminal 9 remains unused.

With integrated microprocessor and holding force control

Mag

net +

Mag

net –

5 si

gnal

ligh

t red

6 fre

e7

mac

hine

cle

aran

ce8

mac

hine

cle

aran

ce9

free

10 s

igna

l lig

ht g

reen

11 s

igna

l vol

tage

24

V12

free

13 p

ush

butto

n m

agne

tize

14 p

ush

butto

n de

mag

n.15

hol

ding

forc

e sw

itch

bit 3

16 h

oldi

ng fo

rce

switc

h bi

t 217

hol

ding

forc

e sw

itch

bit 1

18 h

oldi

ng fo

rce

switc

h bi

t 0

Mai

ns 2

30 V

/ 40

0 V

Tran

sfor

mer

may

be

requ

ired

for

E-m

agne

t

88 Chapter 4



Electronic Polarity-Reversing Control Unit SAV 876.10 - E - O - 360 / 60 x 4 / 400Name SAV No. - Version - Transformer - Magn. nom. voltage / Max. current / Mains voltage

Box version (S) with protection IP54

SAV 876.10Electronic Polarity-Reversing Control UnitWith integrated microprocessor and holding force control

A B C D E F A B C D E F 876.10-S-T-24 / 7 / 230 250 400 150 205 355 ø10 14.0 876.10-E-T-24 / 7 / 230 220 120 95 210 85 ø 5 2.0 876.10-S-T-24 / 15 / 230 250 500 150 205 455 ø10 20.0 876.10-E-T-24 / 15 / 230 260 120 95 250 85 ø 5 3.0 876.10-S-T-24 / 25 / 230 500 400 250 455 355 ø10 32.0 876.10-E-T-24 / 25 / 230 320 120 95 310 85 ø 5 6.0

876.10-S-O-110 / 6 / 230 300 250 155 260 210 ø 8 10.0 876.10-E-O-110 / 6 / 230 220 120 95 210 85 ø 5 2.0 876.10-S-O-110 / 16 / 230 250 400 150 205 355 ø10 14.0 876.10-E-O-110 / 16 / 230 260 120 95 250 85 ø 5 3.0 876.10-S-O-110 / 30 / 230 250 400 150 205 355 ø10 16.0 876.10-E-O-110 / 30 / 230 350 250 100 325 225 ø 8 8.0

876.10-S-T-110 / 6 / 400 500 400 250 455 355 ø10 28.0 876.10-E-T-110 / 6 / 400 220 120 95 210 85 ø 5 2.0 876.10-S-T-110 / 16 / 400 500 400 250 455 355 ø10 38.0 876.10-E-T-110 / 16 / 400 260 120 95 250 85 ø 5 3.0 876.10-S-T-110 / 30 / 400 600 400 250 555 355 ø10 54.0 876.10-E-T-110 / 30 / 400 350 120 100 325 225 ø 8 6.0

A B C D E F A B C D E F 876.10-S-O-210 / 30 / 230 300 250 155 260 210 ø 8 10.0 876.10-E-O-210 / 30 / 230 220 120 95 210 85 ø 5 2.0 876.10-S-O-210 / 30 / 400 300 250 155 260 210 ø 8 10.0 876.10-E-O-210 / 30 / 400 220 120 95 210 85 ø 5 2.0

876.10-S-O-360 / 30 / 400 300 250 155 260 210 ø 8 10.0 876.10-E-O-360 / 30 / 400 220 120 95 210 85 ø 5 2.0 876.10-S-O-360 / 30 x 2 / 400 300 300 150 255 255 ø 8 10.0 876.10-E-O-360 / 30 x 2 / 400 260 120 95 250 85 ø 5 3.0 876.10-S-O-360 / 30 x 3 / 400 250 400 150 205 355 ø10 11.0 876.10-E-O-360 / 30 x 3 / 400 320 120 95 310 85 ø 5 3.0 876.10-S-O-360 / 30 x 4 / 400 250 400 150 205 355 ø10 12.0 876.10-E-O-360 / 30 x 4 / 400 320 120 95 310 85 ø 5 4.0

876.10-S-O-360 / 60 / 400 300 300 150 255 255 ø 8 10.0 876.10-E-O-360 / 60 / 400 260 120 95 250 85 ø 5 3.0 876.10-S-O-360 / 60 x 2 / 400 250 400 150 205 355 ø10 14.0 876.10-E-O-360 / 60 x 2 / 400 320 120 95 310 85 ø 5 4.0 876.10-S-O-360 / 60 x 3 / 400 250 500 150 205 455 ø10 16.0 876.10-E-O-360 / 60 x 3 / 400 400 120 95 350 85 ø 5 5.0 876.10-S-O-360 / 60 x 4 / 400 300 600 150 245 555 ø10 19.0 876.10-E-O-360 / 60 x 4 / 400 540 120 95 530 85 ø 5 6.0

Weightin kgOrdering no.

B

A D

E

C

F

Build-in version (E) with protection IP00

Ordering no.Weightin kg

Ordering no. Ordering no.Weightin kg

Weightin kg

Box version (S) with protection IP54 Build-in version (E) with protection IP00

A D

EB

C

for

Ele

ctro

Mag

netic

Chu

cks

for

Elec

tro-

Perm

anen

t Mag

netic

Chu

cks

for

Elec

tro-

Perm

anen

t Mag

netic

Chu

cks

for

Ele

ctro

Mag

netic

Chu

cks

Ordering no.Magnet voltage

DC in V

Magnet current max. in A

Mains voltage

AC in V

Max.magnet

rating DC in kW

Fuse in A

Mains trans-former

required

Ordering no.Magnet voltage

DC in V

Magnet current max. in A

Mains voltage

AC in V

Max.magnet

rating DC in W

Fuse in A

Mains trans-former

required 876.10 -_-O-210/30/230 210 30 230 6.3 16 no (O) 876.10 -_- T-24 / 7 /230 24 7 230 168 4 yes (T) 876.10 -_-O-210/30/400 210 30 400 6.3 16 no (O) 876.10 -_- T-24 /15/ 230 24 15 230 360 6.3 yes (T)

876.10 -_- T-24 /25 /230 24 25 230 600 6.3 yes (T) 876.10 -_-O-360/30/400 360 30 400 10.8 16 no (O) 876.10 -_-O-360/30x2/400 360 30x2 400 10.8 x2 16 no (O) 876.10 -_- O-110/ 6 /230 110 6 230 660 4 no (O) 876.10 -_-O-360/30x3/400 360 30x3 400 10.8 x3 16 no (O) 876.10 -_- O-110/16/230 110 16 230 1760 16 no (O) 876.10 -_-O-360/30x4/400 360 30x4 400 10.8 x4 16 no (O) 876.10 -_ -O-110/30/230 110 30 230 3300 25 no (O)

876.10 -_-O-360/60/400 360 60 400 21.6 32 no (O) 876.10 -_- T-110/ 6 /400 110 6 400 660 4 yes (T) 876.10 -_-O-360/60x2/400 360 60x2 400 21.6x2 32 no (O) 876.10 -_- T-110/16/400 110 16 400 1760 16 yes (T) 876.10 -_-O-360/60x3/400 360 60x3 400 21.6x3 32 no (O) 876.10 -_- T-110/30/400 110 30 400 3300 25 yes (T) 876.10 -_-O-360/60x4/400 360 60x4 400 21.6x4 32 no (O)

For Electro Magnetic ChucksFor Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chucks

D I M E N S I O N S

E L E C T R I C A L D E TA I L S

89



SAV 876.02Control UnitFor switching of direct current magnets in connection with polarity reversing unit type SAV 876.10

Application:For switching of direct current magnets in connection with electronic polarity-reversing control unit SAV 876.10.The control unit is switched on by pushing the green and yellow keys. The polarity-reversing process is initia-ted by a red and yellow key. Possible fault indications as monitored by the polarity-reversing unit are also presented to the red illuminated key by means of a coded blinking signal. Required holding force can set to 8 levels.(16 levels on request).

Control Unit SAV 876.02 - SE2-1Name SAV No. - Type

Build-in version type SE2-1 to SE2-3Consisting of 2 signal push buttons and coding switch for holding force setting in 8 levels using inverse BCD-coding. Complete set can be ordered under type SE2-S.

Control unit type SE3With coding switch for holding force setting in 8 levels using inverse BCD-coding, including 2 integrated signal lamps and 2 m coded cable, 9 pole. Additional coded cable against price adder.

Execution:In order to comply with accident prevention regulations for machine tools, the release of the machine feed through auxiliary contacts can only be authorised when magnet is switched on and when the “on” position is indicated by a signal light. This control unit complies with these regulations.

The signal lamp is integrated into the foil covered keys of the control unit. The auxiliary contacts (interlock) for the machine feed are integrated in the polarity-reversing control unit.

Coding switchSE2-1

M10

ø15ø15

3636

2330

30

40

Illuminated pushbutton, green

SE2-2

Illuminated pushbutton, red

SE2-3

clamping / unclamping

130

60

60

holding forceregulation

90 Chapter 4



Electronic Compact Control SAV 876.03For electro and electro-permanent magnets

Use:For complete direct current supply as well as demagnetizing and holding-force control of clamping and holding magnets.

Execution:The compact control unit SF0 contains the complete direct current supply anddemagnetizing facilities in a small housing.All control elements are integrated in the front panel. The control is directly connected to the mains supply (230 V 50 Hz) and the magnet with a multicore cable. A floating relay contact can be used as machine interlock. This contact is closed at energized magnet. The power to the magnet is continuously monitored. The status of the magnet is indicated on the front panel with signal light. (green=energized, red=off, red blinking=demagnetizing). The holding-force control is stepless. The demagnetizing function is microprocessor controlled utilizing electric pulses with alternating polarity.

Following models are available:

SF0-110:Output voltage: 110 V DCOutput current: 4 Amp. max. (440 VA)

SF0-EP:Output voltage: 210 V pulseOutput current: 16 Amp. max.

SF0-24*:Output voltage: 24 V DCOutput current: 4 Amp. max. (96 VA)* With this option a separate power transformer is required.

Electronic Compact Control SAV 876.03 - SF0-24Name SAV No. - Type

power supply unitcontrol unit

ON

OFF

mas

s

Pot. meter holding force

signal redsignal green24 V

Relay contact for Machine interlock

2 core no. 2

coded cable, 6 core

clea

ranc

em

agne

t23

0 V

1 2

3 4

5 6

6 core no. 6

3 core no. 3

1 core no. 1

4 core no. 4

5 core no. 5

Magnet current Output

Power supply 230 V AC

Technical data:Housing dimension: 240 x 80 x 80 mm

Protection: IP65

Supply voltage: 230 V / 50 Hz

Other models on request.

91



Rectifier Unit SAV 876.06For general purpose and clamping magnets

Use:For power supply of general purpose and clamping magnets.For electro magnets as low-cost alternative for polarity-reversing controls in case holding force control and demagnetizing are not required.

Execution:With silicon bridge rectifier and transformer with insulated separate windings.Version in switching box for wall assembly (S) protection class IP54. Also available in build-in version (E) protection class IP00.In standard version switching by mains supply. Optional available with control element in box door (B). The dimensions for build-in version differ slightly from table.

Ambient temp. max: 35 °CPower supply, switchable: 230 V AC / 400 V ACFrequency: 50 / 60 Hz

Rectifier Unit SAV 876.06 - E / 110 / 30 / 230Name SAV No. - Box. / Nom. Magnet voltage / Max. current / Mains voltage

A B C D E F24 4.5 230 / 400 108 4.0 210 140 144 150 120 924 7 230 / 400 168 9.0 318 140 218 187 194 924 15 230 / 400 360 17.0 418 210 318 287 294 924 30 230 / 400 720 34.0 618 210 418 487 394 9

110 1.5 230 / 400 165 9.0 318 140 218 187 194 9110 6 230 / 400 660 22.0 418 210 318 287 294 9110 16 230 / 400 1760 34.0 618 210 418 487 394 9110 30 230 / 400 3300 65.0 818 260 618 687 594 9

build-in version (E)

box version (S)

E

CB

F

A D

Magnetic nom. voltage DC

in V

Max. magnet current

in A

Mains voltage in AC

Max. power at the magnet DC

in WWeightin kg

Dimensions in mm


SAV is present on most important exhibitions worldwide



Quick die and mould clamping systems Remarks SAV-No. Page

Quick die and mould clamping systems information and application examples - 94-97

Electro-permanent magnetic quick clamping systems for clamping of moulds 243.78 98-99

Magnetic separators

Magnetic separators MA10 & 20 separation of parts 511.02 / 03 100


Advantages for the plastic industryWhen using Electro-Permanent Magnetic Quick Change Systems on plastic injection moulding machines

Optimized system forInjection Moulding Machines- Solid construction and mounting- Low magnet height- Centre ring hardened and exchangeable - Due to modular pole design optional ejector preparation without loss of holding force- Pole separation with brass ensuring slit free and wearing resistant surface- Robust and safe air gap monitoring without additional sensors- Modular magnet approach ensures optimal surface coverage; no “dead” zones- Designed for maximum holding force (1600 daN per module)

Maximum flexibility- Tool change in just a few minutes- No modification on tool/mould required- Universal clamping of different moulds- Optimal utilization of clamping surface;- no surface loss for mechanical or hydraulic clamping elements

Productivity- Clear tool change savings and reduced machine down time- Automatic tool change possible- Reduced stocks- Smaller batches

Quality- Force distribution over total clamping surface- Reduced stresses in moulds- Improved product quality, reduced waste EP magnetic quick change system for 300 tons machine.

POWERFULSAFERELIABLE


ApplicationsFor electro-permanent magnetic quick change systems on plastic injection moulding machines.

Electro-Permanent quick change system for 750 tons machine, in special execution with parallel pole pitch

Nominal break-away force at full coverage 570 kN.Pole gap with full-brass inlays,highest protection against wearing.

Electro-Permanent quick change system for 2300 tons machine, in special execution with parallel pole pitch. Prepared for rolling system for automatic tool change.

EP magnetic quick change system for 240 tons machine

Electro-Permanent quick change system for 2300 tons machine, Electro-Permanent quick change system for 2300 tons machine,


Applications quick change systemFor clamping of tools in the plastic industry

With rolling system for tool change.

Electro-Permanent quickchange system for 150 tons machine

Magnetic quick clamping systemwith horizontal tool change machine

- high process safety

- limited tool-wearing, reduced maintenance costs

- minimum change times

- pre-heating parallel to operation

- automatable

- for workpieces up to 1000 kg

Left:Fixed clamping plate with gantry and rolling system

Right:Moving clamping plate with loading platform and falling bar

Below:Sliding table with pre-heating station for warming-up of tools parallel to operation.


Application deep pulling pressFor electro-permanent magnetic quick clamping systems

Electro-Permanent quick clamping system for deep pulling press

Top plate:with modular poles, nominal break-away load 64 tons, including air gap monitoring,water cooled execution

Bottom plate:execution as top plate, with integrated hydraulic rolling bar

Magnetic tool clamping on presses

- deep pulling and concealing tools for car roofs

- minimum changing time

- pre-heating parallel to operation

- safety switch for vertical presses

- hydraulic rolling bars for easier tool change

- for workpiece weights up to 8000 kg


SAV 243.78Electro-Permanent Magnetic Quick Clamping SystemFor clamping of moulds or tools on presses

Smaller batches, quicker delivery times and “Just in Time” delivery force the supplierto more frequent tool/mould change. Usingthe magnetic system SAV 243.78 tool change times of just a few minutes can be achieved.

THE INNOVATIVE SOLUTION

FOR TOOL CHANGE

UseClamping of moulds on injection moulding machines. Clamping of tools on presses (deforming)

Execution of control unitThe control unit is used for magnetizing and demagnetizing of the magnetic plates.

Further safety features:- Storage of magnetic state of the magnetic plates- inductive air gap monitoring- safety switch

The control unit is equipped with an integrated communication-interface to the machine.

Interface options are:Euromap 70.0 for retrofittingEuromap 70.1 for integration in machine

Nominal voltage: 400 V, 50 HzOther voltages on request.

Scope of supply- magnetic plates- centre rings, hardened- mounting and lifting bolts- control unit with steel box- connection cable- remote control unit (only with Euromap 70.0)

Execution of magnetic systems- solid construction and mounting

- mounting according Euromap or SPI

- optional ejector holes according Euromap or SPI

- limited height

- pole gap closed by brass inlays and protected against wearing

- flexible design due to modular poles, also for optional ejector holes, without loss of holding force

- additional threads in pole plate possible without loss of holding force

- optimum surface utilization due to modular system, no “dead zones”

- design for maximum holding force (1600 daN per module)

- maximum operating temperature 100°C

- electro-permanent magnetic system for absolute safety during power failure

- low magnetic field

- robust, reliable inductive air gap monitoring

- centre ring hardened and exchangeable

99



SAV 243.78Electro-Permanent Magnetic Quick Clamping SystemFor clamping of moulds or tools on presses

Electro-Permanent Quick Clamping System SAV 243.78 - 1610 x 1490 - 250 - M 24Name SAV No. - A x B - D - E

Machine size

in tons

Dimensions in mm Nominal break-away

force in kN A B C D E

50 460 460 56 125H8 M 12 50100 530 530 56 125H8 M 16 114125 680 650 56 125H8 M 16 128150 740 740 56 160H8 M 16 160200 740 740 56 160H8 M 16 224300 940 940 56 160H8 M 20 320500 1290 1190 60 200H8 M 20 512650 1440 1440 60 200H8 M 20 640800 1610 1490 60 250H8 M 24 832

1000 1940 1660 60 250H8 M 24 10241300 2140 1870 60 250H8 M 24 13441500 2140 1870 60 250H8 M 24 15362000 2590 2390 60 250H8 M 24 20482500 2790 2390 60 315H8 M 30 25603000 2780 2380 60 350H8 M 30 30724000 on request on request 60 350H8 M 30 4000

Because the technical execution is depending on the construction of the machine, these data should be interpreted as examples. On request we offer you the most relevant system required up to a machine size of 5400 tons.

Quick clamping system SAV 243.78 – 1940 x 1660 – 250 - M24 – 01 for 1000 tons injection moulding machine.

C

A

E

B

øDH

8


SAV 511.01 / SAV 511.02Magnetic separators MA10 / MA20

Application- for separation of ferro-magnetic particles from fluids.- for granulate on plastic injection moulding machines.

Executions:SAV 511.01, Type MA10: in bar shape, cross section circular:

In normal, strong and extra strong executions.

SAV 511.02, Type MA20: in window, circular and square:

For round tube sectionsIn normal and strong execution

For square tube sectionsIn normal and strong execution.

Also in switchable, Easy-clean, execution.

øA B Tube cross-sectionA C

B

active

active

clean

clean

DETAILEDINFORMATION AND TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS ON REQUEST



Precision sine tables Remarks Pole pitch SAV-No. Page

Special sine tables Application examples – – 102-105

Precision sine table (also stainless execution) Swivel on longitudinal axis P=1.9 mm 245.01 106

Precision sine table Swivel on long./transv. axis P=1.9 mm 245.02 107

Precision sine tables (extreme low height) Swivel on longitudinal axis P=1.9 mm 245.04 108

Precision sine table Swivel on middle axis P=1.9 mm 245.06 109

Precision sine table (enhanced holding force) Swivel on longitudinal axis P=15 mm 245.07 110

Precision sine table Swivel on longitudinal axis P=4 /13 mm 245.09 111

Precision sine tables with lifting mechanism Swivel on longitudinal axis P=13/18/25 mm 245.10 112

Magnetic tilting block with scale Swivel on middle axis P=15 mm 245.44 113

Precision sine table (also stainless execution) Swivel on longitudinal axis – 235.21 114

Precision sine table (without magnet) Swivel on longitudinal axis – 235.71 115

Precision sine tables (without magnet) Swivel on long./transv. axis – 235.72 116


Special Sine Table size 1200 x 300 mmwith hydraulic drive

Motor driven swivelling table, length 12,000 mm, high precision with resolver, hydro-static axles, special pole-beams and hydraulic clamping, for combined machine milling and grinding

Sine Table with electro-permanent magnetic chuck and mechanical angle setting device.




Special Sine Table for high accuracy grinding (tolerance 0.01 at 1000 mm x 600 mm)including mechanical drive, measurement system and rigid hydraulic clamping system

Special Sine Table withelectro permanent magnet swivelling over 2 axis

rigid hydraulical clamping beams optimized top plate with respectto rigidity and weight

inductive measurement systemand display, resolution 0.5 µm



Circular sine table with Ceramic-Vacuum top plate, Diameter: 800 mm

Special Sine Table for grinding of gas turbine parts

Special Sine Table swivelling -90° to +90°

Special Sine Table size 1000 x 150 mm, swivelling from -90° to +90°



Special Sine Table for segment grinding machines, hydraulic driven, with rigid clampingClamping surface 1000 x 500 mm

Special Sine Table with hydraulic fixure

3-Axis Sine Table for grinding of turbine parts

Special Sine Table with hydraulic fixurefor automotive parts

106 Chapter 6



Precision Sine Table SAV 245.01Swivel on longitudinal axis, with fine pole chuck

Design:Swivel on the longitudinal axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. High accuracy due to extreme flat construction.Standard execution with permanent magnetic chuck. The sine tables are supplied in wooden storage cases up to and including size 450 x 150. With sine chart degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and short side stop.Sine table and magnetic chuck also available in stainless steel execution (RF) in sizes 150 x 100 / 200 x 100 / 250 x 150 / 300 x 150.

Angle precision: ± 5 sec.Planar parallelism: ± 0.005 / 100 mmShimming measure at 0°: 3 mmAngle range: 0° to 45°Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2

Pole pitch: 1.9 mmMagnetic field height: 6 mmPole plate wearing limit: 8 mm

Application:The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge.Fixation is achieved by side mounted pincers and by tightening the upper bearing clamps.

Execution with flushing holes available against price adder.

Other dimensions and executions – also with electro magnetic or other magnetic system – and all sizes of permanent magnetic chucks SAV 243.01 are available as sine table.

With mechanical adjustment SAV 245.10 the overall height is increased by approx. 40 mm at 0° setting.

Precision Sine Table SAV 245.01 - 300 x 150 - RFName SAV - No. - A x B - Execution

D

B

E at

0°

F

A B C D E 0 F140 70 170 100 68 55 5.5150 150 190 165 79 135 12.0175 100 215 115 77 85 10.0250 100 290 115 77 85 16.0255 130 295 145 77 115 19.0250 150 290 165 79 135 20.5300 150 340 165 79 135 26.5300 200 340 215 79 185 35.0350 150 390 165 87 135 35.0400 200 440 215 87 185 52.0450 150 490 165 87 135 44.0500 250 560 270 94 235 84.0600 300 660 320 94 275 121.0

Dimensions in mm Weight in kg

-2

A

C

107



SAV 245.02Precision Sine TableSwivel on longitudinal and transverse axis, with fine pole chuck

Design:Swivel on the longitudinal and transverse axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. High accuracy due to extreme flat type construction. Standard execution with permanent magnetic chuck. The sine tables are supplied in wooden storage cases with 2 sine charts degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and short side stop. Angle precision: ± 5 sec.Planar parallelism: ± 0.005 / 100 mmShimming measure at 0°: 3 mmAngle range longitudinal axis: 0° to 45°Angle range transversal axis: 0° to 30°Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2




Other dimensions and executions – also with electro magnetic or other magnetic system – and all sizes of permanent magnetic chucks SAV 243.01 are available as sine table.

Precision Sine Table SAV 245.02 - 400Name SAV - No. - A

A

C

E at

0°

F

B

D

F

A B C D E 0 F175 100 210 140 108 160 / 115 15.0255 130 290 170 119 240 / 145 32.0300 150 335 190 121 285 / 160 43.5350 150 385 190 121 335 / 160 49.5400 200 435 240 117 385 / 210 73.0


-2


Precision Sine Table SAV 245.04Swivel on longitudinal axis, with extreme low height

Design:Swivel on the longitudinal axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. High accuracy due to extreme flat construction.Standard execution with permanent magnetic chuck. ON/OFF-switching on top.The sine tables are supplied in wooden storage cases, with sine chart degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and short side stop.




Precision Sine Table SAV 245.04 - 450Name SAV No. - A

B

D

F

A

C

E at

0°


A B C D E 0 F175 100 215 115 60.0 85 8.5150 150 190 165 62.5 135 10.0255 130 295 145 60.0 115 14.0300 150 340 165 62.5 135 20.0350 150 390 165 70.5 135 26.5400 200 440 215 71.0 185 41.0450 150 490 165 70.5 135 33.5


-2

109



SAV 245.06Precision Sine TableSwivel on middle-axis to both sides

DesignSwivel on longitudinal axis. Sine table base plate and other parts made from tool steel. Hardened to HRC 60, black finished andprecision ground. Standard execution with permanent magnetic chuck 243.01Highest accuracy and stability in every position. Delivery in wooden storage case up to dimension 350 x 150 mmWith sine table in of degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and transverse side stop.

Angle precision: ± 5 sec.Planar parallelism: ± 0.005 / 100 mmAngle range: -90° to +90°Nom. holding force: 80 N/cm2Pole pitch: 1.9 mmMagnetic field height: 6 mmPole plate wearing limit: 8 mm

ApplicationSetting of angles according sine principle, using an end-gauge up to 90°.

High precision sine table SAV 245.06 - 600Name SAV No. - A

Dimensions in mm WeightA B C D E1 E2 E3 F in kg

255 130 365 150 160 125 160 60 30.0350 150 460 160 175 130 175 70 46.0400 200 500 200 220 150 220 95 64.0500 200 600 200 220 150 220 95 78.0600 200 700 200 220 150 220 95 92.0

Other dimensions and executions also available with electro-magnet or other magnetic systems.

C x D

E1

A x B

F F

C x D

E2

C x D

E3

Swivel 90° left0° - positionSwivel 45° right

110 Chapter 6



Precision sine table with enhanced holding force SAV 245.07Swivel on longitudinal axis

DesignSwivel over middle axis. Sine table base plate and other parts made from tool steel. Hardened to HRC 60, black finished and precision ground. Highest accuracy at extreme flat construction.Standard execution with permanent magnetic chuck 243.11.Delivery with attached sine bar (SL) for angle setting in pole plate plane possible against price adder (SAV 487.40).Delivery in wooden storage case up to dimension 350 x 150 mm.With sine table in of degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and transverse side stop.

Angle precision: ± 5 sec.Planar parallelism: ± 0.005 / 100 mmEnd gauge in 0° 3 mmAngle range: 0° to 45°Nom. holding force: 150 N/cm2Pole pitch: 15 mmPole plate wearing limit: 5 mm

ApplicationSetting of angles according the sine principle, using an end-gauge.Fixation is achieved by side mounted pincers and by tightening the upper bearing clamps.

Other dimensions and executions on request. Also available with electro-magnet or other magnetic systems.All standard sizes of permanent magnetic chuck SAV 243.11 (chapter 1) are available as sine table.

High precision sine table SAV 245.07 - 400Name SAV No. - A

Dimensions in mm WeightA B C D E 0 F in kg

250 150 290 165 84 135 20.5300 150 340 165 84 135 27.0350 150 390 165 84 135 36.0400 200 440 215 84 185 52.0

-2

D

B

E at

0°

F

A

C

not in standard supplyorder nr. SAV 487.40

111



SAV 245.09Precision Sine TableSwivel on longitudinal axis, with electro or electro-permanent chuck

Design:Swivel on the longitudinal axis.The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. Magnetic chuck housing stress-free annealed. High accuracy due to extreme flat construction.4-point support for optimal security. The delivery includes a lifting support and setting table degrees / minutes in mm.Fluting stones for fixing on the machine table on bottom side of base plate.Side stops on back and side face sides.

This sine table is executed either with electro-magnetic with integrated water cooling (EM) or electro-permanent chuck (EP).


Pole pitch:4 mm for Electro Permanent ChuckSAV 243.73

13 mm for Electro Magnetic ChuckSAV 243.42

Application:The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge.

Precision Sine Table SAV 245.09 - 500 x 200 - EPName SAV No. - A x B - Execution

A

C

B

D

F

E at

0°

A B C D E 0 F450 175 448 203 125.5 175 55.0500 175 498 203 125.5 175 61.0500 200 498 228 125.5 200 70.0


-1

Suitable control unit SAV 876.10 (chapter 4)

Other dimensions on request.

112 Chapter 6



SAV 245.10Precision Sine Table with lifting mechanismSwivel on longitudinal axis, firmly attached on the machine table

Design:Swivel on the longitudinal axis.The base plate of the sine table is made of steel, stress-free annealed. All built-on parts are hardened (HRC 60) and precision ground. Stable construction with high accuracy.Depending on size fitted with mechanical adjusting gear or hydraulic swivel support.High accuracy due to extreme flat construction. 4-point support for optimal security.Available with angle gauge and additional fixation on request. This sine table is standard executed with electro-permanent chuck SAV 243.70.Delivery with sine chart with degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and short side stop, 3 m connecting cable, lacquered magnet body.

Shimming measure at 0°: 5 mmAngle range: 0° to 45°Angle precision: ± 5 sec.Planar parallelism: ± 0.005 / 100 mm

Application:The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge.

Precision Sine Table SAV 245.10 - 800 - EPName SAV No. - A - Magnet type

Suitable control units SAV 876.10 (chapter 04).

Other sizes and executions on request. Also available with electro-magnet (E) or other magneticsystems.

Please specify type of magnet when ordering.(see chapter 1, 2, 3)

*Depending on magnet type. The given heights refer to electro-permanent (EP) magnetic chuck SAV 243.70 (chapter 3)

B

D

F

D

F

A

C

E at

0°

C

A B C D E 0* F400 200 440 215 157 175 86.0500 250 560 270 159 225 138.0600 300 660 320 159 275 199.5800 300 860 320 159 270 250.0


-1

113



SAV 245.44

DesignStabile construction. Reading by means of degree-scale. Swivel with hand-lever. Switchable magnetic chuck with fine pole pitch 1.9 mm, can completely be swivelled.

Angle range: -90° to +90°Planar parallelism: ± 0.005 / 100 mm

ApplicationEasy reading from degree-scale or with sine bar.

Swivel on middle axis to both sides

Swivelling Magnetic Chuck with scale

High precision sine table SAV 245.44 - 450 x 150Name SAV No. - A x B

Dimensions in mm WeightA B C D E F G H I K L M in kg

130 70 52 50 100 52 25 14 95 15 225 125 7.5175 100 146 50 100 92 25 14 95 15 293 145 18.0250 100 206 50 100 52 25 14 95 15 365 125 23.0250 125 209 50 100 56 25 14 95 15 365 128 28.0300 150 256 50 100 56 25 14 95 15 418 128 36.0350 150 306 50 100 92 25 14 95 15 468 145 40.0450 150 406 50 100 92 25 14 95 15 568 145 50.0

B

A

C

D

L

G

E

H

M

I

K

F

114 Chapter 6



SAV 235.21Precision Sine Table also in stainless execution

Design:Swivel on the transverse axis to max. 45 degrees. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. Vice and sine table are also available in stainless steel execution (RF), for wire EDM.Delivery in wooden storage case.

Angle precision: ± 5 sec.Planar parallelism: ± 0.005 / 100 mmShimming measure at 0°: 3 mmSwivel range: 0° - 45°

Application:The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. The precision pull down vice can be set in either X or Y direction.

Standard accessories:1 fixed end stop, 1 adjustable end stop, 1 wrench1 sine chart in degrees / minute

Precision Sine Table SAV 235.21 - 100 - RFName SAV No. - A - Execution

With precision pull down vice SAV 231.06

A B

DE

C

F

A B C D E F75 100 120 195 115 165 15.0

100 120 130 220 140 190 20.0125 160 143 245 165 215 30.0

Weightin kg

Dimensions in mm

Mounted on pallet and zero reference system

115



Precision Sine Table SAV 235.71Swivel on longitudinal axis, with tapped holes or T-slots

Design:Swivel on the longitudinal axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. Swivelling table available with tapped holes M8 (G) or with T-slots (from size 400 x 200) against price adder (T).Mechanical angle setting available against price adder; however, total height will increase with approx. 40 mm at 0° setting.The sine tables are supplied in wooden storage cases up to and including size 450 x 150. With sine chart degrees / minutes in mm.

Angle precision: ± 5 sec.Planar parallelism: ± 0.005 / 100 mmShimming measure at 0°: 3 mmAngle range: 0° to 45°

Application:The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge.Depending on workpiece, a precision grinding vice or alternatively a switchable permanent magnetic chuck can be mounted on the swivel plate.Fixation is archieved by side mounted pincers and by tightening the upper bearing clamps.

Precision Sine Table SAV 235.71 - 600 - GName SAV - No. - A - Execution

B

D

F

E at

0°

A

C

G

IJ

H

6,8

M8

Ø11

LM

16

189

Swivel plate with tapped holes (G)Swivel plate with T-slots (T)

N – number of slots

Dimension in mm WeightA B C D E F G H I J L M N in kg

100 50 100 95 47 65 12.5 12.5 25 12.5 - - - 3.0160 160 160 205 47 175 20 20 20 20 - - - 9.0175 100 175 145 47 115 20 22.5 20 30 - - - 7.5250 150 250 195 52 165 25 25 25 25 - - - 14.0350 150 350 195 60 165 25 25 25 25 - - - 26.0400 200 400 245 60 215 25 25 25 25 50 100 2 37.0450 150 450 195 60 165 25 25 25 25 35 80 2 33.5500 200 500 245 65 215 25 25 25 25 50 100 2 48.5600 300 600 345 70 315 25 25 25 25 50 100 3 90.0

116 Chapter 6



SAV 235.72Precision Sine TableSwivel on longitudinal and transverse axis, with tapped holes

Design:Swivel on the longitudinal and transverse axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. Swivelling table available with tapped holes M8 (G) or with T-slots (from size 400 x 200) against price adder (T).Mechanical angle setting available against price adder; however, total height will increase with approx. 40 mm at 0° setting.The sine tables are supplied in wooden storage cases up to and including size 400 x 200. With sine chart degrees / minutes in mm.

Angle precision: ± 5 sec.Planar parallelism: ± 0.005 / 100 mmShimming measure at 0°: 3 mmAngle range longitudinal axis: 0° to 45°Angle range transversal axis: 0° to 30° Application:The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. Very suitable for workpieces with 2 working planes. Fixation is achieved by side mounted pincers and by tightening the upper bearing clamp.

Precision Sine Table SAV 235.72 - 450 - GName SAV - No. - A - Execution

B

D

F

E at

0°

A

CE

G

IJ

H

6,8M

8

Ø11

LM

16

189

Swivel plate with tapped holes (G)Swivel plate with T-slots (T)

N – number of slots

Dimension in mm WeightA B C D E 0 F G H I J L M N in kg

160 160 160 205 75 175 / 145 20 20 20 20 - - - 12.0250 150 250 195 80 165 / 220 25 25 25 25 - - - 17.5350 150 350 195 96 165 / 315 25 25 25 25 - - - 36.0400 200 400 245 96 215 / 365 25 25 25 25 50 100 2 52.0450 300 450 345 96 315 / 415 25 25 25 25 50 100 3 84.0

-1



Lifting magnets Remarks SAV-No. Page

Lifting magnets and handling devices info and application examples - 118-120

Universal permanent lifting magnets compact execution 531.01 121

Lifting magnets and handling devices for quick fixing 531.02 122

Electro and electro-permanent lifting magnets custom designed executions 123

Permanent magnetic plate lifters, hand lifters

Permanent magnetic claw with lifting eye compact, with eye for crane use 531.20 124

Permanent magnetic hand lifter for transporting and holding by hand 531.90 124

Permanent magnetic plate lifter with high lifting force 531.92 124


Lifting magnets and handling devices

Application of modified permanent lifting magnet; switching through an hydraulic cylinder.For use in ground drilling equipment.

Permanent lifting magnets type 531.01-500 for lifting of thick and large steel plates.

Application of 2 lifing magnets SAV 531.71 on a transverse beam.


For quick fixing and secure lifting.

The rational transport of workpieces without further fixing equipment – like ropes, loops, carabines and eyes – is facilitated by the use of magnetic lifting magnets and handling devices.In view of the given nominal holding forces and workpiece characteristics, a secure lifting is guaranteed when the accident prevention regulations are observed (see technical advice and operation instructions).Depending on the type of application, the influences of material composition, state of heat treatment and surface condition on the nominal holding force should be observed.

Electro lifting magnet SAV 531.41In use for transport of tubes. The tubes are thin-walled

and therefore magnetically difficult to lift.(special execution with prism).

Electro lifting magnets in special executionWith pole cones for withdrawing of small ferro-magnetic parts (chaoticly stocked)

Advice: Magnetic chucks – especially chucks withAlNiCo magnets – should never be transported withlifting magnets, as a demagnetizing effect then occurs.When required, we can carry out repairs and service work on lifting magnets for our customers. The lifting magnets are tested according to the required safety regulations.

Lifting magnets and handling devices:

Technical advice and application examples of permanent, electro- and electro-permanent lifting magnets can be found in the following pages. Further details, especially regarding the possible lifting forces, are summarized in chapter 15.

Lifting magnets and handling devices


Lifting magnets and handling devicesSpecial executions

Lifting system in special execution with electro-permanent holding magnets for automated handling of steel sheets.

Permanent-lifting magnets for heavy large plates (special devices on request).

121



SAV 531.01Universal Permanent Lifting MagnetCompact execution with high lifting power

Use: Compact and light lifting tool for safe, easy and quick transport of heavy workpieces, equipment and ferromagnetic materials in workshop and warehouse.

Design:Robust design with smooth ON/OFF switching by turning the lever 120o. Equipped with security lock. The contact surface of the magnet consists of two longitudinal poles with prism.Due to the use of neodymium magnetic material these lift magnets have an enormous lifting capacity related to their size and weight. The break-away-force of e.g. the 250 kg version is at least 60 times its own weight. The lifting magnets can easily be switched by hand in case its magnetic circuit is closed; so when the magnet is placed on the workpiece.

Suitable for flat- and round material.

For indoor use only. For outdoor use special sealed executions are available on request

Delivery includes certificate and operating manual.

* The nominal lifting capacity is based on a safety factor of at least 3, assuming ground poles and a 50 mm thick St 37 workpiece.

Universal Permanent Lifting Magnet SAV 531.01 - 2000 Name SAV No. - Nominal capacity

Nominal capacity on flat material * in daN 125 250 500 1000 2000 Nominal capacity on round material in daN 40 125 250 500 1000 Min. workpiece diameter in mm 50 60 65 100 150 Max. workpiece diameter in mm 100 200 270 300 350 Length in mm 93 152 246 305 480 Width in mm 60 100 120 140 165 Height to crane hook in mm 110 164 164 216 251 Weight in kg 2.6 10.0 20.0 40.0 90.0

102

A B

C

Nom. capacity in daN Break-away force in daN

Airgap in mm

122 Chapter 7



SAV 531.02Lifting Magnets and Handling DevicesFor lifting and swivelling of plates and discs by 900

Use: As Universal Permanent Lifting Magnet SAV 531.01, equipped with additional lifting arm for horizontal to vertical manipulation and vice versa, allowing vertical transportation of workpieces, plates and discs.

Design:Robust design with smooth ON/OFF switching by turning the lever 120o. Equipped with security lock. The contact surface of the magnet consists of two longitudinal poles. Lifting arm can easily and quickly be (dis-)mounted. With two-step end-stop and adjustable magnet position. A secure end-stop of the workpiece is important for vertical transport.Variable lifting eye for adjusting the centre of gravity during vertical transport dependant on the workpiece. Delivery including certificates and operating manual.

* The nominal lifting capacity is based on a safety factor of at least 3, assuming ground poles and a 50 mm thick St 37 workpiece.

Nominal capacity on flat material * in daN 250 500 Max. break away force in daN 800 1600 Length in mm 958 1158 Height with lift eye in mm 255 255 Width in mm 210 275 Min./ max. workpiece width/diameter in mm 300 - 800 300 - 1000 Min./ max. workpiece length in mm 200 - 2000 250 - 2000 For workpiece thickness in mm 4 6 Weight in kg 27.0 39.0

Universal Lifting Arm with Permanent Magnet SAV 531.02 - 500Name SAV No. - Nominal holding force

adjustable to centerof gravity

diametermax. 800/1000 mm

adjustable to centerof gravity

diametermax. 800/1000 mm

workpiece center of gravity


Electro- and Electro-Permanent Lifting MagnetsCustom designed executions

Use:Special lifting magnets and systemsmade to customer specifications.

Required information:- application- dimensions and shape of workpiece- material- surface and airgaps- hardness- weight- duty cycle

Design:Electro-Lifting Magnets with integratedrectifier and connector for 230 V / 50/60 Hz possible.

124 Chapter 7



With high lifting force

Use:This magnet is used to lift, transport and move sheet metal plates.

Design:Very high lifting force, approx. 85 times own weight. Stable housing. Safety according GS standard.

* measured with safety factor 2 on bright drawn material St 37 K

Permanent Magnetic Plate Lifter SAV 531.92 - 300Name SAV - No.

Nominal lifting force* daN 120* 170* 300* Break-away force daN 240* 340* 600* Drag force daN 70 100 180 Length mm 140 140 160 Width mm 84 116 180 Weight kg 1.4 1.8 3.5

SAV 531.92Permanent Magnetic Plate Lifter

SAV 531.20Permanent Magnetic Claw with lifting eye

For transporting and holding by handUse:This magnet is used to lift, transport and move workpieces.Especially suitable for sharp edged, oily, dirty and hot parts.

Design:High lifting / sliding force, stable housing, workpiece is released with lever.Max. ambient temperature: 150 oCNominal lifting force: 18 daN

Permanent Magnetic Hand Lifter SAV 531.90Name SAV - No.

Length in mm 92 Width in mm 50 Height in mm 32 Height with grip in mm 122 Weight in kg 1.0

SAV 531.90Permanent Magnetic Hand Lifter

Compact, with eye for crane use

Use:For lifting of workpieces by crane, which are too heavy to transport by hand.

Execution:Stable construction with lever for easy release of workpieces (sheets etc.)Safety according GS standard.

Nominal holding force daN 250 300 Nominal drag force daN 100 125 Break-away force daN 750 900 Length mm 290 290 Height with grip mm 125 180 Weight kg 7.5 10.5

Permanent Magnetic Claw with lifting eye SAV 531.20 - 300Name SAV - No. - Nominal holding force



Both types are for horizontal and vertical handling.Especially suitable for lifting of sheets of 4 mm thickness and up.



Permanent magnetic chucks Pole pitch

Magnetic chucks for EDM applications Information and application examples – – 144

Magnets for erosion work Remarks and application examples – – 144

Permanent Magnetic Chuck extreme low height P = 1.9 mm 243.07 145

Permanent Magnetic Chuck stainless execution P = 1.9 mm 243.16 145

more magnetic chucks can be found in chapter 1

Pallets, Circular Pallets Remarks SAV-No. Page

Electro-Permanent Magnetic Pallets on request 220.73 126

System overview pallets system 150, 200, 240, 280, 320, 480, 650 – 128-129

Screw threaded pallet stainless steel top plate with threads 220.10 130

Sectioned T-slot pallet hardened stainless steel sections 220.20 130

T-slot pallet from aluminium 220.21 132

Uni pallet universal use 220.40 132

Magnet pallet with pole plate steel / stainless steel (V4A) 220.30 134

Power magnet pallet with pole plate steel / stainless steel (V4A) 220.31 134

Multi-Pallet for clamping of electrodes, aluminum housing 220.50 136

Screw threaded circular pallet Stainless steel plate with threaded screw holes 220.15 138

T-slot circular pallet stainless tool steel 220.25 138

Uni circular pallet univeral use 220.45 139

Circular magnet integrated in ball execution in permanent- and power magnet 220.39 140

Power magnet circular pallet aluminium housing with steel top plate 244.07 141

Precision pull-down vices, inserts, 3-jaw chuck

T-slot mechanical clamp, single stainless tool steel 204.04 142

T-slot mechanical clamp, double stainless tool steel 204.04 142

Precision pull-down vice stainless tool steel 231.01 146

Precision mini pull-down vice stainless tool steel 231.02 146

Precision pull-down vice also in stainless execution 231.06 147

Precision 3-jaw chuck with holding block 260.11 148

Holding block with quick clamp 3-jaw chuck 260.11 - B 148

Precision sine tables

Precision sine table (also stainless exec.) swivel on longitudinal axis 235.20 149

Precision sine table (also stainless exec.) swivel on transverse axis 235.21 150

Precision sine table (also stainless exec.) swivel on longitudinal and transverse axis 235.22 149

Precision sine table, extreme low height swivel on longitudinal axis 245.04 151

more sine tables in chapter 6


EP-magnet pallet SAV 220.73-150x150-210V with angular side stops and automatic docking

EP-magnet pallet SAV 220.73-320x320-210V with industrial connector

Elektro-Permanent-Magnetic Pallets SAV 220.73on request

AUTOMATION SOLUTIONS

PALLETIZING SYSTEMS



Coolant-hose holders, holding magnets

Coolant-hose holder, single with permanent holding magnet 581.01 156

Coolant-hose holder, multiple with permanent holding magnet 581.02 156

Holding magnets for reliable flushing 581.03 156

Transport systems and pallet changers

Rolling transporter for transport of pallets 228.01 166-167

Lifting device with fork for loading and unloading 228.01 - KP 168

Lifting device, changeable for loading and unloading 228.01 - GP 168

Automatic pallet changers on request 228.20 169-170

Neodymium magnetic blocks, clamping block Pole pitch SAV-No. Page

Multiple-prism clamping block stainless execution - 207.01 152

Permanent magnetic block fine and super-fine transverse poles P = 1.3/4 mm 242.01 153

Permanent magnetic switchable block with 3 magnetic clamping surfaces P = 0.5/1 mm 242.02 153

Permanent magnetic block 4 magnetic sides P = 2/2 mm 242.11 154

Neodym magnetic block with extreme high holding force P = 2/4 mm 242.12 155

Electrode holders, collets and collet holders

Electrode uni fixture stainless tool steel 581.07-UEH 157

Set electrode fixtures in 2 basic variants 581.07-SET 158-159

Adapter flange stainless tool steel 581.07-FA 160

Exchange set stainless tool steel 581.07-W 160

Gasket aluminum / plastic 581.07-DS 160

Collet electrode fixture stainless tool steel 581.07-ZEH 161

Electrode fixture stainless tool steel 581.07-WEH 161

Collet electrode fixture stainless tool steel 439.67 161

Precision Rotary Indexers

Precision rotary indexer suitable for eroding frames 434.50 162-163

NC Rot. indexers, indexers w. direct drive examples and possibilities of SAV 164-165


System 150 System 200 System 240 System 280

Dimensions: ø 150 and up Dimensions: 200 x 200 Dimensions: 240 x 240 Dimensions: 280 x 280

SAV 220.30

On request

SAV 220.30 SAV 220.30 SAV 220.30

SAV 220.31

On request

SAV 220.31 SAV 220.31

On request

SAV 220.20 SAV 220.20 SAV 220.20

SAV 220.15 SAV 220.10 SAV 220.10 SAV 220.10

SAV 220.25 SAV 220.21 SAV 220.21 SAV 220.21

SAV 220.45 SAV 220.40 SAV 220.40 SAV 220.40

PRODUCT RANGE OVERVIEW PALLETS

SAV 220.21

SAV 220.10 SAV 220.10 SAV 220.10

SAV 220.20 SAV 220.20

A D A P T A B L E T O A L L A V A I L A B L E R E F E R E

grinding sinker EDM wire EDM

Magnet

PowerMagnet

SectionedT-slot

Screwthreaded

T-slot

Universal

SAV 220.36


PRODUCT RANGE OVERVIEW PALLETS

System 320 System 480 System 650

Dimensions: 320 x 320 and 320 x 160 Dimensions: 480 x 280 Dimensions: 650 x 340

SAV 220.30 SAV 243.70only as EP-magnet

SAV 243.70only as EP-magnet

SAV 220.31 SAV 220.31

SAV 220.31

SAV 220.20 SAV 220.20 SAV 220.20

SAV 220.10 SAV 220.10 SAV 220.10

SAV 220.21 SAV 220.21 SAV 220.21

SAV 220.40 SAV 220.40 SAV 220.40

SAV 220.30

SAV 220.40

SAV 220.20

SAV 220.21

SAV 220.40

SAV 220.10

SAV 220.20

SAV 220.21

SAV 220.10SAV 220.10

measuring milling turning

SAV 220.20



SAV 220.20

on request on request

on request on request

N C E S Y S T E M S F O R T H E A P P L I C A T I O N S :

130 Chapter 8






SAV 220.10Screw-Threaded Pallet

Material:Aluminium base with screwed-on hardened and stainless steel top plate with threaded screw holes.

Technical Specifications:- Parallelism: < 0.02 mm- Top plate: hardened- Holding elements SAV 204.04 available on request (page 22)

Screw threaded pallet SAV 220.10 - 320 x 320 - Reference system* - Adaptation*Name SAV-No. - A x B - Reference system* - Adaptation*

A B C D E F200 200 200 42 M 8 25 25 49 7.8240 240 240 42 M 8 25 25 81 11.0280 280 280 44 M 8 25 25 81 15.0320 320 320 52 M 8 25 25 121 22.0320 320 160 52 M 8 25 25 55 10.5480 480 280 50 M 8 50 50 162 29.0650 650 340 57 M 8 50 50 242 43.0

Dimensions (mm) Weight(kg)

Threaded holes

Threaded holes (mm)

Threaded holes grid (mm)

SAV 220.20Sectioned T-Slot Pallet

Material:Aluminium base with screwed-on hardened and stainless steel section top plates.

Technical Specifications:- Parallelism: < 0.02 mm- Top plate: section plates hardened- Holding elements SAV 204.04 available on request (page 22)- Threaded holes grid 50 x 50 mm (F and G)

Sectioned T-Slot Pallet SAV 220.20 - 320 x 320 - 6 - Reference system* - Adaptation*Name SAV - No. - A x B - D - Reference system* - Adaptation*

A B C D H8 E F G H200 200 200 40 6 8 10 M 8 50 50 90 3 8.0240 240 240 43 6 8 10 M 8 50 50 70 4 9.5280 280 280 45 6 8 10 M 8 50 50 70 5 14.1320 320 320 52 6 8 10 M 8 50 50 75 5 22.0320 320 160 52 6 8 10 M 8 50 50 75 5 9.5480 480 280 50 6 8 10 M 8 50 50 70 8 25.0650 650 340 57 6 8 10 M 8 50 50 85 10 46.5


T-slots grid (mm)

Threaded holes (mm)

Threaded holes grid (mm)

Dimensions T-slots (mm)

System

System Sections

A

ED

B

C

F

AG

FE

B

C

HD


Application Examples

Pallet type:Screw Threaded Pallet

SAV 220.10 - 320 x 320Reference system* with SAV 581.07 - UEH

Pallet type:Sectioned Pallet

SAV 220.20 - 240 x 240Reference system*

Pallet type:Sectioned Pallet




*Please specify reference system and robot adaption; we can advice!

132 Chapter 8






SAV 220.21T-Slot Pallet

Material:Aluminium

Technical Specifications:- Parallelism: < 0.02 mm- Holding elements SAV 204.04 available on request (page 22)

T-Slot Pallet SAV 220.21 - 320 x 320 - 6 - Reference system* - Adaptation*Name SAV - No - A x B - D - Reference system* - Adaptation*

SAV 220.40Uni Pallet

Material:Aluminium

Technical Specifications:- Parallelism: < 0.02 mm- Universal application

Uni Pallet SAV 220.40 - 320 x 320 - Reference system* - Adaptation*Name SAV - No. - A x B - Reference system* - Adaptation*

System A B C200 200 200 26 2.8240 240 240 26 5.0280 280 280 28 6.3320 320 320 40 12.6320 320 160 40 6.3480 480 280 40 20.0650 650 340 40 40.0


A B C D H8 E200 200 200 26 6 8 10 90 3 3.0240 240 240 26 6 8 10 70 4 5.2280 280 280 28 6 8 10 70 5 6.5320 320 320 30 6 8 10 75 5 9.5320 320 160 30 6 8 10 75 5 4.7480 480 280 48 6 8 10 70 8 16.5650 650 340 50 6 8 10 85 10 29.0


T-slots grid (mm)

Dimensions T-slots (mm) T-SlotsSystem

A

B

E

C

D

A

B

C




Pallet type:Magnet Pallet


Pallet type:T-Slot Pallet






134 Chapter 8






SAV 220.30Magnet Pallet

Material:Aluminium base with St 37 / stainless steel (V4A) Pole pate

Technical Specifications:- Parallelism: < 0.01 mm- Can be executed with threaded holes for side or angled stops- Magnetic field height: 4 mm- Pole plate wearing limit: 3 mm- Holding force: 80 N/cm2

- Pole pitch: 1.9 mm

Magnet Pallet SAV 220.30 - 320 x 320 - Reference system* - Adaptation*Name SAV-No. - A x B - Reference system* - Adaptation*

SAV 220.31Power Magnet Pallet

Material:Aluminium base with St 37 / stainless steel (V4A) Pole plate

Technical Specifications:- Low weight with high holding force- Parallelism: < 0.01 mm- Pole plate wearing limit: 2 mm- Holding force: 140 N/cm2

- Also available in stainless steel- Can be executed with threaded holes for side or angled stops- Low magnetic field height

Power Magnet Pallet SAV 220.31 - 320 x 320 - Reference system* - Adaptation*Name SAV - No - A x B - Reference system* - Adaptation*

A B C D200 200 200 46 – 1 15.0240 240 240 46 204.5 1 alt.2 19.0280 280 280 67 204.5 2 25.0320 320 320 58 246.0 2 alt.1 32.0320 320 160 58 246.0 1 16.0


Switchable sections System

A B C* D E F240 240 240 60 126.0 - - 1 18.0280 280 280 60 166.0 80.0 80.0 2 21.5320 320 320 67 206.0 80.0 80.0 2 alt.1 25.0


Switchable sections System

Important: Workpiece does not require full magnetic surface!

CB

AE F

D

and High Speed Cutting (HSC)

* is determine by reference systems

0,5 1,5

2 2

V4A

St 37

V4A

B

ADC*




Pallet type:POWER Magnet Pallet for HSC-Milling




Pallet type:POWER Magnet Pallet


Accuracy: ± 0.001 mm



136 Chapter 8



SAV 220.50Multi Pallet

Material:Housing out of aluminium and electrodefixtures out of stainless and hardened steel.

Application:For milling of electrodes directly in its typical clamping fixture.

Technical Specifications:- repeatability: 0.002 mm- Indexing: 4 x 90°- Holding force: 12000 N- simple mechanical operation- only 1/2 turn to lock or unlock

Multi Pallet SAV 220.50 - 320 x 320 - 4 - Reference system - electrode fixtureName SAV - No. - A x B - C - Reference system - electrode fixture

D

System

Dimensions (mm)Weight

(kg)clampingpositions

A B C D E240 240 240 4 140 140 15.0280 280 280 4 180 180 17.0320 320 320 4 180 180 19.0280 280 280 6 180 90 26.0320 320 320 6 180 90 28.0

Reference system

A

B

E

A

EBD

4-positions 6-positions

Electrode clamping system


Special application:6-positions fixtureDimensions: 380 x 320 - 6


Special application: 4-positions fixtureDimensions: 280 x 280 - 4

Pallet type:Multi Pallet


*Please specify reference system and adaption. We can advice!




Reference system


Reference system



138 Chapter 8




SAV 220.15Screw Threaded Circular Pallet

Material:Aluminium base with screwed-on hardened and stainless steel top plate with threaded screw holes.

Technical Specifications:- Parallelism: < 0.02 mm- Top plate: hardened- Holding elements SAV 204.04 available on request (page 22)

Screw Threaded Circular Pallet SAV 220.15 - 150 - Reference system Name SAV - No - A - Reference system

A B C D E150 150 40 M 8 25 25 24 3.5

Diameter(mm) Weight

(kg)Threaded

holes

Threaded holes (mm)

Threaded holes grid (mm)System

Thickness(mm)

SAV 220.25T-Slot Circular Pallet

Material:Stainless tool steel, hardened

Technical Specifications:- Parallelism: < 0.02 mm- Clamping elements SAV 204.04 available on request (page 22)

T-Slot Circular Pallet SAV 220.25 - 150 - 6 - Reference system* Name SAV - No. - A - C - Reference system*

A B C H8 D150 150 40 6 4 40 5.0

Diameter(mm)

Weight(kg)

T-slots grid (mm)

Dimensions T-slots (mm)System

Thickness(mm) T-Slots

EC

D

BA

B

DC

A

139Chapter 8




Pallet type:Screw-threaded Circular Pallet SAV 220.15 - 150 - Reference system*

WorkpieceExcenter nut SAV 204.39

End stopWorkpiece

Alternative Excutions

Pallet type:Magnet Circular Pallet SAV 220.36 - 160 - Reference system*

Pallet type:T-Slot Circular Pallet SAV 220.25 - 150 - Reference system*

T-slot mech. clamp, single SAV 204.04

Workpiece

End stop

SAV 220.45Uni Circular Pallet

Material:Aluminium

Technical Specifications:- Parallelism: < 0.02 mm- Clamping elements available on request

Uni Circular Pallet SAV 220.45 - 150 - Reference system* Name SAV - No. - A - Reference system*

A B150 150 40 1.8

Diameter(mm) Weight

(kg)System

Thickness(mm)

AB

140 Chapter 8



SAV 220.39Circular Magnet integrated in Ball

Material:Ball hard plastic / housing aluminium

Execution of permanent magnet (PE):- Pole plate St 37 / Brass

Execution of power magnet (PO):- Pole plate St 37 / stainless steel (V4A)

Application:Polishing, measuring, assembling,laserwelding.

Technical Specifications:Optimal approach to workpieceby setting in desired position.

Magnet Circular Pallet SAV 220.39 - PE Name SAV - No. - Type

SystemDimensions (mm) Weight

(kg)Holding power

(N/cm²)Pole pitch

(mm)Magnet fieldheight (mm)A B C

PE 100 140 110 3 80 11 10PO 100 140 110 3 140 6 10

Execution: Circular magnet PEApplication: Measuring

BA

C

Execution: Circular magnet PEApplication: For polishing and laser welding

141



SAV 244.07Power-Magnet Circular Pallet

Use:For workpieces that are particularly difficult to clamp, such as ferrotic and hard metals containing cobalt, as well as very smallworkpieces.

Features:Aluminium housing, pole plate made from tool steel. Extremely high holding force througha specially developed construction usingneodymium-iron-boron magnets.Available with flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 06).

Technical Specifications:- Holding force: 140 N/cm2

- Magnetic field height: 4 mm- Pole plate wearing limit: 3 mm

Power-Magnet Circular Pallet SAV 244.07 - 160 - Reference system*Name SAV - No. - A - Reference system*

Execution:Circular power magnet palletSAV 244.07 - 160 - Reference system*

*Please indicate reference system and adapters, we are glad to advices you!

Also suitable for small parts

100

10

6

6

5

thickness 0.8 mm

L

H

KJ

I G

pole picture

ØA

F

B

ØCH7

ØE

D

Dimensions in mm Weightin kgA B+0.5 C D E F G H I J K L

100 65 70 4 90 M6 (4x) - - 48 - - 74 2.0125 65 95 4 110 M8 (4x) - 88 54 - 98 67 3.0160 65 125 4 140 M10 (4x) - 104 54 - 134 61 4.5180 65 125 4 160 M10 (4x) 124 84 64 134 97 61 6.5200 65 125 4 180 M10 (4x) 134 104 74 158 110 73 8.5

–2

142 Chapter 8





SAV 204.04T-Slot Mechanical Clamp – Single


Application:For single sideways clampingof very low workpieces for EDM

Technical Specifications:Complete with nut and clamping piece

T-Slot Mechanical Clamp SAV 204.04 - 10 - EName SAV-No. - System - Single

6 - E 5.6 ca. 32 2.5 0.3 0.3 8 - E 7.6 ca. 36 3.2 0.4 0.510 - E 9.6 ca. 40 4.0 0.5 0.7

Weight(kg)

SAV 204.04T-Slot Mechanical Clamp – Double


Application:For double sideways clampingof very low workpieces for EDM

Technical Specifications:Complete with nuts and clamping pieces

T-Slot Mechanical Clamp SAV 204.04 - 10 - DName SAV-No. - System - Double

System Width(mm)

Length(mm)

F1(kN)

F2(kN)

6 - D 5.6 ca. 50 2.5 0.3 0.5 8 - D 7.6 ca. 54 3.2 0.4 0.710 - D 9.6 ca. 58 4.0 0.5 0.9

Weight(kg)System

Width(mm)

Length(mm)

F1(kN)

F2(kN)

A

B

F1

F2

F1

F2

A

B

F1

F2


143



Reference System*

Execution:T-Slot Mechanical Clamp, single

SAV 204.04 - 10 - E

Workpiece

T-Slot Mechanical Clamp, doubleSAV 204.04 - 10 - D

SAV workholding section, suitable for T-Slot Mechanical Clamps

Execution:T-Slot Mechanical Clamp, single

SAV 204.04 - 10 - E

Application of SAV workholding section in wire EDM

T-Slot Mechanical Clamp, singleSAV 204.04 - 10 - E

T-Slot Mechanical Clamp, singleSAV 204.04 - 10 - E

Workpiece

* Please specify reference system and robot adaption; we can advice!



Magnets for erosion workRemarks and application examples

Magnets and clamping devices for spark erosion workWhen using magnets and mechanical clamping devices on erosion machines, there are some details to be taken into account.

Especially the use in aggressive dielectric of the wire erosion machines ask for the highest requirements regarding corrosion resistency of the clamping devices. Important objective is also the sealing of the magnets.

In order to prevent sticking of the removed material to the workpiece, and thereby the danger for short-circuit, mostly magnets with a low magnetic field are used.Independent to this, one should see to an adequate flushingwith e.g. top magnets.

As magnetic chucks have an unavoidable deformation of someµm due to the holding force, it is adviced to grind the pole platein switched-on position. In order not to endanger the availableholding forces, one should take into account the maximum consumption and allowable machining of these pole plates.The nominal holding forces indicated per workpiece surface, are based on a testing workpiece from St37 (mild steel), length 100 mm, width 100 mm and thickness 40 mm with ground surface. Further influences on the holding forces can be derived from the applicable chapters and in thedetailed technical advice given in chapter 15 of this catalogue.

Spark erosion with permanent magnetic chucksExecution with longitudinal poles and 2 separated switchable clamping zones. The magnet is especiallysuitable due to its low magnetic field of approx. 4 mm.

Precision sine table SAV 245.40Magnetic chuck SAV 243.07Permanent magetic beam SAV 243.15Magnetic suction top SAV 581.04Holding magnets SAV 581.03

Magnetic clamping tools for spark erosionMagnetic chucks and blocks with sinetable make a rational workholding and angle setting possible.The permanent magnetic beams in front hold the workpiece available for the use of magnetic suction top. In combination with the holding magnets for closing of holes this gives a reliable flushing.

Magnetic pallet SAV 220.30

Permanent magnetic chucksWith reference system and flushing holes.On request SAV supplies their erosionworkholding tools with all common adapters.

Magnetic chuckSAV 243.07

Precision sine tables with magnetic chuck and precision pull-down viceFor machining of ferro-magnetic workpieces withtilting over longitudinal and transverse axis and for clamping of non-magnetic materials.

Precision sine table:SAV 245.02

Precision pull-down vice:SAV 231.06

Permanent magnetic chucksWith reference system for usein dielectric fluid.On /off switching from top. The workpieces are appliedoutside the machine and theirposition is measured and set.

Permanent magnetic chuck:SAV 243.07

145Chapter 8




Permanent Magnetic Chuck – stainless execution SAV 243.16

Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.16 - 300 - RFName SAV - No. - A - stainless execution

Use:For small, medium and large workpieces.Adaptable to zero-reference systems

Features:Uninterrupted transverse pole arrangement.Constant holding force over the entire pole surface area and along the side faces.Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1.4 mm stainless steelAlso available in combination with stainless sine table SAV 245.01-RF (see chapter 6).Non-stainless execution SAV 243.01 can be found in chapter 1



With fine pole pitch P = 1.9 mm

0,51,4

Dimensions in mm WeightA B C D in kg

150 100 50 114 6.0200 100 50 164 8.0250 150 50 215 14.2300 150 50 265 19.7

C

A

C

BD


Use:Very suitable for thin parts.

Features:Extremely low height. ON-OFF switching from above.Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1.4 mm steel.Flushing channel(s) available at a surcharge.Suitable for adaption on zero reference system on request.Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2



With fine transverse pole pitch P = 1,9 mm

A

B

CE

D

F

1,4 0,5

Dimension in mm WeightA B C+0,5 D E F in kg

175 100 32.0 185 11.5 122 4.5255 130 32.0 265 11.5 200 8.5150 150 34.5 160 11.5 96 6.0250 150 34.5 260 11.5 194 10.0300 150 34.5 310 11.5 246 12.5350 150 34.5 360 11.5 295 14.0450 150 34.5 460 11.5 396 18.0400 200 35.0 410 11.5 344 23.0

–2

146 Chapter 8




SAV 231.01Precision Pull Down Vice

Precisions Pull Down Vice SAV 231.01 - 35 - RFName SAV - No. - A - Execution

SAV 231.02Precision Mini Pull Down Vice

Precisions Mini Pull Down Vice SAV 231.02 - RFName SAV-No. - Execution

Material: Chromium steel through hardened to HRC 58 and ground on all sides

Technical Specifications:- large capacity- pull-down-system- clamp-nuts on 4 sides- quick adjustment- stainless type for A=35 and A=48 Square-accuracy: 0.005 / 100 mmParallel-accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm

Scope of supply:- hexagon key- wooden case optional

A B C D E35 170 90 50 25 1.4 SAV 539.0348 170 90 50 25 1.9 SAV 539.0363 172 90 60 30 3.7 SAV 539.0373 190 100 70 35 4.6 SAV 539.0398 230 125 80 40 11.4 SAV 539.05

125 300 160 98 48 18.5 SAV 539.09150 350 210 100 50 24.9 SAV 539.09

Weightin kg

Wooden case optional ord.no.

Dimensions in mm

D

C

EB A

light milling

Material:Chromium steel through hardened to HRC 55 and ground on all sides

For precision grinding and EDM applica-tions on small workpieces. Can also be used as electrode holding device for spark erosion SAV 581.05 Type EH 25.

Technical Specifications:- pull-down-system- mounting threads for use as electrode holder- stainless type on request (RF)Square-accuracy: 0.005 / 100 mmParallel-accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm


A B C D E25 65 20 30 10 0.3 SAV 539.01

Weightin kg

Dimensions in mm Wooden case optional ord.no.

C

E

D

B A

147Chapter 8





Execution:Precision Mini PullDown Vice

SAV 231.02

Execution:Precision Pull Down Vice

SAV 231.01 - 35

SAV 231.06Precision Pull Down ViceFor precise clamping

Product specification: - chromium steel through hardened HRC 60 and ground on all sides- pull-down-system- quick adjustment with socket pin- clamp-nuts on 4 sides- mounting threads for use with workpiece-stopworkpiece-stop fixed and moveable - prism in moveable jaw optional- stainless type on request (RF)

Technical data:Square-accuracy: 0.005 / 100 mmParallel-accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm

Precision Pull Down Vice SAV 231.06 - 60 - RFName SAV-No. - A - Edition (optional)

A B C D E F60 175 80 56 28 40 2.8 1000 SAV 539.0375 220 100 75 40 50 5.8 2000 SAV 539.03

100 260 120 87 45 55 10.9 3000 SAV 539.07125 330 160 100 50 65 19.8 4000 SAV 539.09125 350 180 100 50 65 20.4 4000 SAV 539.16125 370 200 100 50 65 21.0 3500 SAV 539.16125 430 260 100 50 65 27.0 3000 SAV 539.16160 370 200 126 60 70 38.0 5000 SAV 539.16

Weightin kg


Dimensions in mm Clamping force in

daN

Scope of supply:- hexagon key- workpiece-stop fix and moveable- 4 clamps- wooden case optional

light milling

A

FC

E

B

fixed workpiece stopmoveable

workpiece stop

optional

D

148 Chapter 8




SAV 260.11Precision 3-Jaw-Chuck

Material:Stainless steel, jaws and chuck hardened

Technical Specifications:- Precision ground- High rotation accuracy and repeatability at low holding force- Rotation accuracy with testing pin of 10 mm diameter; < 0.03 mm- Suitable for thin ring shaped workpieces- Workpiece clamping by manual rotation of the setting ring, without key- Clamping repeatability < 0.02 mm- When ordering replacement Jaws, these will be supplied in pre-manufactured accuracy.

A B C Dmin. 0.5 min. 16

58 9 12 25.0 max. 10 max. 49 0.25min. 1.0 min. 21

100 9 18 37.5 max. 29 max. 86 1.70


SAV 260.11 – BHolding Block

Material:Compact holding block made of stainless steel, precision ground and with hardened surfaces.

- Used on EDM frames and for grinding

Technical Specifications:- Clamping repeatability < 0.05 mm- Can be used in combination with Precision 3-Jaw-Chuck SAV 260.11 sizes 58 and 100

Holding Block SAV 260.11 - B - 100Name SAV - No. - B - Execution

A B C58 58 48 1.2

100 100 65 4.8

Weight(kg)

Dimensions (mm)

Clamping range (mm)

Inside clamping Outside clamping

Inside clamping

Execution: Holding block SAV 260.11 - B with Precision 3-Jaw-Chuck SAV 260.11

A

Ø CD

B

11Outside clamping

A

Ø C

D

B

11

A

BC

Z=

0

Z=

0

Precision 3-Jaw-Chuck SAV 260.11 - 100Name SAV - No. - Diameter

149Chapter 8




Precision Sine Table – also stainless execution SAV 235.20With precision pull down vice SAV 231.06

Design:Swivel on the longitudinal axis to max. 45°The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60) black-finished and precision ground. Vice and sine table are also available in stainless execution (RF).Delivery in wooden storage case.

Angle precision: ± 5 sec.Planar parallelism: ± 0.005 / 100 mmShimming measure at 0°: 3 mmSwivel range: 0° to 45°

Application:The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge.The precision pull down vice can be set in either X or Y direction.

Standard accessories:1 fixed end stop, 1 adjustable end stop1 allen key1 sine table in degrees / minute

Precision sine table SAV 235.20 - RFName SAV - No. - Execution

Dimensions in mm WeightA B C D E 0 F G H in kg

60 28 80 102 45 140 130 100 6.5-2

D

B

E

F

AC

Name SAV - No. - Execution

DE

F

C

H

G

Precision Sine Table – also stainless execution SAV 235.22Swivel over longitudinal and transverse axis with precision pull down vice SAV 231.06

Design:Swivel over longitudinal and transverse axis. With precision pull down vice.The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60) black-finished and precision ground. Vice and sine table are also available in stainlessexecution (RF).Delivery in wooden storage case.

Angle precision: ± 5 sec.Planar parallelism: ± 0.005 / 100 mmShimming measure at 0°: 3 mmSwivel range: 0° to 45°

Application:The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge.The precision pull down vice can be set in either X or Y direction.

Standard accessories:1 fixed end stop, 1 adjustable end stop1 allen key1 sine table in degrees / minute

Precision Sine Table SAV 235.22 - RFName SAV - No. - Execution

Dimensions in mm WeightA B C D E F in kg

60 80 132 140 130 100 9.5

D

B

EF

A

C

F

150 Chapter 8



SAV 235.21Precision Sine Table

Design:Swivel on the transverse axis to max. 45 degrees. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. Vice and sine table are also available in stainless steel execution (RF), for wire EDM.Delivery in wooden storage case.

Angle precision: ± 5 sec.Planar parallelism: ± 0.005 / 100 mmShimming measure at 0°: 3 mm

Application:The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. The precision pull down vice can be set in either X or Y direction.

Standard accessories:1 fixed end stop, 1 adjustable end stop, 1 chucking wrench

Precision Sine Table SAV 235.21 - 100 - RFName SAV - No. - A - Execution

With precision pull down vice

A B

DE

C

F

A B C D E F75 100 120 195 115 165 15.0

100 120 130 220 140 190 20.0125 160 143 245 165 215 30.0

Weightin kg

Dimensions in mm

Mounted on pallet and zero reference system

151



Precision Sine Table SAV 245.04Swivel on longitudinal axis, with extreme low height

Design:Swivel on the longitudinal axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. High accuracy due to extreme flat construction.Standard execution with permanent magnetic chuck. ON/OFF-switching on top.The sine tables are supplied in wooden storage cases, with sine chart degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and short side stop.




Precision Sine Table SAV 245.04 - 450Name SAV No. - A

B

D

F

A

C

E at

0°


Dimensions in mm Weight in kgA B C D E 0 F

175 100 215 115 60.0 85 8.5150 150 190 165 62.5 135 10.0255 130 295 145 60.0 115 14.0300 150 340 165 62.5 135 20.0350 150 390 165 70.5 135 26.5400 200 440 215 71.0 185 41.0450 150 490 165 70.5 135 33.5

-2

152 Chapter 8



SAV 207.01Multi-Prism Clamping Block – stainless executionFor rational multi-clamping

Use:Rational simultaneous clamping of round, square and rectangular workpieces like hole punchers, ejector pins and mould inserts.

Design:- single positioning and clamping of workpieces- stainless tool steel, through-hardened and ground on all sides- mounting holes for erosion frame (special execution) as well as special shapes and workpiece specific solutions possible on request- standard solution see also chapter 13

Technical data:Square accuracy : 0.01 / 100 mmParallel accuracy : 0.01 / 100 mm

Scope of supply:Wooden case.

Multi-clamping prism block SAV 207.01 - 320 - RFName SAV - No. - Length - Execution

SAV 207.01-230-RF

Special prism clamping block for square 7 x 7 mm,2 sections, for 50 workpieces each on circular magnet SAV 244.06-350

Length (C) mm 150 320Width with prism (A) mm 60 95Height (B) mm 70 561st side for quantity x ø mm 15 x 0 - 7 8 x 14 - 322nd side for quantity x ø mm 8 x 0 - 14 8 x 14 - 40Weight kg 8.5 22.5

Aca

. A +

55

B

90°

C

153Chapter 8




SAV 242.01Permanent Magnetic Block

For machining and shaping of small workpieces,such as punches etc. For clamping of thin components type MH 204 is recommended which has an extra fine pole pitch.

Features:Two or three magnetic clamping surfaces, pole pitch 4 mm, or 1.3 mm for type MH 204.Types MH 201S to MH 203S use SmCo5-magnets with extremely high holding forces for materials that are difficult to magnetize.

Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2 for MH201 to MH204180 N/cm2 for MH201-S to MH204-SField height: 6 mm

Pole plate wearing limit:14 mm for MH201 and MH202 6 mm for MH203 and MH204

Permanent Magnetic Block SAV 242.01 - MH 201Name SAV - No. - Type

With fine and extra fine pole pitch, non-switchable

Type MH 201

Type MH 202 to MH 204

A

A

CC

B

B

A B C MH 201 MH 201S 100 100 50 5‘ 1 face 100 x 100 3.6

2 faces 100 x 50 MH 202 MH 202S 100 50 50 5‘ 3 faces 100 x 50 1.7 MH 203 MH 203S 100 25 25 5‘ 2 faces 100 x 25 0.5 MH 204 - 100 25 25 5‘ 2 faces 100 x 25 0.5

Dimensions in mm Weightin kgMagnetice faces

Max. angular

deviationType

Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.02With 3 magnetic clamping surfaces

Use: Angular and parallel grinding of small and medium-sized workpieces.

Features:ON-OFF control with rotary switch.Three magnetic faces.

Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1 mm steel.



Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.02 - 55Name SAV - No. - A

A B C D P55 90.5 125.5 146 0.5+1 2.870 90.5 125.5 151 0.5+1 4.0


A

A

B

C

D

P

7.5

7

2

ON OFF

154 Chapter 8



Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.11


Features: Robust construction with good holding force. Laminations 2 mm brass / 2 mm steel.

Nominal holding force standard: 50 N/cm2

Nominal holding force stainless: 30 N/cm2


Can be supplied with stainless, high-alloyed chrome steel pole plates (RF). Best suited for use on wire erosion machines.

Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.11 - 140 - RFName SAV - No. - A - Execution

With 4 magnetic clamping surfaces, also in stainless execution

A B C D P140 115 64 64 2 + 2 3.1160 135 64 64 2 + 2 4.0


A

B

P

D

C

4 magneticsides

Application with wire-erosion Application at spark-erosion

155



SAV 242.12Neodymium Magnetic Block

Material:Steel base with St 37 / Brass pole plate

Technical Specifications:- High pole plate stability ± 0.002 mm- For difficult and small workpieces with complex eroding outline- Bigger sizes available on request- Holding force: 140 N/cm2

- Magnetic field height: approx. 10 mm- Pole plate wearing limit: 3 mm- Magnetic Block with (A) or without (N) adapter plate for Reference system*

- On request including Positioning Template (JS) on the clamping surface for quick and accurate workpiece positioning- Suitable for connecting Precision Sine Guidance (S) - Mounting of Positioning Template and Precision Sine Guidance using positioning pins with a repeatability of ± 0.003 mm- On request the pole plate can be executed with a Z - 0 end stop (Z)- Clamping of more than 1 workpiece is possible

Neodymium Magnetic Block SAV 242.12 - ND - 200 - A - JS - ZName SAV - No. - ND - Size - A - JS - Z

System Dimensions (mm) Weight

(kg)A B C D E F GND 100 140 70 51 102 118 35 62 3.4ND 200 200 70 51 157 178 36 62 4.2

Stability of pole plate ± 0.002 mm

Clamping surface

Positioning pin

Positioning template

Stability of pole plate ± 0.002 mm

template

Execution:Neodymium Magnetic Block

SAV 242.12-ND 200-JS

* Please specify reference system and robot adaption; we can advice! D

P=6

EAF

GB

C

4 x M6 x 9 deep

1 magnetic surface

H

With extreme high holding force

Workpiece


SAV 242.12-ND 100-JS


SAV 242.12-ND 100-Z

156 Chapter 8



SAV 581.01Coolant-Hose Holder

SAV 581.02Coolant-Hoses Holder

Design:Execution with 1 Snaploc-hose and permanent magnet base from aluminium. Locking valve ¼” with PTFE-ball-valve-seal.

Coolant hose holder SAV 581.01 - 90Name SAV - No. - Execution

Magnet base diameter in mm

Nom. holdingforce in N

Weightin kg

50 110 0.3690 600 0.80

With permanent holding magnet

With switchable permanent holding magnet

Coolant hoses holder SAV 581.02Name SAV - No.

Design:Execution with 3 Snaploc-hoses and switchable permanent magnet base. Locking valve ¼” with PTFE-ball-valve-seal.

Connections: ¼” hoseMagnet base surface: 60 x 50 mmNom. holding force: 200 NWeight: 1.7 kg

SAV 581.03Holding Magnets

Application: For closing non-required flushing holes with wire erosion etc.

Execution:8 pcs. high-quality permanent pot magnets from SmCo5 magnet material with extreme high holding force (100 N). Edged execution for better removal of the magnet. Delivery in wooden storage case. On request also available in other sizes.Diameter: 20 mmHeight: 9 mmWeight: 0.225 kg (8 pcs. in wooden case)

Holding magnets SAV 581.03Name SAV - No.

For reliable flushing




SAV 581.07 – UEHElectrode Uni Fixture


Application:For EDM and milling of electrodes or other square slotted workpieces

Technical Specifications:- On request adjusted to your reference system- Suitable for mounting on multiple-pallets and single mounting

Electrode Uni Fixture SAV 581.07 - UEH - 15Name SAV - No. - Type - A

A B C D E F G H15 15 43 43 27 27 ø 6.6 36 0.4025 25 43 43 27 27 ø 6.6 36 0.45


H

E

C

AF D B

G

Adaption to theelectrode clamping systemis possible


Execution:Screw-threaded Pallet SAV 220.10 - 320 x 320 - Reference system* Electrode Uni FixtureSAV 581.07- UEH - A

Application Examples Electrode Uni Fixture


158 Chapter 8



SAV 581.07 – SETSet Electrode Fixtures

Technical Specifications:- Set is supplied in 2 basic variants- The variants differ in the reference system*, the clamping range of the collets and the exchange set- Set is supplied in wooden case, c.w. collet key- Suitable for exchange set 581.07-W

Collet-electrode-fixture SAV 581.07 - ZEH


Electrode fixtureSAV 581.07 - WEH

SET Electrode fixturesSAV 581.07 - Set

Adapter flangeReference system*SAV 581.07 - FA

ColletSAV 439.67 - AExchange set

SAV 581.07 - W (execution A)

Gasket for central lubrication at Z-axis SAV 581.07 - DS

Exchange setSAV 581.07 - W (execution B)

Collet keySAV 581.07 - S

ColletSAV 439.67 - B

Mounting bolt with gasket

ColletSAV 439.67 - C

Clamping range (mm) Quantity Type Exchange set

4.0 1 4008 E 581.07-W-A6.0 1 4008 E 581.07-W-A3.0 1 470 E 581.07-ZEH5.0 1 470 E 581.07-ZEH6.0 1 470 E 581.07-ZEH8.0 2 470 E 581.07-ZEH

10.0 1 470 E 581.07-ZEH12.0 1 470 E 581.07-ZEH16.0 1 470 E 581.07-ZEH8.0 1 426 E 581.07-W-B

Collets

SAV 581.07 - SetSET Electrode fixturesSAV 581.07 - Set

SAV 581.07 - Set - Reference system*SAV - No.- Execution - Reference system*

159



Execution:Collet fixtureSAV 581.07 - ZEHWith exchange setSAV 581.07 - W - A

Application sinker EDM

Exchange setSAV 581.07 – W

Application sinker EDM

Built on turning machine

Execution:Electrode fixture SAV 581.07 - WEHwith exchange set SAV 581.07 - W - Aand round electrode

Execution:Collet fixtureSAV 581.07 - ZEHWith exchange setSAV 581.07 - W - A

Execution:

Built on turning machineBuilt on turning machine



160 Chapter 8



SAV 581.07 – FAAdapter Flange


Technical Specifications:- Adapter between machine and fixture - For mounting of collet-electrode-fixture SAV 581.07 - ZEH on bigger sized reference systems*- System adaptation required

Adapter Flange SAV 581.07 - FA - Reference system* Name SAV - No. - Type - Reference system*

SAV 581.07 – WExchange Set


Technical Specifications:- Exchange set connects collet-electrode- fixture SAV 581.07 - ZEH and electrode fixture SAV 581.07 - WEH - Supplied with collet holder, excluding collet

Exchange Set SAV 581.07 - W - A Name SAV - No. - Execution

SAV 581.07 – DSGasket

Material:Aluminium / Plastic

Technical Specifications:To seal the connection between adapter flange SAV 581.07 - FA and the collet-electrode-fixture SAV 581.07 - ZEH on machines with central lubrication.

Gasket SAV 581.07 - DS Name SAV - No. - Type

A 4008 E 50 1.0 - 7.0B 426 E 56 1.0 - 10.0

Execution Clamping range (mm)Collet A

(mm)

Hole for central lubrication

20M6

ø65

ø11

0

A

M5

ø87

light milling

light milling

Execution A

Execution B




161




SAV 581.07 – ZEHCollet Electrode Fixture

Collet Electrode Fixture SAV 581.07 - ZEH Name SAV -No. - Type

SAV 581.07 – WEHElectrode Fixture


Application:Adaption with fixture to the maching headfor spark erosion.

Technical Specifications:- Supplied either with or without sine function- Supplied including exchange set SAV 581.07 - W- Execution A suitable for collet form 4008 E- Execution B suitable for collet form 426 E- Delivery excluding collet

Electrode Fixture SAV 581.07 - WEH - A Name SAV-No. - Type - Execution

SAV 439.67Collet Electrode Fixture


Technical Specifications:- Double cone collet supplied with Schaublin System / Regofix according DIN 6499- Type A: Form 470 E Clamping range from diam. 4.0 to 20.0 mm in 1.0 mm steps Clamping range from diam. 2.0 to 3.0 mm in 0.5 mm steps- Type B: Form 426 E Clamping range from diam. 4.0 to 10.0 mm in 1.0 mm steps Clamping range from diam. 2.0 to 3.0 mm in 0.5 mm steps- Type C: Form 4008 E Clamping range from diam. 4.0 to 7.0 mm in 1.0 mm steps Clamping range from diam. 2.0 to 3.0 mm in 0.5 mm steps- Collets can be supplied as set, from diameter 3.0 mm to 18.0 mm

Collet SAV 439.67 - 470 E - Set Name SAV-No. - Type or Set

76

ø80

8250

50

M6

ø40

A

Type A Type B Type C

Material:Body out of stainless tool steel, hardened

Technical Specifications:- Collet fixture with adapter flange and reference system aligned- Collet fixture suitable for collet SAV 439.67-470E or exchange set SAV 581.07-WS- Supplied with cone for chuck type Schaublin No. 470E according DIN 6499 shape ER32- Supplied with adapter flange diameter 80 mm aligned


162 Chapter 8



SAV 434.50Precision Rotary Indexer – stainless execution

UseFor use in erosion frames or for grinding.High accuracy requirements at small holding force.For centered clamping of workpieces.

ExecutionCompact, manual precision indexer from stainless steel, precision ground.Execution especially suitable for wire erosion.- Angle setting through 15° Hirth toothing- Intermediate steps according sine principle up to 45° angle- Indexing accuracy ± 20 sec.- Through holes for mounting, for instance on erosion frames, can be provided on request- Delivery with center through hole diameter Ø15 mm possible

Accessories:The indexer is universal and can be used with different clamping tools.Please order clamping tools always together with indexer, as these must be precisely adapted.

Precision 3-jaw chuck (F)SAV 260.11Neodymium magnetic block (MB)SAV 242.12Precision mini pull down vice (NS)SAV 231.02-RF

Precision Rotary Indexer SAV - 434.50Name SAV - No.

Execution:Precision rotary indexer with sine table up to 45° angle

SAV 434.50 - Special execution

ToolMounting

Angle setting

Sine setting

Parallel end stop

Scale

Angle settingAngle setting

Scale

Angle setting

Suitable for erosion frames


Alternative Executions:

ø14H7

100

130 107

Z=0

58

143

43g7


SAV 434.50

Execution:Precision Rotary Indexer SAV 434.50with 3-Jaw-Chuck SAV 260.11 - 58

Execution:Precision Rotary IndexerSAV 434.50with reference chuck

Execution:Precision Rotary Indexer SAV 434.50with reference chuck

Execution:Precision Rotary Indexer

SAV 434.50with Collet fixture SAV 581.07-ZEH



Examples and possbilities of SAV

Specifications available on request

SAV 434.44Precision sine indexer especially developed for use on spark erosion machines. Completely sealed for continuous use in dielectric. With flushing connection.

SAV 434.51NC Rotary indexer for universal use. Sealed execution for wire erosion available.Standard with SAV control. Optionally also available for Siemens, Heidenhain and Infranor controls.

SAV 434.52Rotary indexer with direct drive. Also suitable for use as extra machine axis. Available in horizontal and vertical execution. With hydraulic clamping through 6 bar pneumatic supply.Standard supplied with Simudrive 611U.

NC Rotary Indexers – Indexers with direct Drive


Control unit versions for SAV NC-rotary indexers DA 145 / DT 350 / DT 630 / DT 8002


Production version 1 Production version 2 CNC version SAV Control

PC with programming software

Touch panel for programm editing, saving and for controlof the converter

Converter with fixedClient specific programs

Converter with variable programs

Program of CNC control

SAV Indexers with NC controlWith conventional SAV – DT 350control and drive SAV – DT 630SAV 434.51 SAV – DT 800

SAV Indexers with NC controlSAV – DT 415 with high dynamic direct drive SAV 434.52

Programming with first installationby SAV according client specification, max. 64 programming positions

Programming by SAV service orcustomer max. 64 programming positions

Programming in ISO code, by customer, unlimited program quantities, full NC compatiblity for max. 2 axis, tele-service


SAV 228.01Rolling Transporter

Application:For transport of pallets and easy positioning on the machines reference system.With pallets of 25 to 30 kg and up the handling of loaded pallets becomes more and more difficult.The limited access to the machines and measuring facilities and the restricted manoeuvring space on the work floor makes the use of a safe and simple transport system inevitable.

Technical Specifications:- SAV 228.01 - G100 suitable for weights up to 100 kg. - Additional: • Lift arm with limited top space access see sketch Al - 1 • Lift arm with limited reach see sketch Al - 2- With the battery powered, electrical driven lift axle the load can be safely and accurately positioned. This transporter can be extended with several mounting sets to adapt to the different pallet sizes and reference systems.- mains voltage 100...230 V AC- frequency 50...60 Hz- Rotation of Lifting tool 360˚- weight 120 kg

Rolling Transporter SAV 228.01 - G100 - Al - 1Name SAV-No. - Type - Arm


1990

SAV 228.01-G100

Special executionSAV 228.01-KP

alternativeSAV 228.01-GP

360°

AL-1

850

adjustable590

450

1680

700

870

Lifti

ng h

eigh

t

95

Sketch AL-1

SYSTEMS-LIFT G100-Al-1



850850

1930

AL-2

360°Special executionSAV 228.01-KP

alternativeSAV 228.01-GP

450

1990

SAV 228.01-G100

480

700

1120

adjustable

Lifti

ng h

eigh

t

Sketch AL-2




168 Chapter 8




A

B40

0

SAV 228.01 - KPLifting Device with fork

SAV 228.01 - GPLifting Device – changeable

Material:Construction steel

Application:For loading of machines, pallets and robot magazines, machine loading stations, measuring machines and storage racks.

Technical Specifications:- Light and precise positioning of pallets on

workholding system or on machine table.- Transported by SAV-systems-Lift SAV 228.01 or by work shop rotating crane.- Transferss weight 200 kg (incl. Pallet)- Other dimensions on request

Pallet Lifter SAV 228.01 - KP - 240 Name SAV - No - System

A B240 305 300 5.0280 345 340 5.8320 385 380 6.5

Dimensions (mm) Weight(kg)System

Material:Galvanised non-eroding steel

Application:For loading of machines, pallets and robot magazines, machine loading stations, measuring machines and storage racks.

Technical Specifications:- For pallet weights up to 200 kg, lifter weight 6 kg- Safe handling by SAV-systems-Lift or by work shop crane- Adjustable to different pallet sizes

Adjustable Pallet Lifter SAV 228.01 - GP - 240 Name SAV - No. - System

440 to 360Adjustable

390

340

Pallet magnet

Pallet magnet with workpiece


We supply automation solutions to machine builders and users in the machine and tool industry.Regardless for what reference system, we can supply for your typical operation

High reliability, precision and quality.

Automatic Pallet Changers

MAGNET PALLET

Special solutions on request

PALLET CHANGER 1600for weights up to 80 kg per pallet

POWER MAGNET PALLET

SECTIONED T-SLOT PALLET

SCREW THREADED PALLET

T-SLOT PALLET

UNI PALLET

MAGNET CIRCULAR PALLET

SCREW THREADED CIRCULAR PALLET

T-SLOT CIRCULAR PALLET

UNI CIRCULAR PALLET

SAV – Pallet systems

SAV 228.20


EP MAGNET PALLET

MAGNET PALLET

POWER MAGNET PALLET



T-SLOT PALLET

UNI PALLET

Automatic Pallet Changers



PALLET CHANGER 1600-1 for weights up to 120 kg per pallet

320 x 320 – 8 Pallets400 x 400 – 6 Pallets280 x 480 – 6 Pallets320 x 480 – 5 Pallets

SAV 228.20



Permanent magnetic blocks

Permanent magnetic block with fine and super-fine pole pitch 242.01 174

Permanent magnetic block with 3 magnetic sides 242.02 174

Permanent magnetic block with 3 magnetic sides 242.03 175

Neodymium magnetic block extreme high holding force 242.05 176

Permanent magnetic block switchable 242.07 175

Permanent magnetic blocks with integrated holding magnets 242.08 177

Permanent magnetic block with 4 magnetic sides, also stainless 242.11 177

Permanent magnetic block switchable, for EDM applications 243.15 178

Laminated plates and bars

Laminated circular top plate for use on circular magnetic chucks 248.01 179

Laminated bars for magnetic chucks with transverse poles 248.02 179

Laminated bars for use on magnetic chucks 248.03 180

Laminated circular top plate for use on circular chuck with radial poles 248.05 181

Laminated circular top plate for parallel pole arrangement 248.06 181

Laminated blocks for use on magnetic chucks 248.60 182

Laminated blocks (set) in storage case 248.61 182

Electro holding magnets Remarks SAV-No. Page

Electro holding magnet with 2 types of electrical connection 241.31 172

Electromagnetic holding beam with high holding forces 241.32 173

172 Chapter 9



Design:Electro holding magnets can hold ferrous magneticworkpieces. Their application is found in steel construction, production and have significant advantages in handling small and medium mass products. To reach the nominal holding force, the steel poles of the holding surface must be completely covered by the workpiece.

Construction:The magnets consist of an electromagnetic holdingsystem. The magnetic circuit is open in switched-on position and makes it possible to hold ferrous magneticworkpieces. Available with stripped connecting wire (Type A) or with connection terminals (Type B ).Depending upon application the appropriate rules for the prevention of accidents are to be followed.With devices of safety class 1 the protective earthing connection according to VDE 0100 § 6 is to be guaranteed by the user. The devices are built and tested according to VDE 0580. This is considered as conformance certificate in accordance with CENELEC memorandum Nr. 3, Part 3, Par. 2.3 according to the new equipment safety law of the EEC.Nominal Voltage: 24 V DCDuty: 100 %Protection: IP 65 acording DIN 40 050Isolation class: E

Notes to technical data:The maximum holding forces are given for St 37 andare based on optimal workpiece-thickness, at airgapdL= 0 and 100% coverage of clamping surface.The values are given for 90% nominal voltage andwarmed condition (approx. 60 K over-temperature without additional heat transfer).If the application is based on other conditions, the holding force is reduced. Due to safety reasons and depending on the application a safety factor is to be taken into account.The nominal power values in the table above areintended to determine the correct electronic accessories and are based on 20°C winding temperature at nominal voltage (VDE 0580/10.70 § 9.1).During operation the nominal power decreases, dependingon the duty.

SAV 241.31- A 01 with connecting wire

øA

B

19

E

I

øD ø

C

K

L

G

H E

F

SAV 241.31 - Type A with stripped connecting wire

SAV 241.31 - Typ Bwith connection terminals

Electro Holding Magnet SAV 241.31 - A 01Name SAV - No. - Type and Size

Electro Holding Magnet SAV 241.31With 2 types of electrical connection

Type andDimensions in mm Nominal

Forcein N

optimum workpiecethicknessin mm

Powerin W

Weightin kgSize A B C D E F G H I K L

A 01 18±0.1 11.0 8.0 16.1 200 M 3 5 2.5 1 - - 45 >2.0 1.4 0.02A/B 02 25±0.1 20.0 11.1 22.3 200 M 4 6 3.5 1 28.5 0.5 140 >3.0 3.2 0.06A/B 03 32±0.1 22.0 14.3 28.6 200 M 4 6 5.0 3 32.5 0.5 230 >3.6 3.6 0.11A/B 04 40±0.1 25.5 17.9 35.8 200 M 5 8 5.0 3 37.0 0.5 475 >4.5 5.2 0.20A/B 05 50±0.1 27.0 20.4 44.7 200 M 5 8 5.5 3 42.0 4.5 750 >6.0 6.5 0.30A/B 06 63±0.1 30.0 28.2 56.3 200 M 8 12 6.0 3 49.0 6.5 1000 >7.0 9.0 0.55A/B 08 80±0.1 38.0 34.0 72.8 200 M 8 12 8.5 3 57.5 7.5 2400 >9.0 15.0 1.20A 10 100±0.1 43.0 42.8 91.3 300 M 10 15 10.0 3 - - 3400 >10.5 20.5 2.10A 15 150±0.1 56.0 67.9 134.0 300 M 16 24 16.5 3 - - 9300 >17.0 37.0 6.40A 18 180±0.1 63.0 84.8 161.0 300 M 24 36 20.5 3 - - 15000 >21.0 50.0 10.5A 25 250±0.1 80.0 117.5 223.0 300 M 24 36 28.5 3 - - 30000 >29.0 90.0 25.9

Notes to dimensions:Size l is applicable for the consumption of the holding surfaces and eventual machining. Mounting of the magnetsthrough centred threaded hole at the backside. 70% of size C shall not be exceeded when a bigger threaded hole is required. The threaded depth is not limited. When more holes are made on a pitch circle, the depth of size H-0.5 shall not be exceeded. In both cases one should take care, that the threaded holes are completely filled by the bolts, otherwise the magnetic properties will be less.

173



Electro Magnetic Holding Beam SAV 241.32With high holding force

Electromagnetic Holding Beam SAV 241.32 - D 09Name SAV - No. - Type and Size

Type andSize

Dimensions in mm Polepitch

Nominalforcein N

Nominalpowerin W

Weightin kgA B C D E F G H I K L M N O

C 01 101.5 32 31 20 50 2 M 6 10 13.5 68.0 10 23.5 12 8.5 16 880 7.0 0.65C 02 151.5 32 31 20 50 3 M 6 10 13.5 118.0 10 23.5 12 8.5 16 1500 10.5 0.88C 03 201.5 32 31 20 50 4 M 6 10 13.5 168.0 10 23.5 12 8.5 16 2100 14.0 1.22C 04 401.5 32 31 20 50 8 M 6 10 13.5 368.0 10 23.5 12 8.5 16 4700 25.0 2.48C 05 501.5 32 31 20 50 10 M 6 10 13.5 468.0 10 23.5 12 8.5 16 6000 35.0 3.15C 06 601.5 32 31 20 50 12 M 6 10 13.5 568.0 10 23.5 12 8.5 16 7200 42.0 3.75D 07 151.5 60 49 30 75 2 M 8 12 15.0 93.5 12 36.5 18 10 30 2600 22.0 2.35D 08 201.5 60 49 35 120 2 M 8 12 15.0 143.5 12 36.5 18 10 30 3750 31.0 3.20D 09 501.5 60 49 35 140 4 M 8 12 15.0 443.5 12 36.5 18 10 30 10400 70.0 9.20

1) max. pole plate consumption

H

B

C

D

A

F x G E

2.51)

L

15

I

N

O

M K

Pg 7

Application:The apparatus type C is suitable for holding parts with straight surfaces, while Type D can be used for parts with rough or scaled surface. To reach the nominal holding force, the steel poles of the holding surface must be completely covered by the workpiece.

Design:The electro magnetic holding beams are direct current holding systems.The magnetic circuit is open in switched-on position and makes it possible to hold ferrous magnetic workpieces. For mounting the magnets are provided with threaded holes in the bottom of the housing.Electrical connection through 2 connection bolts, which are fitted in the housing of the magnet and have easy access. Further a stud is available for mounting of a steel wire as stress release. These studs can be screwed on the side or bottom. When working with electromagnetic holding beams, one should follow the appro-priate rules for the prevention of accidents.

Nominal voltage: 24 V DCProtection: Housing IP 53 according DIN 40 050 connection IP 00Isolation class: EDuty: 100 % ED

Notes to technical data:The nominal power values in the table aboveare intended to determine the correct electronicaccessories and are based on 20°C windingtemperature at nominal voltage (VDE 0580/10.70 § 9.1).During operation the power decreases,depending on theduty . The pole pitch as well as their influence on the operation is described in the technical notes. The maximum holding forces FH are given for St 37 and are based on a plate thickness of > 8 mm for Type C and >10 mm for Type D. The forces are foran airgap dL=0 and 100% coverage of clamping surface, 90% Nominal voltage and warmed condition (approx. 50 K over-temperature) without additional heat transfer.

If the application is based on other conditions, the holding force is reduced.Due to safety reasons and depending on the application a safety factoris to be taken into account.

174 Chapter 9




A B C MH 201 MH 201S 100 100 50 5‘ 1 face 100 x 100 3.6

2 faces 100 x 50 MH 202 MH 202S 100 50 50 5‘ 3 faces 100 x 50 1.7 MH 203 MH 203S 100 25 25 5‘ 2 faces 100 x 25 0.5 MH 204 - 100 25 25 5‘ 2 faces 100 x 25 0.5



For machining and shaping of small workpieces,such as punches etc. For clamping of thin components type MH 204 is recommended which has an extra fine pole pitch.

Features:Two or three magnetic clamping surfaces, pole pitch 4 mm, or 1.3 mm for type MH 204.Types MH 201S to MH 203S use SmCo5-magnets with extremely high holding forces for materials that are difficult to magnetize.

Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2 for MH201 to MH204180 N/cm2 for MH201-S to MH204-SField height: 6 mm

Pole plate wearing limit:14 mm for MH201 and MH202 6 mm for MH203 and MH204


With 3 magnetic clamping surfaces


Features:ON-OFF control with rotary switch.Three magnetic faces.

Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1 mm steel.



Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.02 - 55Name SAV - No. - A

With fine and extra fine pole pitch, non-switchable

Type MH 201

Type MH 202 to MH 204

A

A

CC

B

B

Dimensions in mm Weightin kgMagnetice faces

Max. angular

deviationType

A B C D P55 90.5 125.5 146 0.5+1 2.870 90.5 125.5 151 0.5+1 4.0


A

A

B

C

D

P

7.5

7

2

ON OFF

175Chapter 9




SAV 242.03Permanent Magnetic Switchable BlockWith 3 magnetic clamping surfaces

Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.03Name SAV - No.

Use: Angular and parallel grinding of workpieces.

Features: 3 magnetic clamping surfaces. Strong, switchable permanent magnet. The base of the magnet can be clamped on an existing magnetic chuck.


Magnetic field height: 12 mmPolepitch: 9 mm steel/2 mm brass/3mm steel/2 mm brassPole plate wearing limit: 6 mm

A BC

A B C230 100 100 20.0


SAV 242.07Permanent Magnetic BlockSwitchable

Use:In combination with magnetic chucks, for grinding workpieces with protruding features, narrow sides, positioning templates etc.

Features:Switchable permanent magnet with clamping face on the upper side. Side faces are ground square to one-another.

Permanent Magnetic Block SAV 242.07 - 135 x 50Name SAV - No. - A x B

A B

C

DF

E

Nominalholding force

in N

Weightin kgA B C D E F G

115 40 40 75 30 M5 7 105 1.3135 50 60 80 40 M6 10 400 2.9

Dimensions in mm

G

176 Chapter 9



Neodymium Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.05

Use: For workpieces that are particularly difficult to clamp, such as ferrotic and hard metals containing cobalt (carbides), as well as very small workpieces.

Features: Extremely high holding force due to a specially developed construction. Stable all-steel body.ON-OFF control on end face.Larger models - with optional power-operated switching mechanism - available on request. Laminations 4 mm steel and 2 mm brass with NdFeB magnets in the pole gaps.For wire EDM use type 242.12 (stainless steel).


Magnetic field height: ca. 10 mmPole plate wearing limit: 3 mm

Available with adaption for Zero-Reference-System

Neodymium Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.05 - ND 100Name SAV - No. - Type

With neodymium-iron-boron magnets, extremely high holding force

Clamping of multiple parts possible stability of pole plate ± 0.002 mm

see also SAV 242.12, chapter 8 for EDM

Dimensions in mm WeightType A B C+0,5 D E F G H in kg

ND 100 140 70 51.0 102 118 35 62 12 3.0ND 200 200 70 51.0 157 178 36 62 12 4.2

DP=6

EAF

GB

C

4 x M 6 x 9 deep

1 magnetische Spannfläche

H

177




Features:Robust, pressure resistant clamping blocks with integrated holding magnets, non-switchable. Suitable for fixing as a press fit or for glueing.Type MH2 has a tapped hole M6 on the back. Red textured paint finish. For use up to 100 °C.


With integrated holding magnets

A

C

B

A B CMH 1 26 26 25 100 0.11MH 2 60 26 25 200 0.25

Dimensions in mm Weightin kgType

Nom. holding force

in N


Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.11 - 140 - RFName SAV - No. - A - Execution

With 4 magnetic clamping surfaces, also in stainless execution

A B C D P140 115 64 64 2 + 2 3.1160 135 64 64 2 + 2 4.0


A

B

P

D

C

4 magnetic surfaces


Features: Robust construction with good holding force. Laminations 2 mm brass / 2 mm steel.

Nominal holding force standard: 50 N/cm2

Nominal holding force stainless: 30 N/cm2


Can be supplied with stainless, high-alloyed chrome steel pole plates (RF). Best suited for use on wire erosion machines.

Application with wire-erosion Application at spark-erosion


178 Chapter 9



SAV 243.15Permanent Magnetic BeamWith 2 magnetic faces

Use:As a clamping device for holding workpieces securely on spark erosion (EDM) machines and other machining applications, or as part of a fixture.

Features:Two clamping surfaces on opposite faces, individually switchable. Low magnetic field due to fine pole pitch. Supplied in pairs.

Planar parallelism: 0.02 mm Pole pitch: 1.3 mmMagnetic field height: 6 mmPole plate wearing limit: 6 mm

Permanent Magnetic Beam SAV 243.15 - 125Name SAV - No. - A

A B C D E F G H125 98 13.5 13.5 52 50 15 7 300 2.5180 153 13.5 13.5 52 50 15 11 400 3.6250 225 12.5 12.5 52 50 15 11 590 5.0


Nom. holding force

in N

work piece

magnetic beams

machine table

A

F

GG

BC D

E

2 magnetic clamping surfaces

179Chapter 9





Laminated Bars SAV 248.02

Use: Clamping of profiled workpieces on circular chucks with parallel pole arrangement. Only usable in conjunction with circular magnetic chuck SAV 244.02 and 244.05.

Features: Silver brazed steel/brass construction. Can be machined to any required shape, or custom machined during manufacture. Connection to magnet to be agreed upon.



Dimensions in mm

For use on circular chucks with parallel pole arrangement

For use on magnetic chucks with transverse pole arrangement

Use: To provide a suitable mounting surface for difficult workpieces. Only usable in conjunction with a magnetic chuck with a transverse pole arrangement. Suitable for SAV 243.11, 243.12, 243.40, 243.42, 243.70 and 243.73.

Features: The silver brazed pole plates can be machined to any desired shape.


Laminated Bar SAV 248.02 - 250 x 150Name SAV - No. - A x B

Custom sizes on request.

1

3

B

ØA

1

3

A

BC

A B155 25 4.0200 25 6.0250 25 10.0300 25 14.0350 25 19.0400 30 30.0450 30 37.5500 30 46.0

Weightin kg

Dimensions in mm

A B C250 150 25 7.5300 150 25 9.0400 150 25 12.0300 200 25 12.0400 200 25 16.0250 250 25 12.5400 250 25 19.5

Weightin kg

180 Chapter 9




SAV 248.03Laminated Bars

Use:In conjunction with magnetic chucks, to guide the magnetic field into the workpiece.Can be reduced in size and shaped as required.Suitable for SAV 243.11, 243.12, 243.42and 243.70

Features:Silver brazed steel-brass laminations.

Pole arrangement: 3 mm steel 1 mm brass

Laminated Bar SAV 248.03 - 400 x 100 x 40Name SAV - No. - A x B x C

With transverse pole arrangement

For use on magnetic chucks

Dimensions in mm

A B C250 75 25 3.8500 75 25 7.5250 100 25 5.0500 100 25 10.0400 75 25 6.0250 75 40 6.0500 75 40 12.0200 100 40 6.4400 100 40 12.8500 100 40 16.0

Weightin kg

With longitudinal pole arrangement

Dimensions in mm

A B C320 75 25 4.8650 75 25 9.8320 100 40 10.1650 100 40 20.5

Weightin kg

B

C

1

3

A

Application Laminated Adapter Plates – Accessories for Circular Magnets

Adapter plates

Flanges(see also chapter 1)(see also chapter 1)

Permanent circular magnetswith built-on flange as well as adapter pole plates

181Chapter 9





Laminated Circular Top Plate SAV 248.06

Features: Can be machined to any required shape, or custom machined during manufacture. The maximum machined depth shall not exceed 12 mm.Suitable for SAV 244.06.

Machinable depth: max. 12 mm


Larger sizes available on request


Features: Can be machined to any required shape, or custom machined during manufacture. The maximum machined depth must not exceed 12 mm.Suitable for SAV 244.08.

For use on circular chuck with radial poles


B

ØA

Dimensions in mm

A B150 20 10 3.0200 20 12 5.0250 20 16 8.0300 25 16 14.0350 25 20 19.0400 25 20 24.5

Weightin kg

Number of poles

Dimensions in mm

A B150 20 2.8180 20 4.0200 20 4.9250 20 7.7300 20 11.1350 20 15.1400 25 24.7450 25 31.3500 25 38.6600 25 55.6

Weightin kg

B

ØA

182 Chapter 9




SAV 248.60Laminated Block

Laminated Blocks (Set) SAV 248.61

Use:In conjunction with magnetic chucks for machining of irregularly shaped workpieces. Can be machined to any required shape.

Features:Longitudinal and transverse pole arrangement, as well as prisms.

Pole arrangement: 3 mm steel 1 mm brass

Laminated Block SAV 248.60 - 75 x 60 x 30 - L - EName SAV No. - A x B x C - Pole arrangement - Execution

Custom sizes on request.

Use:In conjunction with magnetic chucks for machining of irregularly shaped workpieces. Can be machined to any required shape.

Features:Longitudinal and transverse pole arrangement, as well as prisms.

Pole arrangement: 3 mm steel 1 mm brassTotal weight: 7.6 kg

Laminated Block Set SAV 248.61Name SAV - No.

For use on magnetic chucks

In storage case

A B

C

A B

C

Dimensions in mm

A B C65 60 40 trans. pole (Q) prism (P) 0.872 45 22 trans. pole (Q) flat (E) 0.575 60 30 long. pole (L) flat (E) 0.780 60 30 trans. pole (Q) flat (E) 0.780 80 50 trans. pole (Q) flat (E) 2.590 62 33 long. pole (L) flat (E) 0.8

100 50 40 long. pole (L) flat (E) 1.7100 50 40 long. pole (L) prism (P) 1.0100 70 41 trans. pole (Q) flat (E) 2.1100 70 48 long. pole (L) flat (E) 2.7120 80 50 trans. pole (Q) flat (E) 3.8

Weightin kg

Pole arrangement Execution

Dimensions in mm

A B C56 32 15 trans. pole 2 x96 57 26 trans. pole 2 x 96 53 22 long. pole 2 x56 68 47 with prism 2 x

QuantityDesign



Permanent magnetic V-blocks, clamping blocks Remarks SAV-No. PagePermanent magnetic V-block with 4 magnetic surfaces 242.21 184Permanent magnetic V-block singe or in pairs 242.22 184Permanent magnetic V-block in completely sealed execution 242.24 185Permanent magnetic V-block singe or in pairs, hardened execution 242.25 185Permanent magnetic V-block small version 242.28 186Permanent magnetic V-block in sealed execution, pair 242.29 186Permanent magnetic V-block with powerful cross prisms 242.31 187Permanent magnetic V-block small size, non-switchable 242.33 187

Magnetic separators, wrist magnetMagnetic separator for separation of steel parts 512.03 192Wrist magnet for separation of thin steel plates 532.11 192

Magnetic stands, magnetic bases, dial gaugeMagnetic stand, with hydraulic clamping for dial gauges, non-switchable 482.01 188Magnetic stand, with hydraulic clamping with fine adjustment for measuring 482.03 188Magnetic stand, with mechanical clamping with fine adjustment for measuring 482.40 189Magnetic stand, with mechanical clamping with fine adjustment for measuring 482.41 189Universal magnetic stand precision construction 482.42 190Magnetic stand, with flexible column for measuring 482.43 190Magnetic stand for measuring 482.45 191Permanent magnetic bases switchable 482.70 191Dial gauge for use with magnetic stand 482.92 192

184 Chapter 10




Features:4 magnetic surfaces (top, bottom and two sides). ON/ OFF switch for top and bottom faces. Completely sealed.Available in wooden storage caseSAV 539.02-HK2 against price adder.

Available single (S)or in pairs (P)

Planar parallelism: < 0.01 mm

SAV 242.21Permanent Magnetic "V"-Block

Permanent Magnetic „V“ Block SAV 242.21 - 125Name SAV - No. - Length

With 4 magnetic surfaces

80 60 73 38 30 2.0125 60 73 38 45 3.3


Nom. hold. force

in daNWidth of

large blockHightWidthLength

Permanent Magnetic "V"-Block

Features:2 magnetic contact surfaces (large "V"-block and opposite face), which are switched on and off simultaneously. Available single (S) or in pairs (P). Available in wooden storage case SAV 539.02 (for S) and SAV 539.04 (for P) against price adder.

Rectangularity: 0.004 mmPlanar parallelism: 0.004 mm

SAV 242.22

Permanent Magnetic „V“ Block SAV 242.22 - 100 - SName SAV - No. - Length - Single or pair

Single or in pairs

80 67 96 6 - 66 40 90 2.9100 70 96 6 - 70 40 120 3.8


Nom. hold. force to surface

in daNHeightWidthLengthWorkpiece diameter

Nom hold. force in „V“

in daN

SAV 242.21

185Chapter 10




Features:3 magnetic faces, which are switched on and off simultaneously (large "V"-block, opposite face, front face). Completely sealed. Available in wooden storage case SAV 539.03 against price adder.

Rectangularity: 0.01 / 100 mmPlanar Parallelism: 0.01 / 100 mm


Permanent Magnetic „V“ Block SAV 242.24 - 180 Name SAV - No. - Length

In completely sealed execution

180 75 105 50 6 - 70 100 130 9.0


Nom. hold. force to surface in daNHeightWidthLength

Workpiece diameter

Nom hold. force in „V“

in daNWidth of

block

Permanent Magnetic "V"-Block SAV 242.25

Features:2 magnetic faces, which are switched on and off simultaneously (main and small prisms). Hardened contact surfaces and „V“-s.Available in single (S) or in pairs (P). Available in wooden storage case SAV 539.04 against price adder.


Permanent Magnetic „V“ Block SAV 242.25 - 80 Name SAV - No. - Length

Single or in pairs, hardened execution

80 67 96 6 - 66 2.8100 70 96 6 - 70 3.8

Dimensions in mm Weightin kgHeightWidthLength

Workpiece diameter

186 Chapter 10




Features:2 magnetic faces (large "V"-block and opposite face), which are switched on and off simultaneously (main and small prisms). Available single (S) or in pairs (P). Available in wooden storage case SAV 539.02 against price adder.

Planar parallelism: 0.008 mmV-angle: 108°


Permanent Magnetic „V“ Block SAV 242.28 - SName SAV - No. - Single or pair

Small version

70 45 65 6 - 35 60 1.35


Nom. holding force

in daNHeightWidthLengthWorkpiece diameter


Features:3 magnetic faces ("V"-block and two side faces). With two opposite switch positions, including separate key. Strong switchable permanent magnetic block. Ground together and supplied as a pair. Fully sealed.

Available in wooden storage case against price adder.

Permanent Magnetic „V“ Block SAV 242.29 - 100Name SAV - No. - Length

In sealed execution, pair

70 40 50 36 50 15 1.0 539.01100 50 80 60 80 20 3.0 539.02150 50 100 90 125 23 5.0 539.05


Wooden storage case

SAV No.HeightWidthLengthWorkpiece diameter

Nom. holding force

in daNWidth of

block

187Chapter 10




Features:4 magnetic faces (top, bottom and 2 side faces). With two opposite switch positions, inclusive separate key. Switchable permanent magnet with strong holding force. Prism on upper surface. Available in wooden storage caseSAV 539.04 against price adder.

Rectangularity: 0.025 mmPlanar parallelism: 0.015 / 100 mm

Permanent Magnetic Clamping Block SAV 242.31 - 180Name SAV - No. - Length

SAV 242.31Permanent Magnetic Clamping BlockWith powerful cross prisms


Features:2 magnetic faces. Available single (S) or in pairs (P).


Permanent Magnetic „V“-Block SAV 242.33 - 50 - SName SAV - No. - Length - Single or pair

Small size, non-switchable

30 30 30 6 - 30 0.240 40 40 6 - 40 0.550 50 50 6 - 50 1.0


Workpiecediameter in mm

80 80 80 20 30 10 - 28 3.1125 125 125 35 100 10 - 42 11.9180 180 180 55 200 10 - 52 41.0


Nom. hold. force on surface

in daN

Nom. hold.force in „V“

in daNWorkpiece diameter

188 Chapter 10




SAV 482.01Magnetic Stand – with hydraulic clamping

Magnetic Stand – with hydraulic clamping SAV 482.03

Use:For use on measuring tables, on fixings and on machines. Especially suitable for use in positions with restricted access, in particular on slant mounting surfaces and low-positioned measuring positions.

Features:High rigidity through hydraulic clamping. All joints are clamped simultaneously by means of a central knob. When the clamp is released, the stand does not collapsesuddenly, which could cause damage to the gauge,but can be moved as required, into a new position.This movement can be set from easy to stiff. The stand offers great flexibility of positioning, each joint having complete freedom of movement. Every measuring position within the working range of 150 mm can quickly and easily be attained. Suitable for 8 mm stem dial gauges.With the fine adjustment on the magnetic base, dial gauges can be positioned within 0,01 mm.The base is fitted with a powerful clamping magnet. Due to the double casing, the magnetic force is effective towards the bottom only. Supplied with protective plate.

Magnetic Stand SAV 482.01Name SAV - No.

Use:For measuring and testing on machines and specialequipment.

Features:Robust construction with long life. High rigidity through hydraulic clamping. Two ball joints and one central joint provide movement in every direction. Clamping by means of a clamping bolt with star grip. With switchable magnetic base.

Magnetic Stand SAV 482.03 - 400Name SAV - No. - Reach

For dial gauges, non switchable

With fine adjustment for measuring

Dimensions in mm Weightin kgBase

diameter

35 30 150 0.45

Base height

Over-hang

Dimensions in mmWeightin kgReach

260 310 60 50 55 1.5400 480 75 50 55 3.0

Overall height

Magnetic base width

Magnetic base height

Magnetic base depth

189Chapter 10




SAV 482.40Magnetic Stand – with mechanical clamping

Magnetic Stand – with mechanical clamping SAV 482.41

Use:For measuring and testing on machines and special equipment.

Features:Robust construction with long life. High rigidity through mechanical clamping. Clamping by means of a clamping bolt with star grip.With switchable magnetic base.



Features:Robust and versatile measuring stand with fine adjustment and switchable magnetic base with "V".Suitable for measuring tool with 6 or 8 mm stem.

Magnetic Stand SAV 482.41 - 280Name SAV - No. - Overall height



Dimensions in mmWeightin kgReach

340 255 60 50 55 1.5

Overall height

Magnetic base width


Magnetic base depth

Dimensions in mmWeightin kg

240 58 50 55 12/10 180 1.5280 73 50 55 16/14 225 2.3

Overall height

Magnetic base width


Magnetic base depth

Column diameter

Column length

8 mm

190 Chapter 10




SAV 482.42Universal Magnetic Stand

Magnetic Stand – with flexible column SAV 482.43


Features:Finest precision design with switchable magneticbase. Fixed magnetic clamping force. "V" in the base makes this stand suitable for all flat and cylindrical surfaces. The strong column and the cross beam are both chrome-plated. The cross beam is equipped with a fine adjuster with an 8 mm H7 fitting and a dovetail fitting.

Universal Magnetic Stand SAV 482.42 - 500Name SAV - No. - Overall height

Use:For general purpose measuring in any position.

Features:High magnetic clamping force. ON/OFF switching by means of rotary switch.


Precision construction

For measuring

Dimensions in mmOverall height

315 58 50 55 1.5

Magnetic base width


Magnetic base depth

Weightin kg

Dimensions in mm

285 180 70 46 65 16 16 8 M 10 60 1.30 2.33500 180 75 60 80 20 16 8 M 12 80 2.70 5.00

Overall height

Magnetic base width


Magnetic base depth

Column diameter

Cross beam diameterExtension

Dial gauge clamp (H7)

Connection thread

Weightof basein kg

Weightof stand

in kg

Holdingforcein N

191Chapter 10




SAV 482.45Magnetic Stand

Permanent Magnetic Base SAV 482.70

Use:For measuring and testing on machines and equipment.

Features:Robust construction with high magnetic clamping force. Magnet is turned on and off by means of a rotary switch. "V" in base for clamping on cylindrical surfaces.

Magnetic Stand SAV 482.45 Name SAV - No.

Use:For supports, truing device, dial gauge stands etc.

Features:Permanent magnet with ON/OFF switching. 2 magnetic surfaces and a "V" groove.(SAV 482.70 - M 10 x 117 without "V" groove.)

Permanent Magnetic Base SAV 482.70 - M 10 x 117Name SAV - No. - Thread x Length

For measuring

Switchable

Dimensions in mmWeightin kgOverall

height

305 20 80 55 80 M 12 3.2

Magnetic base width


Magnetic base depth

Column diameter Thread

Thread

M 8 58 50 55 20 1.0M 8 73 50 55 30 1.3M 10 73 50 55 30 1.3M 8 120 60 52 50 2.5M 10 117 60 55 40 2.0

Width

Nom. clam-ping force in daNHeightLength

Weightin kg

Dimensions in mm

192 Chapter 10



SAV 482.92Dial Gauge

Dial Gauge SAV 482.92Name SAV - No.

Use:High precision measuring device for height and runout measurements.

Features:Shock protected, operationally robust dial gauge with 1 indicator revolution = 0.1 mm. The 100 line scale permits easier reading.

For use with magnetic stand; with shock protection



Magnetic Capturing Rod SAV 512.03

Use:Permanent magnetic capturing rod with NdFeB as magnetic material for capturing steel parts.The captured parts can easily be loosened by pulling back the grip.

Design:Stable brass tube design, brightly nickelized.

Maximum operating temperature: 100°C

For sorting steel parts

Magnetic Capturing Rod SAV 512.03Name SAV - No.

Dimensions in mm WeightTube

diameterCentre flange

diameterOveralllength

Effectivemagnetic length

in kg

28 47 440 90 0.75

SAV 532.11

Use:For depiling and lifting of sheets up to 2mm thickness. For carrying on the right or left inner flat of the hand. Can also be put on the outer flat of the hand for holding of srews or similar small parts.

Design:The permanent magnetic system, which is kept in a stable pressure casing, guarantees high holding forces. Spare belts are available on request.

For separating sheets

Hand Plate Lifter with belt SAV 532.11Name SAV - No.

Dimensions in mm Nom. Holding Weight

Length Width Height forcein daN*

in kg

64 37 14 20 0.1

5643.5

64

143

20 34 37

Hand Plate Lifter – with belt

Dial diameter

58 0.001 5 100

Measuring range

No. of scale linesScale

resolution

Dimensions in mm

*measured at vertical pull-off



Pot-, button-, strong and bar magnets

Pot magnet with inner thread 240.11 208

Flat pot magnet through hole with counter bore 240.12 208

Button magnet with through hole 240.13 209

Strong magnet with through hole 241.14 209

Pot magnet with releasing bolt 240.15 210

Bar magnets square and round 241.06 210

Holding magnets Remarks SAV-No. Page

Holding magnets technical information – 194-199

Holding magnet, hard ferrite through hole with counter bore 240.01 200

Holding magnet, hard ferrite bushing with inner thread 240.02 200

Holding magnet, hard ferrite without threaded bush 240.03 201

Holding magnet, hard ferrite with threaded bush 240.08 201

Holding magnet, hard ferrite with spherical holding surface 240.20 202

Holding magnet, hard ferrite with pressing notches 240.21 202

Holding magnet, hard ferrite with spherical holding surface / pressing notches 240.22 203

Holding magnet, hard ferrite with inner thread 240.23 203

Holding magnet, hard ferrite with 2 or 3 threaded bushings 240.24 204

Holding magnet, hard ferrite with spherical holding surface / threaded bush 240.25 204

Holding magnet, hard ferrite through hole with counter bore 240.27 205

Holding magnet, hard ferrite with plastic cover / inside thread 240.30 205

Holding magnet, hard ferrite with plastic cover / inside thread 240.31 205

Holding magnet, AlNiCo with inner thread 240.04 206

Holding magnet, AlNiCo with bushing 240.05 206

Holding magnet, AlNiCo smooth, without fitting tolerance 240.06 207

Holding magnet, AlNiCo smooth, with fitting tolerance 240.07 207

Holding magnets

Holding magnet, SmCo5 also with fitting tolerance 240.09 211

Holding magnet, SmCo5 smooth, without bushing 240.10 211

Holding magnet, SmCo5 through hole with counter bore 240.34 212

Holding magnet, SmCo5 bushing with inner thread 240.35 212

Holding magnet, NdFeB with inner thread, also in stainless execution 240.14 213

Holding magnet, NdFeB with smooth bushing 240.16 213

Holding magnet, NdFeB high energy magnets, also in stainless execution 240.17 214

Holding magnet, NdFeB also with fitting tolerance 240.19 214

Holding magnet, NdFeB smooth, without bushing 240.18 215

Holding magnet, NdFeB with threaded bush 240.33 215

Holding magnet, NdFeB bushing with inner thread 240.36 216

Holding magnet, NdFeB bushing, anisotropic, with bore and recess, inner thread 240.38 216


Organizing MagnetsWith personal print

So that you stay focussed...The holding magnets consist of powerful magnet bodies in nicely-shaped plastic or steel covers. The plasticcovers are partly free for printing of logo´s or other lay-out according your wishes.In the following chapter you will certainly find the right execution; even or with eye, hook, threads or simply flat with your logo or personal print.

So that your advertisement is always visible...With our organizing magnets your company will beremembered everywhere.The application of these magnets is versatile and attractive; attach drawings, plates and plans quickly and secure in offices, factories, social areas, etc.

Many possibilities...SAV can provide printed or formed surfaces according your personal design. Attractive packaging shapes and sizes are possible.


CHAPTER 11

Magnetic cores Remarks SAV-No. Page

Magnetic core, hard ferrite from ”Oxid 300” 240.40 217

Magnetic core, AlNiCo 500 machining through grinding 240.45 218

Magnetic core, AlNiCo 500 in lengths to choice 240.46 218

Magnetic core , SmCo5 with high nominal holding force 240.50 219

Magnetic core, Nd2Fe14B high energy magnet 240.55 220

Magnetic core with extreme high nominal holding force 240.56 221

Permanent magnets, magnetic tape

Flexible permanent magnets light machining possible 240.70 225

Magnetic tape can be cut with scissors 240.71 226

Magnetic tape self-adhesive 240.72 227

Organizing magnets

Organizing magnets in plastic housing 240.80 227

Organizing magnets in steel housing 240.83 228

Organizing magnets with steel cover 240.84 228

Organizing magnets in plastic cover 240.85 229

Organizing magnets printable 240.88 229

Organizing magnets printable 240.89 230

Organizing magnets with personal print 240.90 230

Holding magnets, magnetic ball-joints, holding plates

Magnetic holding plates from ”Oxid”-Ceramic 240.60 222

Magnetic ball-joint permanent magnetic 240.36-KG 10 223

Holding magnet with plastic cover clamping on sensitive surfaces 240.41 224

Rubber covers for holding magnets for scratch-sensitive surfaces 240.39 225

Page 193 - 230


Holding Magnets

Magnetic effect of iron polesIron poles can cause a high density of lines of force in a magnetic circuit. This leads to a considerablyimproved adhesive effect as the magnetic flux is guided around the corner and is concentrated on the holding surface. An approximate multiplying factor for the holdingforces is given in the depicted arrangements below.

Influences of installation and use on the magnetic holding forces.

a) Open magnetic core as disc or rod withoutinfluence from the ironpoles:Factor 1

b) With iron return plate:Factor 1.3

c) With iron return plate and centre pole:Factor 4.5

d) Magnetic disc in ironpot (adhesive magneticdisc):Factor 6

e) Magnetic ring in iron pot with additional centre pole:Factor 7

f) Magnetic rod made of AINiCo in iron sleeve (pot magnets):Factor 7.5

g) Magnetic plate in U-profile made of iron:Faktor 5.5

h) Sandwich-arrangementconsisting of a magneticplate between 2 flat ironpoles:Factor 18

i) Parallel connection of several sandwich-arrangements Factor 18 x quantity

Multi-pole magnetization:Thin iron sheets with good adhesion require a highdensity of lines of force just barely over the upper surface of the magnet, and this can be attained by multi-pole magnetization.

Holding force upper surface qualityThe percentage correspondswith the remaining holdingforce when there are various different qualities of upper surface.

20% 40% 50% 70% 90%

0.20 0.15 0.10 0.020.05

Material dependence of the adhesive forceLow rate of ferromagnetic material - eg. iron - leads to lower adhesive forces.

techn. pure iron 1.00

St 37 0.94

St 34 0.82

GS and St 50 0.75

St 70 0.7

GT 0.6

16MnCr5 0.5

GG 0.3

Dependence of surface to theholding forces

100% 20-30% 30-40%

Installation of magnetic coresA “magnetic short circuit arises when both magnetic poles are connected through iron. Therefore connections should be made of nonmagnetizeable materials, like e.g. brass or stainless steel.

SN

SN

N

S

NS

N NS S

NS

NS

NS

N

S

NS

SS

N NS

Magnetic effect of a return platea far-reaching, concentric magnetic field is produced when there is an opposite pole arrangement of two holding magnets on a returnplate just as it would benecessary for collectingmagnets

NS

installed in non- magnetizeablematerials(brass,V2A, aluminium)

Installed in iron,St, magneticshort circult

N

S

N

S


Holding MagnetsAdvice for use and methods of magnetization.

The following points should be observed when using holding magnets:Strong attractive forces, especially with high-energy magnets can lead to finger contusions if used improperly.

Wearers of pace-makers must avoid strong magnetic fields at all costs!

When using measuring equipment and mechanical gauges, the influential or disturbing effect of the magnetic field should be monitored, Keep a safe distance!

Because of the strong attractive forces sparks can arise during operation; if they occur in an area in danger of explosion, they may ignite.

Radioactive rays and high temperatures reduces themagnetization in the long run.

The hard, brittle, sintered magnets could shatter into many sharp pieces if met with sudden impact.

In order to guarantee a temporal continuous adhesive force, when using AINiCo-magnets, care must be taken that they are not exposed to large impacts, and they do not have to bridge air gaps for a longer period of time without an anchor, or workpiece.

During chip removal machining of all high-energy magnets made of rare earths and plastic bound magnets, the self-igniting danger of the dry grid or the chips is to be monitored. Therefore the machining should be done wet.

Small hairline cracks or chips on sintered magnets are production limited and have no influence on the magnetic qualities.

There are no known damaging etfects on the human body caused by magnetic fields, as they arise from permanent magnets

It is not possible, to indicate the holding force of an “open” permanent magnet.

Magnetization possibilities of permanent magnets:

S N

completely magnetized in the height

diametralS

N

S

N

axial

N SN S

S N

axialsector sized magnetized eg. 6-pole

radial* multi-pole lateral*on the perimetereg. 4-pole

N

N N

S

N

S

sector sized*lateral on a surface.eg. 6-pole

S

NN

N

S

NN

S NS N

S

NN

N

S

N

strip sized lateral on a surfaceP =pole pitch

N

NN

NN

N

N

NN N

The types of magnetization marked with * are only possible with isotropic magnetic materials.

N

N

N

N

NS

SS

S

S

SP

SS

S


Holding MagnetsTechnical terrns and physical parameters of permanent magnetic materials

Technical explanations and terms from the magnet technology:

The maximum energy product (B x H)max is the qualityvalue. The bigger the energy product, the more energyis stored in the magnetic material. It results trom thelargest possible flux density B and field strength Hon the demagnetizing characteristic curve.

The remanence Br is given in Tesla (T) or Millitesla (mT) or - in the cgs-system - in Gauss (G) . The remanence isthe remaining magnetization in a magnet that bas beenmagnetized to saturation, or it is the flux density in a closed magnetic circuit.

The coersive force is the necessary retarding field strength in kA/m or Oersted (Oe), in order to demagnetizea magnet again. The higher the value, the better thedemagnetization durability. One differentiates between BHC and JHC x BHC stands for the coersive force under a feeded retarding field (B) and JHC stands for thecoersive force during which the demagnetization of the magnet also maintains even when the retarding field has been turned off (polarization J -> magnetization M). The coersive force JHC is important for magnets, that have strong coersive forces in relation to remanence.

The permeability µ in Vs/Am is is the “magnetic conductivity”.At almost all magnetic materials, the permeability is onlya little bit higher than at air, whereas at iron it is a thousandtimes moreso. The permeability is composed by twocomponents, one which is conditioned by the magneticfield strength and another which results from themagnetization of the material.

The temperature coefficient TKBR of the remanence in 1/K gives the reversible decrease of the remanence – assumingthe room temperature is 20°C - per 1K temperatureincrease.

The maximum temperature during use tmax (°C) is only an approximate value, as there is dependency on thedimensioning of the magnet (length / diameter-ratio L/D). The given value is only reached, when the product of B and H reaches a maximum (see magnet dimensioning).

If the Curie temperature tcurie in °C is reached, every magneticmaterial loses its holding force irreversibly and must be newly magnetized.

The density p or the specific weight is given in g/cm3.

Physical parameters of permanent magnetic materials:

Magnetic Energyproduct (B x H) max

Remanence

Br

mT G

Coersive force (T = 20 °C) Relativeremanent

permeability

Temperaturecoefficent ofremanence

TKBr1/K

Max. temperatureduring use

t max°C

Curie-tempe-raturet Curie°C

Density

p g/cm3

materialBHC

kA/m Oe

JHC

kA/m OekJ/m3 MGOe

Betaflex (BaFe) plastic bondedanisotropic

12 1.5 245 2450 175 2200 207 2600 1.40 - 0.20 %- 40+ 85

450 3.7

Hard Ferrite (SrFe)

27 - 3.4 - 380 - 3800 - 230 - 2891 - 235 - 2954 - 1.45 -- 0.20 % ca. 200 450 5.0

32 4.0 400 4000 275 3457 290 3645 1.65

AlNiCo 500fine casting

35 4.4 1120 11200 47 590 48 603 23.80 - 0.02 % 450 860 7.4

Samarium-Cobaltplastic bonded

56 - 7.0 - 550 - 5500 - 360 - 4500 - 6007500

1.05 -- 0.04 % 80 725 5.1

64 8.0 590 5900 416 5900 1.10

Neodymium-Iron Boron plastic bonded

80 - 10.0 - 700 - 7000 - 416 - 5230 - 640 - 8045 -~ 1.70

- 0.10 %120 310 ~ 6.0

96 12.0 800 8000 - 480 6033 880 11060 (25-90°)

Samarium-CobaltSmCo5

143 - 18.0 -850 8500 620 7800 1193 15000 1.37

- 0.04 %ca. 250 725 8.2

159 20.0 (20-100°)

Samarium-CobaltSmCo17

159 - 20.0 -900 9000 636 8000 1193 15000 1.42

0.03 %ca. 300

750 -8.2

175 22.0 (20-100°) 800

Neodymium-Iron BoronNdFeB

223 - 28.0 - 1080 - 10800 - 780- 9800 ->1350 >1600

1.33 -- 0.10 %

100 -310 7.4

239 30.0 1120 11200 836 10500 1.38 120

µTkAm


Design guidelines for permanent magnetic systems

Magnet dimensioning with help of the demagnetizing characteristic curve

Magnets can not be randomly constructed or established like other design parts. The dimensioning of pole surface to length in magnetization direction must correspond with their magnetic values.

If one connects this new-found operating point horizontally with the B-axis and vertically with the H axis, one can read the remanence and coersive force.

If B and H have the largest possible value, the operating point is in (B x H) maximum value.

When using an ”open” magnet, which is used without an iron return plate, the dimensioning should be chosen so that the operating point is near the (BxH) maximum value.

If there is an iron return plate situated behind the magnet,the Iength L in the L/D-ratio can be doubled for an approximate value estimation. That requires that the thickness of the iron return plate is so designed, that no magnetic saturation takes place.

With quadratic, or almost quadratic magnetic pole surfaces,the pole surface can be equated with the following formula.

D = A x B x 4 π

The following curves for the various magnetic materials are simplified and portrayed without temperature characteristics. A temperature change causes a shift of the operating point on the characteristic curve. As long as the operating point stays in the linear area of the demagnetizing characteristic curve, the remanence changes reversibly, that means, after the cooling the original value returns. Otherwise, the change is irreversible and can only be undone by new magnetizing. See temperature line T1 in figure 1.

The highest magnetic energy is then available when the product of remanence Band field strength H reaches a maximum. That is the case, when the biggest possible rectangle forms itself under the demagnetizing characteristic curve of B to H (see figure 1).

The following diagram has a scale at the side for the relationship between Iength and diameter of a magnet (L/D-ratio).

When using a magnetic disc of ø10 mm diameter and 5 mm thickness the L/D-ratio is 5 : 10 = 0.5. If one draws a line from the 0.5 mark to the zero, the point of intersection on the characteristic curve of the corresponding magnet is the operating point (BxH) of this magnetic disc.

√

Fig. 2

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.25

0.30

0.400.50

0.600.70

0.800.90

1.01.21.5 2.03.0 4.0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.9

1.0

0.8

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4Flux densityB in Tesla [T](0.1 T=1000 G)

demagnetizing field H in kA /m (1 kA /m = 12.56 OE)

800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 00

L /D-ra

tio

NdFeB

SmCo

SmCo, plas

tic bonded

Oxid 300

Type M

F 10

AlNiCo 500

Fig. 1

L / D-ra

tio

B x H operating point

B

Br

Ba

0HaBHCH T1

Remanence B

field strength

Holding Magnets

200 Chapter 11




Holding Magnet – hard ferrite SAV 240.01

Design:Protected system, Surface galvanized.Max. application temperature: 200 °C

Magnetic material: Hard ferrite (Oxid 380)

Mounting possibility:Screws from the holding surface.The screws must be non-magnetic material.

Note:Also available in stainless steel execution(f.e. SAV 240.01-MH1-40-RF)

Through hole with counter bore

Holding Magnet SAV 240.01 - MH 1 - 40 - RFName SAV - No. - Type - stainless steel execution

TypeDimensions in mm Counter

sink

Nom. force in N

Weightin kg

RFNom.force in N

RFWeightin kgA ± 0.2 B ± 0.2 C D E

MH 1 - 16 16 4.5 3.3 7.0 1.6 90° 14 0.004 - -MH 1 - 20 20 6.0 4.2 9.0 2.1 90° 27 0.009 - -MH 1 - 25 25 7.0 5.5 11.0 2.5 90° 36 0.016 29 0.0165MH 1 - 32 32 7.0 5.5 11.0 2.5 90° 72 0.027 58 0.0270MH 1 - 40 40 8.0 5.5 11.0 2.5 90° 90 0.052 72 0.0530MH 1 - 50 50 10.0 8.5 22.0 - - 180 0.085 145 0.0850MH 1 - 63 63 14.0 6.5 24.0 - - 290 0.195 230 0.1950MH 1 - 80 80 18.0 6.5 11.5 - - 540 0.458 - -MH 1 - 83 83 18.0 10.5 32.0 - - 600 0.444 - -MH 1 - 100 100 22.0 10.5 34.0 - - 680 0.815 - -

ø A

ø C

ø D

90°

E

B

ø Aø C

ø DB

3


Design:Flat holding magnet with threaded bush.Protected system, Surface galvanised.Max. application temperature: 200 °C

Note:Also available in stainless steel execution(f.e. SAV 240.02-MH2-09-RF)

Bushing with inner thread


TypeDimensions in mm Nom.

force in N

Weightin kg

RFNom.force in N

RFCA ± 0.2 B ± 0.2 C D ± 0.2 E ± 0.2 F ± 0.2

MH 2 - 01 10 4.5 M 3 6 11.5 7 4 0.003 - -MH 2 - 02 13 4.5 M 3 6 11.5 7 10 0.004 - -MH 2 - 03 16 4.5 M 3 6 11.5 7 18 0.006 - -MH 2 - 04 20 6.0 M 3 6 13.0 7 30 0.011 - -MH 2 - 05 25 7.0 M 4 8 15.0 8 40 0.020 32 M 5MH 2 - 06 32 7.0 M 4 8 15.0 8 80 0.031 64 M 5MH 2 - 36 36 7.7 M 4 8 16.0 8 100 0.042 - -MH 2 - 07 40 8.0 M 5 10 18.0 10 125 0.059 100 M 5MH 2 - 47 47 9.0 M 4 8 17.0 8 180 0.086 - -MH 2 - 08 50 10.0 M 6 12 22.0 12 220 0.110 175 M 5MH 2 - 57 57 10.5 M 4 8 18.5 8 280 0.147 - -MH 2 - 09 63 14.0 M 8 15 30.0 16 350 0.245 280 M 5MH 2 - 10 80 18.0 M 10 20 34.0 16 600 0.499 - -MH 2 - 11 100 22.0 M 12 22 43.0 21 900 0.956 - -MH 2 - 12 125 26.0 M 14 25 50.0 20 1300 1.720 - -

ø A

ø C

F

ø D

B

E

RF

Magnetic material:Hard ferrite (Oxid 380)

Mounting possibility:Screw

201Chapter 11





Design:Flat holding magnet without threaded bush.Protected system, Surface galvanized.Max. application temperature: 200 °CMounting possibility:Press, glueMagnetic material:Hard ferrite (Oxid 380)


Note:For all flat holding magnets, including Type MH 3 applies, that hair-cracks at the holding surface of the inserted magnetic material and a centre offset are technically not avoidable. This has no influence on the functionality.

TypeDimensions in mm Holding

forcein N

Weightin kg

RFHolding

force in NA ± 0.2 B ± 0.2

MH 3 - 01 10 4.5 4 0.002 3MH 3 - 02 13 4.5 10 0.003 8MH 3 - 03 16 4.5 20 0.005 16MH 3 - 04 20 6.0 30 0.010 24MH 3 - 05 25 7.0 40 0.018 32MH 3 - 06 32 7.0 80 0.029 64MH 3 - 07 40 8.0 110 0.055 88MH 3 - 08 50 10.0 200 0.100 160MH 3 - 09 63 14.0 320 0.230 256MH 3 - 10 80 18.0 600 0.468 480MH 3 - 11 100 22.0 900 0.915 720MH 3 - 12 125 26.0 1300 1.680 1040MH 3 - 36 36 7.7 100 0.040 80MH 3 - 47 47 9.0 180 0.084 144MH 3 - 57 57 10.5 280 0.140 224

ø A

Holding surface

B

ø A

B


Design:Flat holding magnet with threaded bush,surface galvanized.

Protected system.

Max. application temperature: 200 °C

With threaded bush

Holding Magnet SAV 240.08 - MH 8 - 32 - 1Name SAV - No. - Type

TypeDimensions in mm Holdig

force in N

Weightin kgA± 0.2 B± 0.2 C D

MH 8 - 10 10 4.5 M 3 11.5 4 0.002MH 8 - 13 13 4.5 M 3 11.5 10 0.003MH 8 - 16 - 1 16 4.5 M 3 11.5 18 0.005MH 8 - 16 - 2 16 4.5 M 4 11.5 18 0.005MH 8 - 20 - 1 20 6.0 M 3 12.0 30 0.010MH 8 - 20 - 2 20 6.0 M 6 36.0 30 0.015MH 8 - 25 - 1 25 7.0 M 4 15.0 40 0.019MH 8 - 25 - 2 25 7.0 M 5 22.0 40 0.020MH 8 - 25 - 3 25 7.0 M 6 27.0 40 0.022MH 8 - 32 - 1 32 7.0 M 4 15.0 80 0.030MH 8 - 32 - 3 32 7.0 M 6 19.0 80 0.031MH 8 - 32 - 4 32 7.0 M 8 17.0 80 0.032MH 8 - 47 47 9.0 M 6 17.0 180 0.085MH 8 - 57 - 2 57 10.5 M 6 18.5 280 0.146MH 8 - 63 63 14.0 M 6 29.0 350 0.233

ø A

C

D

B

Magnetic material:Hard ferrite (Oxit 380)


Note:For holding magnet with threaded bushesin more powerful execution, please seeSAV 240.33 - MH 33.

Without threaded bush

202 Chapter 11





Design:Flat holding magnet without threaded bush.Protected system, surface galvanized. For use as for instance, lamp magnet.


Magnetic material:Hard ferrite, anisotropic

Application:Press, glue, screw

With spherical holding surface

Holding Magnet SAV 240.20 - MH 20Name SAV - No. - Type


force in N*

Weightin kgA± 0,2 B± 0,2 C D E

MH 20 40 15 3.2 0.1 105 22 0.079

* The indicated holding force is only reached on a polished ball with diameter 105 mm.

ø Aø C

D

Bal

l øE

B

ø Aø C

D

Bal

l øE

BHolding Magnet – hard ferrite SAV 240.21

Design:Flat holding magnet with notches at the outside diameter, dor pressing, gluing, filling.Protected system.


Magnetic material:Hard ferrite

Mounting possibility:Press, glue, fill

With pressing notches

Holding Magnet SAV 240.21 - MH 21 - 50Name SAV - No. - Type


force in N

Weightin kgA± 0.2 B± 0.2 C D E

MH 21 - 16 16 4.5 1.5 - 3.0 16.5 - 18.0 120° 18 0.005MH 21 - 20 - 2 20 6.0 2.5 - 4.5 20.5 - 22.0 60° 30 0.010MH 21 - 25 - 2 25 7.0 3.0 - 5.0 25.5 - 27.0 60° 40 0.018MH 21 - 32 32 7.0 3.0 - 5.0 32.5 - 34.0 120° 80 0.029MH 21 - 40 40 8.0 3.5 - 5.5 41.0 - 43.0 60° 125 0.055MH 21 - 50 50 10.0 4.0 - 6.0 51.0 - 53.0 45° 220 0.102

øA

C

øD

EB

203Chapter 11





Design:Flat holding magnet, without threaded bush. Surface galvanized. Notches on the outside diameter. For use as for instance, lamp magnet.Protected system.



Mounting possibility:Press, glue

With spherical holding surface / pressing notches



forcein N*

Weightin kgA± 0,2 B± 0,2 C D E F

MH 22 25 7.2 17 3 25.8 0.1 15 0.015

* The indicated holding force is only reached on a polished ball with diameter 70 mm

øA

øC

D x 120 °

Ball ø 70

BF

D E


Design:Protected system, surface galvanized.


Magnetic material:Hard ferrite (Oxid 380)


With inner thread

Holding Magnet SAV 240.23 - MH 23 - 40 - 08Name SAV - No. - Type Type

TypeDimensions in mm Weight

in kg

Holding forcein NA± 0.2 B± 0.2 C D

MH 23 - 25 - 07 25 7 4 5.2 0.018 36MH 23 - 32 - 07 32 7 4 5.2 0.029 75MH 23 - 40 - 08 40 8 4 5.2 0.053 90MH 23 - 50 - 10 50 10 6 12.0 0.094 170MH 23 - 50 - 10 50 10 8 12.0 0.094 170MH 23 - 63 - 14 63 14 8 13.0 0.206 290MH 23 - 80 - 18 80 18 8 14.5 0.472 550MH 23 - 80 - 18 80 18 10 14.5 0.466 550

ø D

B

C

A

204 Chapter 11





Design:Protected system, surface galvanized.Can be supplied with 2 or 3 threaded bushing.



Mounting possibility:Threaded bushings for 2 or 3 screws

With 2 or 3 threaded bushings

Holding Magnet SAV 240.24 - MH 24 - 3Name SAV - No. - Type - No. of threaded bushings


forcein N

Weightin kgA± 0,2 B± 0,2 C D E F ± 0,2

MH 24 80 18 M 4 8 24.5 67 600 0.483

2 threaded bushes

3 threaded bushes

øAø

D

120

°

BF

E

C


Design:Flat holding magnet with outside thread,protected system, surface galvanized. or use as, for instance, lamp magnet.




With spherical holding surface / threaded bush



forcein N*

Weightin kgA± 0,2 B± 0,2 C D E F

MH 25 25 9.1 17 0.1 M 5 4 15 0.021

* The indicated holding force is only reached on a polished ball with diameter 70 mm.

ø A

B

E

F

D

ø C

Bal

l ø 7

0

205Chapter 11





DesignFlat holding magnet with cylindrical through hole. With plastic cover available in black (S) or white (W). Protected system.





Holding Magnet SAV 240.27 - MH 27 - SName SAV - No. - Type - Color


forcein N*

Weightin kgA B C D E F

MH 27 84 20 6.4 12 12 5 650 0.470

ø A

B

ø E

F

ø D

ø C

Holding Magnet – hard ferrite SAV 240.30 / 240.31With plastic cover / inside thread

Holding magnet SAV 240.30 - MH 30Name SAV - No. - Type


forcein N

Weightin kgA B C D E F

MH 30 66 16 M10 x 1 15 12 2 290 0.216

ø A

C

EB

F

ø D



forcein N

Weightin kgA B C

MH 31 - 41 41 12.2 M 6 115 0.072MH 31 - 60 60 17.3 M 6 300 0.238MH 31 - 80 80 20.2 M 6 480 0.495

Design:Flat holding magnet with inside thread. With plastic cover and centre in grey SAV 240.30With plastic cover in black SAV 240.31Protected system.Max. application temperature: 60 °C



SAV 240.30

SAV 240.31

SAV 240.30

SAV 240.31


206 Chapter 11




Holding Magnet – AlNiCo SAV 240.04

Design:Cylindrical holding magnet, smooth without fitting tolerance.Protected systemMax. application temperature: 450 °C

Magnetic material:AlNiCo 500


Note:In enhanced execution see SAV 240.14For use in injection moulds with high pressure please specify.

With inner thread



forcein N

Weightin kgA ± 0.2 B± 0.2 C D

MH 11 - 06 6 20 M 3 5 1.7 0.003MH 11 - 08 8 20 M 3 5 4.0 0.006MH 11 - 10 10 20 M 4 7 8.5 0.010MH 11 - 13 13 20 M 4 7 12.0 0.016MH 11 - 16 16 20 M 4 5 20.0 0.025MH 11 - 20 20 25 M 6 7 45.0 0.055MH 11 - 25 25 35 M 6 9 100.0 0.135MH 11 - 32 32 40 M 8 9 190.0 0.230

ø A

B ±

0.2

D

C

1) Holding surface


Design:Cylindrical holding magnet with bushing.Protected system.Max. application temperature: 450 °C


Mounting possibility:Riveting of bushing or screwing after applying thread to the bushing.For use in injection moulds with high pressures please specify.

With bushing



forcein N

Weightin kgA± 0.2 B± 0.2 C D E2)

MH 5 - 01 6 28 20 3 2 1.7 0.004MH 5 - 02 8 28 20 3 3 4.0 0.007MH 5 - 03 10 28 20 4 6 8.5 0.013MH 5 - 04 13 28 20 4 7 12.0 0.021MH 5 - 05 16 28 20 5 5 20.0 0.032MH 5 - 06 20 33 25 6 6 45.0 0.062MH 5 - 07 25 45 35 8 5 100.0 0.137MH 5 - 08 32 50 40 10 3 190.0 0.245MH 5 - 09 40 70 50 15 5 240.0 0.520MH 5 - 10 50 85 60 18 2 420.0 0.961MH 5 - 11 63 95 65 20 5 660.0 1.580

Note:1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will decrease significantly.2) Bushing can be extended to size ”e” without loosing holding force.

ø A

C

E

B

ø D

1) Holding surface

1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will decrease significantly.

207Chapter 11





Design:Cylindrical holding magnet, smooth without fitting tolerance.Protected system.Max. application temperature: 450 °C


Mounting possibility:Press, shrink, glue

Smooth, without fitting tolerance



forcein N

Weightin kgA± 0.2 B± 0.2 C2)

MH 6 - 01 6 20 12 1.7 0.004MH 6 - 02 8 20 11 4.0 0.007MH 6 - 03 10 20 10 8.5 0.011MH 6 - 04 13 20 8 12.0 0.019MH 6 - 05 16 20 6 20.0 0.029MH 6 - 06 20 25 5 45.0 0.061MH 6 - 07 25 35 13 100.0 0.140MH 6 - 08 32 40 9 190.0 0.240MH 6 - 09 40 50 10 240.0 0.500MH 6 - 10 50 60 10 420.0 0.900MH 6 - 11 63 65 10 660.0 1.500

ø A

B

C

1) Holding surface

Holding Magnet – AlNiCo SAV 240.07Smooth, with fitting tolerance



forcein N

Weightin kgA h6 B±0.2 C2)

MH 7 - 01 6 10 2 1.5 0.002MH 7 - 02 8 12 3 3.5 0.004MH 7 - 03 10 16 6 7.0 0.009MH 7 - 04 13 18 7 10.0 0.017MH 7 - 05 16 20 5 18.0 0.029MH 7 - 06 20 25 6 42.0 0.057MH 7 - 07 25 30 5 96.0 0.110MH 7 - 08 32 35 3 180.0 0.200MH 7 - 09 40 45 5 240.0 0.420MH 7 - 10 50 50 2 420.0 0.720MH 7 - 11 63 60 5 660.0 1.340

Note:1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will

decrease significantly.

2) Magnet height can be reduced to size ”c” without loosing holding force.

Note:1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will

decrease significantly.2) Magnet height can be reduced to size ”c” without loosing

holding force.

ø A h6

B

C

1) Holding surface

Design:Cylindrical holding magnet, smooth withfitting tolerance h6.Protected system.Max. application temperature: 450 °C



208 Chapter 11




Pot Magnet SAV 240.11

Design:Strong magnet with steel housing and threaded blind hole.Surface with red lacquer.

Max. application temperature: 100 °C for lacquer 400 °C for magnetic material

Magnetic material:AlNiCo


With inner thread

Pot Magnet SAV 240.11 - MH 11 - 65Name SAV - No. - Type


force in N

Weightin kgA B C

MH 11 - 17 17 M 6 16.0 20 0.025MH 11 - 21 21 M 6 19.0 28 0.050MH 11 - 27 27 M 6 25.4 68 0.110MH 11 - 35 35 M 6 30.0 150 0.220MH 11 - 65 65 M 12 43.0 400 1.080

Flat Pot Magnet SAV 240.12

Design:Strong magnet with steel housing and through hole with counter bore.Outside surface with red lacquer.





Flat Pot Magnet SAV 240.12 - MH 12 - 38Name SAV - No. - Type


force in N

Weightin kgA B C

MH 12 - 19 19 3.5 8.0 25 0.017MH 12 - 29 29 4.7 9.0 50 0.044MH 12 - 38 38 4.7 11.1 80 0.105

ø A

B

C

ø A

B

C

ø A

C

ø B

209Chapter 11




Button Magnet SAV 240.13

Design:Holding surface separated, with through-hole.Outside surface with red lacquer.



Mounting possibility:Screw from holding surface.

With through-hole

Button Magnet SAV 240.13 - MH 13 - 32Name

SAV - No. - Type


force in N

Weightin kgA B C D E

MH 13 - 13 12.7 4.7 4.0 4.8 9.5 7 0.006MH 13 - 19 19.0 5.2 5.5 6.4 12.7 19 0.019MH 13 - 25 25.4 5.2 5.5 8.0 19.5 29 0.063MH 13 - 32 32.5 7.0 8.0 12.0 25.0 66 0.105

ø A

D

C

E

ø B

Strong Magnet SAV 241.14

Design:Braced magnet with high nominal holding force, through-hole for mounting from type MH 14-17 onwards. To prevent demagnetizing, magnets are supplied with a steel plate covering both poles. Surface with red hammer-scale.Max. application temperature: 100 °C / 400 °C

Magnetic material:AlNiCo, casted

Mounting possibility:Screw, glue

With trough hole

Strong Magnet SAV 241.14 - MH 14 - 29Name SAV - No. - Type


force in N

Weightin kgA B C D E F G

MH 14 - 05 21.4 11.3 8.0 - 7.8 6.5 3.3 20 0.012MH 14 - 10 28.5 25.3 7.4 - 8.0 7.0 15.0 35 0.026MH 14 - 17 22.0 22.0 25.0 7.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 45 0.010MH 14 - 20 30.4 20.3 20.3 5.0 8.0 15.0 11.0 40 0.063MH 14 - 25 38.1 25.4 25.4 5.0 9.5 19.1 14.5 90 0.133MH 14 - 29 44.4 29.5 28.6 5.8 11.1 22.2 17.0 120 0.197MH 14 - 35 58.0 35.0 44.0 8.0 11.0 28.0 23.0 230 0.500MH 14 - 39 60.0 39.2 61.5 7.0 14.0 32.0 26.0 250 0.830MH 14 - 41 70.0 41.0 57.0 8.0 15.0 40.0 26.0 320 1.000MH 14 - 54 78.0 54.0 82.0 10.5 15.0 48.0 36.0 470 2.200

A

GB

D

E F

C CD

B

E

A

F

Type MH 14 - 17 to MH 14 - 29with one through hole

Type MH 14 - 35 to MH 14 - 54with two through holes

Type MH 14 - 39without through hole

Type MH 14 - 05 and MH 14 - 10without mouting holes

210 Chapter 11




Pot Magnet SAV 240.15

Design:MH15-2,3,4 with releasing bolt. MH15-5 and 6 with releasing handle and mounting fork.


Magnetic material:AlNiCo / hard ferrite

Application:As holding magnet, for light to medium handling work.

Note:1) MH 15 - 1 without releasing-bolt, but with T-holding bolt

With releasing-bolt

Pot Magnet SAV 240.15 - MH 15 - 4Name SAV - No. - Type

ø AB

C


force in N

Permanent-Magnet-Material

Weightin kgA B C

MH 15 - 11) 50 M 8 40 270 AlNiCo 0.600MH 15 - 2 70 M 8 63 650 AlNiCo 2.020MH 15 - 3 75 M 12 45 400 Hartferrit 2.200MH 15 - 4 44 M 8 44 200 AlNiCo 0.520MH 15 - 5 102 M 8 75 1700 AlNiCo 6.400MH 15 - 6 95 M 8 95 2200 AlNiCo 7.700

displayed without releasing-bolt

MH 15 - 2, 3, 4

MH 15 - 6MH 15 - 5

Bar Magnets SAV 241.06

Design:Surface with hammer-scale lacquer, red, not protected.

Max. application temperature: 100 °C / 400 °C

Magnetic material:AlNiCo 500, casted


Note:Delivery in pairs. Machining only throughgrinding.

Square and round


in kgA B CMH 630 20 10 5 0.005MH 631 60 15 5 0.055MH 632 50 15 10 0.063MH 633 75 15 10 0.118MH 634 101 15 10 0.174MH 635 40 12.5 5 0.030MH 636 60 12.5 5 0.036


in kgA BMH 620 10 4 0.001MH 621 10 5 0.001MH 622 10 6 0.001MH 623 20 5 0.002MH 624 20 6 0.003MH 625 24 8 0.007MH 626 30 10 0.018

Square bar magnets Round bar magnets

A B

C

Type MH 630 to Type MH 636

N S

Bar Magnets SAV 241.06 - MH 635Name SAV - No. - Type

Type MH 620 to Type MH 626

A B

N S

211Chapter 11




SAV 240.10Holding Magnet – SmCo5 Smooth, without bushing

Design:Magnets from SmCo5 feature a 3- to 5-fold holding force compared to standard holding magnets. The magnets are surrounded by a steel housing (protection)


Magnetic material:Samarium-Cobalt, SmCo5



force in N

Weightin kgA±0.15 B±0.15

MH 10 - 01 6 4.5 5 0.001MH 10 - 02 8 4.5 11 0.002MH 10 - 03 10 4.5 20 0.003MH 10 - 04 13 4.5 40 0.005MH 10 - 05 16 4.5 60 0.007MH 10 - 06 20 6.0 90 0.015MH 10 - 07 25 7.0 150 0.027MH 10 - 08 32 7.0 220 0.044

ø AB ø AB


Holding Magnet – SmCo5 SAV 240.09

Design:Housing of brass, with integrated sandwich magnetic system.


Magnetic material:SmCo5




force in N

Weightin kgAh6 B1) C D2)

MH 9 - 01 6 10 20 1.5 8 0.004MH 9 - 02 8 10 20 1.5 22 0.008MH 9 - 03 10 8 20 2.0 40 0.012MH 9 - 04 13 6 20 2.5 60 0.020MH 9 - 05 16 2 20 3.0 125 0.032MH 9 - 06 20 5 25 4.0 230 0.060MH 9 - 07 25 7 35 5.0 400 0.140MH 9 - 08 32 5 40 6.0 600 0.265

Also with fitting tolerance

Note:1) Magnet length can be reduced to size ”b” without loosing

holding force.2) Min. distance from housing surface to iron surrounding for

integrated mounting. For the backside this only valid, when magnet is reduced to

size ”b”.

Holding surface

B

0.5x45°

Cø A

212 Chapter 11




Holding Magnet – SmCo5 SAV 240.34Through hole with counter bore



force in N


MH 34 - 120 20 6 4.5 8 60 0.013MH 34 - 125 25 7 4.5 8 80 0.024MH 34 - 132 32 7 5.5 11 200 0.039MH 34 - 140 40 8 5.5 10 420 0.075

Design:

Protected system, surface galvanized.Anisotropically magnetized.


Magnetic material:SmCo

SAV 240.35Holding Magnet – SmCo5 Bushings with inner thread, high nominal force

Design:Protected system, Surface galvanized.


Magnetic material:High energy Samarium-Cobalt, SmCo5



force in N

Weightin kgA± 0.2 B± 0.2 C D E F

MH 35 - 06 6 4.5 M 3 6 11.5 7.0 5 0.002MH 35 - 08 8 4.5 M 3 6 11.5 7.0 11 0.002MH 35 - 10 10 4.5 M 3 6 11.5 7.0 20 0.003MH 35 - 13 13 4.5 M 3 6 11.5 7.0 40 0.005MH 35 - 16 16 4.5 M 4 8 11.5 7.0 60 0.008MH 35 - 20 20 6.0 M 4 8 13.0 7.0 90 0.016MH 35 - 25 25 7.0 M 4 8 14.0 7.0 150 0.022MH 35 - 32 32 7.0 M 5 10 15.5 8.5 220 0.040

ø A

B

E

F

ø C

ø D


ø A

B

ø D

ø C

213Chapter 11




SAV 240.14



force in N

Holding force RF

in N


MH 14 - 06 6 20 M 3 5 6 1 0.003MH 14 - 08 8 20 M 3 5 12 4 0.006MH 14 - 10 10 20 M 4 7 24 8 0.010MH 14 - 13 13 20 M 4 7 60 16 0.016MH 14 - 16 16 20 M 4 7 90 18 0.025MH 14 - 20 20 25 M 6 9 135 32 0.055MH 14 - 25 25 35 M 6 9 190 73 0.135MH 14 - 32 32 40 M 8* 12 340 115 0.230

SAV 240.16



force in N

Weightin kgA± 0.2 B± 0.2 C D E2)

MH 16 - 01 6 28 20 3 2 6 0.004MH 16 - 02 8 28 20 3 3 12 0.007MH 16 - 03 10 28 20 4 6 24 0.013MH 16 - 04 13 28 20 4 7 60 0.021MH 16 - 05 16 28 20 5 5 90 0.032MH 16 - 06 20 33 25 6 6 135 0.062MH 16 - 07 25 45 35 8 5 190 0.137MH 16 - 08 32 50 40 10 3 340 0.245

Holding Magnet – NdFeB

Design:Cylindrical holding magnet, smooth without fitting tolerance.Magnets of NdFeB have a 50% higher force compared to SmCo. Protected system


Magnetic material:NdFeB


With inner thread, also in stainless execution

Note:1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will decrease significantly.

ø A

B

D

C

1) Holding surface


Design:Cylindrical holding magnet with bushing.Protected system.



Mounting possibility:Riveting of bushing or screwing after applying thread to the bushing.

With smooth bushing

Note:1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will decrease significantly.2) Bushing can be extended to size ”e” without loosing holding force.

ø A

C

E

B

ø D

1) Holding surface

214 Chapter 11




SAV 240.17



force in N

Weightin kgAh6 B1) C D2)

MH 17 - 01 6 10 20 1.5 10 0.004MH 17 - 02 8 10 20 1.5 22 0.008MH 17 - 03 10 8 20 2.0 45 0.012MH 17 - 04 13 6 20 2.5 70 0.020MH 17 - 05 16 2 20 3.0 150 0.032MH 17 - 06 20 5 25 4.0 300 0.060MH 17 - 07 25 7 35 5.0 500 0.140MH 17 - 08 32 5 40 6.0 720 0.265

ø AHolding surface

B

0.5x45°

Cø A

SAV 240.19

Holding Magnet SAV 240.19 - MH 19 - 08 - PName SAV - No. - Type


force in NWeightin kgA± 0.2 B ± 0.2 C 2)

MH 19 - 001 4 10 5 2.5 0.001MH 19 - 002 5 10 5 4.5 0.003MH 19 - 01 6 10 5 6 0.004MH 19 - 02 8 12 7 12 0.007MH 19 - 03 10 16 11 24 0.011MH 19 - 04 13 18 13 60 0.019MH 19 - 05 16 20 15 90 0.029MH 19 - 06 20 25 18 135 0.061MH 19 - 07 25 30 22 190 0.140MH 19 - 08 32 35 27 340 0.240

ø A

B

C

1) Holding surface


Design:Housing of brass, with integrated sandwich magnetic system.




High energy magnets, also in stainless execution

Note:1) Magnet length can be reduced to size ”b” without loosing

holding force.2) Holding surface may not be reduced more than size „D“,

otherwise holding for will reduce significantly.


Design:Cylindrical holding magnet, smooth without fitting tolerance. Protected system.Also available with fitting tolerance h6 add (P) to type no.




Also with fitting tolerance

Note:1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum ma-

chining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will decrease significantly.

2) Magnet height can be reduced to size ”c” without loosing holding force.

215Chapter 11




Holding Magnet – NdFeB SAV 240.33

Design:Holding magnet with threaded bush, surface galvanized.Protected system.




High energy magnets, with threaded bush

ø A

D

B

C



force in N

Weightin kgA B C D

MH 33 - 10 10 4.5 M 4 12.5 25 0.003MH 33 - 13 13 4.5 M 5 12.5 60 0.005MH 33 - 16 16 4.5 M 6 12.5 95 0.008MH 33 - 20 20 6 M 6 16 140 0.016MH 33 - 25 25 7 M 6 17 200 0.025MH 33 - 32 32 7 M 6 17 350 0.048

SAV 240.18



force in N

Weightin kgA ± 0.15 B ± 0.15

MH 18 - 01 6 4.5 5 0.001MH 18 - 02 8 4.5 13 0.002MH 18 - 03 10 4.5 25 0.003MH 18 - 04 13 4.5 60 0.005MH 18 - 05 16 4.5 95 0.007MH 18 - 06 20 6.0 140 0.015MH 18 - 07 25 7.0 200 0.022MH 18 - 08 32 7.0 350 0.040

ø AB ø AB

Holding Magnet – NdFeB High energy magnets – smooth, without bushing


Magnetic material:Neodymium, NdFeB


216 Chapter 11




Holding Magnet – NdFeB SAV 240.38High energy magnets, bushing, anisotropic, with bore and recess, inner thread



force in N


MH 38 - 216 16 4.5 3.5 6.6 75 0.006MH 38 - 220 20 6 4.5 9.0 105 0.013MH 38 - 225 25 7 4.5 9.0 160 0.024MH 38 - 232 32 7 5.5 11.0 310 0.039MH 38 - 240 40 8 5.5 10.6 500 0.073

Design:Protected system, surface galvanized.Anisotropically magnetized.




force in N


MH 38 - 332 32 7 5 5.5 330 0.040MH 38 - 340 40 8 5 10.5 500 0.074MH 38 - 350 50 10 8 9.5 800 0.140MH 38 - 363 63 14 10 11.7 1100 0.315MH 38 - 375 75 15 10 13 1750 0.479

With bore and recess:

With inner thread:

Holding Magnet – NdFeB SAV 240.36

Design:Protected system, surface galvanized.



Mounting possibility:Screw.

Bushing with inner thread, high nominal force



force in N

Weightin kgA± 0.2 B± 0.2 C D E F

MH 36 - 06 6 4.5 M 3 6 11.5 7.0 5 0.002MH 36 - 08 8 4.5 M 3 6 11.5 7.0 13 0.003MH 36 - 10 10 4.5 M 3 6 11.5 7.0 25 0.004MH 36 - 13 13 4.5 M 3 6 11.5 7.0 60 0.005MH 36 - 16 16 4.5 M 4 6 11.5 7.0 95 0.007MH 36 - 20 20 6.0 M 4 8 13.0 7.0 140 0.016MH 36 - 25 25 7.0 M 4 8 14.0 7.0 200 0.027MH 36 - 32 32 7.0 M 5 10 15.5 8.5 350 0.045 ø A

B

E

F

ø C

ø D

B

ø C

ø Dø A

ø A

B

ø D

C

217



Magnetic Core – hard ferrite SAV 240.40

Design:Improved magnetic values as the crystals are pointed in longitudinal direction. Without protection.Max. application temperature: 100 °C

Magnetic material:Hard ferrite as per DIN 17 410

Mounting possibility:Glue, press or with screws of non-magnetic material.

Note:Machining through grinding or with diamond tools is possible. Resistant against weather conditions, oxidation and many chemicals. Contact with food is not allowed.

From „Oxid 300“


in gA B DesignMK 10 - 04 4.0 5.0 A and B ground 0.3MK 10 - 05 5.0 2.6 B ground 0.3MK 10 - 08 8.0 4.0 B ground 1.0MK 10 - 10 10.0 5.0 - 2.0MK 10 - 12 12.0 6.0 - 3.0MK 10 - 30 30.0 6.0 A ground 21.0MK 10 - 40 40.0 7.0 B ground 44.0MK 10 - 45 45.0 9.0 B ground 72.0

Magnetic Core SAV 240.40 - MK 12 - 100Name SAV - No. - Type

Magnetic discs MK 10

TypeDimensions in mm

DesignWeight

in gA B CMK 12 - 19 19.5 6.5 10.0 C ground 13.0MK 12 - 20 20.0 10.0 4.3 C ground 5.0MK 12 - 30 30.0 16.0 5.0 C ground 13.0

MK 12 - 36 36.0 27.5 8.0 b sunken at one side 17.0

MK 12 - 40 40.0 22.0 9.0 - 29.0MK 12 - 100 100.0 70.0 20.0 C ground 401.0


DesignWeight

in gA B CMK 13 - 12 12 12 7.5 C ground 5.0MK 13 - 25 25 10 5.0 - 6.0MK 13 - 40 40 20 10.0 - 40.0MK 13 - 50 50 25 7.8 C ground 49.0MK 13 - 75 75 50 20.0 C ground 375.0MK 13 - 100 100 100 25.0 C ground 1250.0

Through-hole 14 mm

TypeDimensions in mm Design

Countersink 90°Weight

in gA B CMK 11 - 15 15.2 3.2 6.0 one side 5.0MK 11 - 20 20.0 4.3 6.5 both sides 10.0MK 11 - 21 20.0 4.2 10.0 both sides 15.0MK 11 - 31 31.0 5.3 15.0 one side 55.0

Mounting only with screws of non-magnetic material.

ø A

B

N

S

N

S

ø A

ø B

C

Magnetic discs with through-hole MK 11

N

S

ø Aø B

C

Magnetic rings MK 12

N

SAB

C

Magnetic plates MK 13

218 Chapter 11





in kgA ± 0.2 B ± 0.2

MK 20 - 15 3 15 0.001MK 20 - 20 - 4 4 20 0.002MK 20 - 20 - 5 5 20 0.003MK 20 - 25 6 25 0.005MK 20 - 32 8 32 0.012MK 20 - 45 10 45 0.026MK 20 - 60 15 60 0.078MK 20 - 120 20 120 0.150

Round bar magnets MK 20:


in kgA ± 0.3 B ± 0.2 C ± 0.3

MK 21 - 25 4.8 4.8 25.4 0.004MK 21 - 32 6.3 6.3 32.0 0.009MK 21 - 20 10.0 5.0 20.0 0.007MK 21 - 60 15.0 5.0 60.0 0.033

Square bar magnets MK 21:

Magnetic Core – AlNiCo 500 SAV 240.46

Design:Ground short sides, Magnet unprotected.




In lenghts to choise


A ± 0.2 B ± 0.2optimum

B ± 0.2maximum

MK 30 - 03 3 12 200MK 30 - 04 4 16 200MK 30 - 05 5 20 200MK 30 - 06 6 24 200MK 30 - 07 7 28 200MK 30 - 08 8 32 200MK 30 - 10 10 40 200MK 30 - 12 12 48 200MK 30 - 14 14 56 200MK 30 - 15 15 60 200MK 30 - 20 20 80 200

Note:Indication of holding force values are not possible with open magnetic systems. Machining through grinding. Intermediate sizes can also be supplied.

Magnetic Core – AlNiCo 500 SAV 240.45

Design:Improved magnetic values as the crystals are pointed in longitudinal direction. Wit-hout protection. Outside rough, short sides are ground.



Mounting possibility:Glue, press.

Machining through grinding

Magnetic Core SAV 240.45 - MH 21 - 60Name SAV - No. - Type

Magnetic Core SAV 240.46 - MK 30 - 12 x 50Name SAV - No. - Type x Length

Note:Due to the high remanence and small field strength of AlNiCo, the magnets should not be stored in the same pole direction (repellent), as demagnetizing can occur.Machining only through grinding.

N

B

S

A

Square bar magnets MK 21

Round bar magnets MK 20

AB

AC

B

N

N

S

S

219



Magnetic Core – SmCo5 SAV 240.50

Design:The holding magnets are manufactured through sintering. The magnets are hard and fragile and can only be machined in unmagnetized condition.

Max. application temperature: 200 °CRemanence: 8500 to 9300 G

Magnetic material:Samarium-Cobalt, SmCo5Unprotected, anisotropic

Mounting possibility:Glue, press

With high nominal holding force

Magnetic Core SAV 240.50 - MK 40 - 01 - 03Name SAV - No. - Type


in gA BMK 40 - 01 - 03 1.5 3 1.0MK 40 - 02 - 04 1.8 4 1.0MK 40 - 02 - 02 2.0 2 1.0MK 40 - 02 - 10 2.0 10 0.3MK 40 - 03 - 02 3.0 2 0.1MK 40 - 04 - 02 4.0 1.5 0.2MK 40 - 04 - 05 4.0 5 0.5MK 40 - 05 - 02 5.0 2 0.3MK 40 - 05 - 03 5.0 3 0.5MK 40 - 05 - 05 5.0 5 0.8MK 40 - 06 - 02 6.0 2 0.5MK 40 - 06 - 04 6.0 4 1.0MK 40 - 06 - 10 6.0 10 2.0MK 40 - 07 - 03 7.0 3 1.0MK 40 - 08 - 05 8.0 5 2.0MK 40 - 10 - 03 10.0 3 2.0MK 40 - 10 - 05 10.0 5 3.0MK 40 - 10 - 10 10.0 10 7.0MK 40 - 15 - 05 15.0 5 7.0MK 40 - 15 - 10 15.0 10 15.0MK 40 - 20 - 05 20.0 5 13.0MK 40 - 25 - 08 25.0 8 33.0MK 40 - 25 - 15 25.0 15 62.0

Note:The magnetic values are not decreased,even at strong reversed fields.Special dimensions available on request.Tolerances according DIN 7168, medium

Magnetic discs MK 40:


in gA B CMK 41 - 02 - 02 - 01 2 2.0 1.0 0.1MK 41 - 03 - 03 - 02 3 3.0 2.0 0.2MK 41 - 04 - 04 - 02 4 4.0 2.0 0.3MK 41 - 05 - 05 - 03 5 5.0 3.0 0.6MK 41 - 05 - 05 - 02 5 4.5 1.5 0.3MK 41 - 06 - 03 - 01 6 3.0 1.0 0.2MK 41 - 10 - 07 - 02 10 7.0 2.0 1.0MK 41 - 10 - 10 - 03 10 10.0 3.0 3.0MK 41 - 12 - 09 - 03 12 9.0 2.5 2.0MK 41 - 15 - 15 - 06 15 15.0 6.0 11.0MK 41 - 16 - 12 - 03 16 12.0 3.0 5.0MK 41 - 18 - 16 - 04 18 16.0 4.0 10.0MK 41 - 26 - 21 - 05 26 21.0 5.0 23.0MK 41 - 30 - 10 - 06 30 10.0 6.0 15.0MK 41 - 30 - 20 - 10 30 20.0 10.0 50.0MK 41 - 32 - 27 - 06 32 27.0 6.0 44.0

Magnetic plates MK 41:


in gA B CMK 42 - 20 - 10 - 05 20 10 5 0.4MK 42 - 25 - 12 - 08 25 12 8 0.4MK 42 - 30 - 10 - 10 30 10 10 0.5MK 42 - 40 - 15 - 10 40 15 10 0.9

Magnetic rings MK 42:


ø A

B

N

S

Magnet plates MK 41 Magnetic rings MK 42

AC

N

SB

ø A

C

N

Sø B

220 Chapter 11



Magnetic Core – NdFeB SAV 240.55

Design:Neodymium is the strongest available magnetic material. Compared to Samarium-Cobalt, the energy is approx. 40% higher and the volume is approx. 12% less.The magnets are produced through sintering.

Max. application temperature: 80 °CRemanence: 10,000 to 12,500 G

Magnetic material:Neodymium, Nd2Fe14Bunprotected.


High energy magnets


in gA BMK 50 - 02 - 02 1.5 2.0 0.1MK 50 - 02 - 04 2.0 4.0 0.1MK 50 - 02 - 10 2.0 10.0 0.2MK 50 - 03 - 03 3.0 3.0 0.2MK 50 - 04 - 01 4.0 1.2 0.1MK 50 - 04 - 02 4.0 1.5 0.1MK 50 - 04 - 05 4.0 5.0 0.5MK 50 - 05 - 03 5.0 3.0 0.4MK 50 - 05 - 10 5.0 10.0 2.0MK 50 - 06 - 02 6.0 2.0 0.4MK 50 - 06 - 05 6.0 5.0 1.0MK 50 - 08 - 06 8.0 6.0 2.0MK 50 - 09 - 05 9.0 5.0 2.0MK 50 - 10 - 03 10.0 3.0 2.0MK 50 - 10 - 05 10.0 5.0 2.0MK 50 - 14 - 04 13.5 3.5 4.0MK 50 - 15 - 03 15.0 3.0 4.0MK 50 - 15 - 05 15.0 5.0 4.0MK 50 - 20 - 05 20.0 5.0 7.0MK 50 - 20 - 10 20.0 10.0 23.0MK 50 - 25 - 07 25.0 7.0 25.0


Note:The magnetic values are not decreased, even at strong reversed fields. The magnets are corrosion-sensitive in humid surroundings and not resistant against acids and salts. Special dimensions available on request.



in gA B CMK 51 - 02 - 02 - 01 2.0 2.0 1.0 0.1MK 51 - 03 - 03 - 01 3.0 3.0 1.0 0.1MK 51 - 04 - 04 - 02 4.0 4.0 2.0 0.2MK 51 - 04 - 05 - 05 4.8 4.8 4.5 0.8MK 51 - 05 - 05 - 02 5.0 5.0 2.0 0.4MK 51 - 05 - 05 - 01 5.0 4.5 1.5 0.2MK 51 - 06 - 03 - 01 6.0 3.0 1.0 0.1MK 51 - 06 - 06 - 05 6.0 6.0 5.0 1.0MK 51 - 08 - 08 - 06 8.0 8.0 6.0 1.0MK 51 - 10 - 07 - 02 10.0 7.0 2.0 3.0MK 51 - 10 - 10 - 03 10.0 10.0 3.0 2.0MK 51 - 10 - 10 - 06 10.0 10.0 6.0 4.0MK 51 - 12 - 09 - 03 12.0 9.0 2.5 2.0MK 51 - 15 - 15 - 05 15.0 15.0 5.0 8.0MK 51 - 18 - 16 - 04 18.0 16.0 4.0 9.0MK 51 - 20 - 10 - 05 20.0 10.0 5.0 7.0MK 51 - 20 - 20 - 08 20.0 20.0 8.0 24.0MK 51 - 30 - 10 - 06 30.0 10.0 6.0 13.0MK 51 - 30 - 30 - 06 30.0 30.0 6.0 40.0MK 51 - 50 - 20 - 08 50.0 20.0 8.0 59.0MK 51 - 75 - 50 - 10 75.0 50.0 10.0 278.0



in gA B CMK 52 - 15 - 05 - 06 15 5.0 6.0 7.0MK 52 - 20 - 04 - 05 20 4.2 5.0 11.0MK 52 - 20 - 10 - 06 20 10.0 6.0 10.0MK 52 - 25 - 12 - 08 25 12.0 8.0 22.0MK 52 - 40 - 23 - 06 40 23.0 6.0 37.0



ø A

B

N

S

Magnetic plates MK 51 Magnetic rings MK 52

AC

N

SB

ø A

C

N

Sø B

221



Magnetic Core SAV 240.56

Design:Epoxy-bound Neodymium magnets are not sintered like other materials, but the magnetic powder is mixed with epoxy and hot-pressed in moulds.On request the form-pressed standard magnets can be machined in unmagnetized state according customer-specification.Max. application temperature: 80°CRemanence: approx. 6800 GTolerance : ± 0.1 to 0.2 mm

Magnetic material:Neodymium, Nd2Fe14BUnprotected.


With extreme high nominal holding force



in gA BMK 60 - 02 - 05 2.0 5.0 0.1MK 60 - 03 - 10 3.0 10.0 0.4MK 60 - 04 - 10 4.0 10.0 0.8MK 60 - 05 - 10 5.0 10.0 1.2MK 60 - 06 - 02 6.0 2.0 0.3MK 60 - 06 - 10 6.0 10.0 1.7MK 60 - 08 - 03 8.5 3.0 1.0MK 60 - 10 - 05 10.0 5.0 2.0MK 60 - 10 - 10 10.0 10.0 5.0MK 60 - 13 - 05 12.5 5.0 4.0MK 60 - 13 - 10 12.5 10.0 7.0MK 60 - 15 - 03 15.0 3.0 3.0MK 60 - 20 - 08 20.0 7.7 15.0MK 60 - 25 - 05 25.0 5.0 15.0

Note:The magnetic values are not decreased, even at strong reversed fields.The magnets can be used without protected surface at relative humidity upto 50% and normal ambient temperature. No specialdimensions possible.



in gA B CMK 61 - 05 - 05 - 02 5.0 5.0 2.0 0.3MK 61 - 10 - 05 - 05 10.0 5.0 5.0 2.0MK 61 - 24 - 12 - 10 24.0 12.0 10.0 18.0MK 61 - 50 - 10 - 10 50.0 10.0 10.0 30.0MK 61 - 50 - 12 - 10 50.0 12.0 10.0 36.0MK 61 - 30 - 30 - 10 30.0 30.0 10.0 54.0



in gA B CMK 62 - 26 - 22 - 05 26 22.0 5.0 5.0MK 62 - 30 - 16 - 05 30 16.0 5.0 15.0MK 62 - 35 - 21 - 05 35 21.0 5.0 18.0MK 62 - 35 - 21 - 10 35 21.0 10.0 37.0



ø A

B

N

S

Magnetic plates MK 61 Magnetic rings MK 62

AC

N

SB

ø A

C

N

Sø B

Magnetic material:Neodymium, Nd2Fe14BPlastic bonded, isotropic magnetized.


222 Chapter 11



Magnetic Holding Plates SAV 240.60

Design:Magnetic strips with steel cover and mounting lips.




From „Oxid“-Ceramic

Magnetic Holding Plates SAV 240.60 - HL 13Name SAV - No. - Type

103

2

83

5

80 2

12

5

10

16 20

9

6

5

1.5

55

14

7

67

16 20

12

ø 5

2

80

1035

Type HL 11

Holding force: 110 NWeight: ca. 0.105 kg

Type HL 12


Type HL 13


223



Magnetic-Ball Joint SAV 240.36 – KG 10

Design:Magnetic holding of the ball in the steel seat. Because the ball is not linked mechanically, a wide swivelling range of 180° is possible. If the holding force is exceeded, the magnetic connection is broken. Surface galvanized.


Overall tolerance: ± 0.1 mm

Overal length tolerance: ± 1.0 mm

Diameter tolerance of magnet: h6(except SAV 240.36 - MG10-12)

Magnetic material:Samarium-Cobalt, SmCo5

Mounting possibility:Clamp, press, screw

Permanent magnetic


forcein N

Weightin kgA B C D E F G H

12 12.5 8 12 18.0 M 4* 3.5* - * - * 10 0.01710 - 10 10.0 10 20 28.0 M 3 12 M 3 5 18 0.01710 - 12 10.0 12 20 30.5 M 3 12 M 3 5 18 0.01913 - 13 13.0 13 20 31.0 M 4 12 M 4 6 40 0.03213 - 18 13.0 18 20 36.0 M 4 12 M 4 6 40 0.038

16 16.0 16 20 34.0 M 4 12 none - 70 0.05420 20.0 25 25 47.0 M 5 16 M 5 5 150 0.11625 25.0 25 35 56.0 M 5 16 M 5 7 200 0.216

Magnetic-Ball Joint SAV 240.36 - KG 10 - 25Name SAV - No. - Type

SAV 240.36 - KG10 - 12 SAV 240.36 - KG10 - 10 - 10 to SAV 240.36 - KG10 - 25

KG10 - 12

ø A

C

ø B

E

D

F

ø B

ø AG

E

F

C

D

H

KG10 - 10 - 10 to KG10 - 25

* Ball with inside thread M4 x 3.5 mm. without thread on back side.

Note:The magnetic ball joints are conducting electric current and are therefore suitable as quick release and rotating connection in low current electric systems, such as low voltage lights or testing tools.

Another application example is the use as”breaking section” in rods. Due to the high sliding forces of the ball joint, it can also securely hold optical lens system scans, cameras, lights or lasers, without the need of mechanical fixtures.

224 Chapter 11



Holding Magnet – with plastic cover SAV 240.41

The holding magnets are provided with high-energymagnets from Neo-Delta magnet (NdFeB).Thesemagnets do not only have a high holding force, but are alsocompletely demagnetizing-resistant.The holding force is also not reduced after many years of usage. Due to the multi-pole assembly, a sealed magnetic field is achieved on the holding surfaces. This gives a good holding force, also on thin and painted car bodies.

Clamping on sensitive surfaces

Holding Magnet SAV 240.41 - MG 12Name SAV - No. - Type

The suction function of the rubber surface give an extremely good lateral sliding force.

These rubber covered holding magnets are especiallysuitable for magnetic mounting of parts as commercial displays, safety lights and car roofs, but also for scratch-free mounting of plates or samples on high polished, chromed or painted surfaces.

Magnetic holding plates with rubber layerwith 6 built – in high energy magnets

Type - MG 10 Holding force at

Holding force in N

St 37 (mild steel) 8.0 120Steel sheet 0.8 80

Dimensions in mm Holding force in N

Type A B C D E 1* 2*MG 12 12.0 7.0 14.8 8.0 M 4 12.0 10.0MG 43 43.0 6.0 12.0 8.0 M 4 77.0 55.0MG 66 66.0 8.5 15.0 10.0 M 5 180.0 125.0MG 88 88.0 8.5 17.0 12.0 M 8 420.0 280.0

These magnetic holding discs are also available with outer threaded bush.

Holding magnet combination with rubber covered magnets, which are moveably mounted to a triangle aluminium holding plate. Good holding on bended car-body sheets.


Holding force in N

St 37 6.0 230Steel sheet 0.8 165

Provided with 3 magnetic holding discs MG 43


Holding force in N

St 37 6.0 540Steel sheet 0.8 375

Provided with 3 magnetic holding discs MG 66

Magnetic holding discs with rubber layerand bush – with inner thread

Type With treaded bush

MG 43 - M 6 x 15 M 6 x 15 mmMG 66 - M 8 x 15 M 8 x 15 mmMG 88 - M 8 x 15 M 8 x 15 mm

1* - St 37 - 8 mm2* - Steel sheet - 0.8 mm

31

643

M 4

A B

E

C

D16

0

ø 6.5

ø 43 with MG 43ø 66 with MG 66

225Chapter 11




Rubber Covers for Holding Magnets SAV 240.39

Design:The rubber covers are fitted around the holding surfaces of the appropriate magnets. For holding magnets with a through-hole, covers with a hole are available.

Application:For workpieces that must not be scratched, for instance with painted surfaces. Due to the high wearing of the covers, the sliding force of the magnets is doubled and is thereby almost equal to the holding force value. Because of the damping of the rubber, the holding magnets are protected against shocks that normally can damage the magnet.

For scratch-sensitive surfaces

Rubber Covers for Holding Magnets SAV 240.39 - MG 41 - 80Name SAV - No. - Type


Hole DiameterMG 40 - 50 without 50MG 40 - 63 without 63MG 40 - 80 without 80MG 41 - 63 with 63MG 41 - 80 with 80

Flexible Permanent Magnets SAV 240.70

Design:Improved magnetic values by pointing of crystals in ma-gnetic field (anisotropic). Resistant against demagnetizing and ageing.Max. application temperature: 85 °CMax. bending radius: 8 x thicknessHardness: 40-100 Shore ADensity: 3.7 g/cm3

Magnetic material:Hard ferrite, plastic bonded.

Application:When bended in a circle ring magnets are created, which can be applied in small DC-motors when placed into the stator housing. Axial magnetized rings or discs can be punched out of these magnetic strips. Magnetic clamping strips are easily to produce by placing the magnetic strips between steel strips, resulting in an excellent holding force (sandwich system, see example). Mounting by gluing or pressing. Easy machining with normal tools.

Chemical composition:Air, ozon and moist resistant. Withstands mineral oil, weak acids and bases, kerosene and glycol. Swells with gasoline, acetone, 90% alcohol. Dissolves when in contact withbenzene and chloral solvent.

Light machining possible

Flexible Permanent Magnets SAV 240.70 - MF 10 - 06Name SAV - No. - Type


Thickness ± 0.15

Width ± 0.25

Length ± 0.50

MF 10 - 03 3 25 200MF 10 - 05 5 25 200MF 10 - 06 6 30 200MF 10 - 08 - 30 8 30 200MF 10 - 08 - 09 8 9 250MF 10 - 08 - 24 8 24 500

Suitable for holding magnets:- SAV 240.01, Type MH 1- SAV 240.02, Type MH 2- SAV 240.03, Type MH 3- SAV 240.05, Type MH 5- SAV 240.06, Type MH 6

- SAV 240.07, Type MH 7- SAV 240.08, Type MH 8- SAV 240.23, Type MH 23- SAV 240.24, Type MH 24

Magnet strips Steelstrips St 37 K

N S S N

226 Chapter 11



Magnetic Tape SAV 240.71

Design:Plastic bonded magnet, can be cut with scissors.

Mounting possibility:Magnetic holding tape. Type MB 51 with almost non-magnetic backside and with adhesive material.

Holding force Permaflex 424:- Thickness 1.0 mm; 0.55 N/cm2- Thickness 1.5 mm; 0.57 N/cm2- Thickness 2.0 mm; 0.58 N/cm2

Magnetic tape, colored MB 50:black (SW), white (WS), red (RT), blue (BL), green (GR), yellow (GB), light-brown (HB)

Can be cut with scissors, holding surface on one side

Magnetic Tape SAV 240.71 - MB 50 - 10 - SWName SAV - No. - Type - Colour

TypeDimensions in mm Length

per Rollin mWidth Thickness

MB 50 - 10 10 0.9 10MB 50 - 15 15 0.9 10MB 50 - 20 20 0.9 10MB 50 - 30 30 0.9 10MB 50 - 40 40 0.9 10MB 50 - 50 50 0.9 10


per Roll in mWidth Thickness

MB 51 - 10 10 1.5 10MB 51 - 12 12.5 1.5 30MB 51 - 15 15 1.5 10MB 51 - 20 20 1.5 30MB 51 - 25 25 1.5 30MB 51 - 30 30 1.5 10


per Rollin mWidth Thickness

MB 52 - 10 10 1 100MB 52 - 15 15 1 100MB 52 - 20 20 1 100MB 52 - 30 30 1 100MB 52 - 40 40 1 100MB 52 - 50 50 1 100MB 53 - 10 10 2 50MB 53 - 15 15 2 50MB 53 - 20 20 2 50MB 53 - 30 30 2 50

Magnetic tape, anisotropic MB 52 and MB 53Permaflex, colour red-brown

Magnetic tape, adhesive, anisotropic MB 51Permaflex, colour red-brown


per Rollin mWidth

MB 54 - 10 10 50MB 54 - 15 15 50MB 54 - 20 20 50MB 54 - 25 25 50MB 54 - 30 30 50MB 54 - 40 40 50MB 54 - 50 50 50

Magnetic tape, C-profile MB 54Flexible magnetic holding tape

Note:All magnetic tape can be supplied in 1 m length against price adder

227Chapter 11




Magnetic Tape SAV 240.72

Design:Improved holding force by positioning ofchrystals, one side magnetized, dark-brown with smooth surface, can be cut with scissors.The sliding force is approx. 1/3 of nominal force.


Nominal holding force: 0.8 N/cm2

Mounting possibility:Almost non-magnetic backside with adhesive material.

Note:4-pole magnetized; excellent holding force on thin steel sheets.

Self-adhesive

Magnetic Tape SAV 240.72 - MB 60 - 50Name SAV - No. - Type


per Roll in mWidth Thickness Width

toleranceMB 60 - 14 14 1.5 ± 0.3 40MB 60 - 20 20 1,5 ± 0.3 40MB 60 - 50 50 1.5 ± 0.5 40

Organizing Magnets SAV 240.80

Design:Strong laminated magnet in plastic housing.


Application temperature: 50°C

Available in 4 executions:Type MO 10 - 01 with eye-bolt, whiteType MO 10 - 02 with hook-bolt, whiteType MO 10 - 03 with threaded bush M6, blackType MO 10 - 04 with inner thread M6, black

In plastic housing

Organizing Magnets SAV 240.80 - MO 10 - 01Name SAV - No. - Type

Type MO 10 - 01


Holding forcein N

Weight in kg

Length Width HeightTotal

heightapprox.

MO 10 - 01 58 58.0 15.0 41.5 300 0.130MO 10 - 02 53 27.5 12.5 28.0 150 0.053MO 10 - 03 58 58.0 19.5 42.0 300 0.125MO 10 - 04 58 58.0 15.0 19.5 300 0.119

Type MO 10 - 01Type MO 10 - 01 Type MO 10 - 02

Type MO 10 - 03 Type MO 10 - 04

228 Chapter 11





Design:Holding magnet with hook or eye. (MO 20 - 80). Steel housing with white lacquer. Special colours can be supplied for quantities 1000 pcs. and more (no price adder).

Application:As decorating magnet.


In steel housing


Type Diameterin mm Hook

Holding force in N

Weightin kg

MO 20 - 16 16 M 3 18 0.007MO 20 - 20 20 M 3 30 0.012MO 20 - 25 25 M 4 40 0.023MO 20 - 32 32 M 4 80 0.034MO 20 - 36 36 M 4 100 0.045MO 20 - 40 40 M 4 125 0.059MO 20 - 47 47 M 4 180 0.089MO 20 - 50 50 M 4 220 0.107MO 20 - 57 57 M 4 280 0.149MO 20 - 63 63 M 4 350 0.233MO 20 - 80 80 eye M 6 600 0.485


Design:Powerful holding magnets with steel housing. With grip for easy removal.

Application:Holding magnet with grip, galvanized and white lacquer. For holding paper, drawings, etc.Special colours can be supplied for quantities 1000 pcs. and more (no price adder).


With steel cover



forcein N

Weight in kgDiameter Height

MO 30 - 25 25 29.5 40 0.025MO 30 - 32 32 29.5 80 0.035MO 30 - 36 36 29.5 100 0.045MO 30 - 40 40 30.0 125 0.062

21.8

ø 5

ø 5

229Chapter 11





Design:Decoration magnet in white plastic cover in different shapes.Nominal holding force: 120 NApplication temperature: max. 50°C

Application:As decorating magnet, for drawing boards, etc.

Magnetic material:Hard ferrite (Oxid 380)anisotropic

Note:Form 05 also available with M5 thread*

In plastic cover – Type MO 40

Organizing Magnets SAV 240.85 - MO 40 - 01Name SAV - No. - Type - Form


Design:Powerful holding magnets with nicely shaped cap from coloured plastic. Gripping edge for easy removal (round design). The top of the plastic housing can be silk-screen printed for publicity/advertising on request.

Application:For holding paper, drawings, etc. For recognition, for instance on planning and white boards.

Printable – Type MO 50

Organizing Magnets SAV 240.88 - MO 50 - 36 - BLName SAV - No. - Type - Colour

ø8ø6.2

ø10.5

ø43

12.5

4.5

2

ø43

ca. 3

7

12.5 20

.5ø43

6

12.5

12

21.5

ø43

12.5

2ø

10.5

ø8ø5.5

0.5 3

90°

Form 01

Form 02 Form 03

ø43

12.5

Form 04ø43

12.5

2

M4

ø8

Form 05*

Form 06


forcein N

Holdingsurface in mm Height

MO 50 - 10 - 1 ø 10 6.5 0.7MO 50 - 10 - 2 ø 10 6.5 1.5MO 50 - 16 ø 16 7.0 1.3MO 50 - 20 ø 20 7.5 1.5MO 50 - 25 ø 25 7.5 3.0MO 50 - 30 ø 30 8.0 6.0MO 50 - 36* ø 36 8.5 9.5MO 50 - 11 11 x 11 6.5 1.5MO 50 - 35 35 x 35 9.0 6.0MO 50 - 21 21 x 12.5 6.5 1.5MO 50 - 37 37 x 22 7.5 4.5MO 50 - 55 55 x 22.5 8.5 7.0

Magnetic material:Hart ferrite, isotropic / anisotropic

Available colours:red RT ; green GNblue BL ; orange ORwhite WS ; grey GRblack SW ; brown BRyellow GB ; light-blue HB

Note:Min. quantity with print; 1000 pcs.Packaging per colour: 10 pcs.

* Preferred magnet with high holding force. Colour blue, height 12 mm

230 Chapter 11





Design:Powerful holding magnet with nicely shaped cover of coloured plastic. Cover of eminent ABS with light vaulted surface. Gripping edge for easy removal.The top of the plastic housing can be silk-screen printed for publicity / advertising on request.

Application:For holding paper, drawings, etc. For recognition, for instance on planning and white boards.

Magnetic material:Hart ferrite, isotropic/anisotropic

Printable

Organizing Magnets SAV 240.89 - MO 60 - 20 - RTName SAV - No. - Type - Colour

TypeDimensions in mm Nom. force

in NDiameter Height

MO 60 - 20 20 10 2MO 60 - 30 30 10 5MO 60 - 40 40 10 8


Design:Powerful holding magnets in plastic housing. The SAV-Logo can be exchanged with your personal decoration on request. Following versions are available.

Shape:A: round, ø 25 mmB: round, ø 36 mmC: square, 25 mmD: square, 36 mm

Available colours:red RT ; green GNblue BL ; white WSyellow GB

Application:For holding paper, drawings, etc. For recognition on for instance planning and white boards.Height: 13 mmHolding force: 8 N at ø 25 mmWeight: 0.040 kg

Magnetic material:Hard ferrite (Oxide 380)

Note:Min. quantity with print: 300 pcs.Packaging per colour: 10 pcs.

With personal print – Type MO 70

Organizing Magnets SAV 240.90 - MO 70 - A - 1 - RTName SAV - No. - Type - Form - Decoration - Colour

Available colours:red RT ; green GNblue BL ; orange ORwhite WS ; black SWyellow GB ; mustard SN

Note:Min. quantity with print: 300 pcs.Packaging per colour: 10 pcs.

Decoration:1: smooth, without print2: with printed sticker3: direct print4: as relief with print



Precision circular grinders

Precision circular grinding devices examples and possibilities of SAV - 243

Precision dressing devices, stamp grinder Remarks SAV-No. Page

Precision dressing device application examples - 232-234

Precision radius dressing device for profiling of grinding wheels 434.01 235

Precision angle dressing device for angle dressing of grinding wheels 434.03 236

Precision angle dressing device for angle dressing of grinding wheels 434.05 237

Precision wheel side dresser for dressing side faces of grinding wheels 434.06 238

Precision punch grinder for grinding of punchers 434.07 239

Dressing diamonds for dressing 401.01 240

Precision rotary indexers

NC Rotary indexers, indexers with direct drive examples and possibilities of SAV - 241

Precision clamping blocks for clamping of round parts 207.11 242

Zero-setting device

Zero setting device vertical and horizontal 483.02 244


Applications


Precision indexer with hydraulic tailstock and integrated, power operated expanding mandrel.The angle setting of the workpiece adjusted with 2 transducers.

Digital-precision-indexer with sine setting and encoder for axis.For measuring purposes the workpieces are clamped with an expanding mandrel.

Digital-precision-indexer on base plate with tailstock.

Grinding Devices, Indexers, ApparatusSpecial solution


Positioning of parts for circular and surface grinding in one set-up.

Complete 5-side machining for milling as 5th axiswith palletising. On request

Applications

235



SAV 434.01Precision Radius Dressing DeviceFor profiling of grinding wheels

Use:With this radius device, grinding wheels with concave and convex radii can be profiled.

Design:The lapped, robust spindle runs in a honed hole and is sealed against dust.With angle gauge. The radius movement is limited by adjustable end stops. The bracket with the diamond dresser can be adjusted in height by threads.With the help of a fine adjusting screw on the bracket, one can bring the diamonds in the correct position with high precision.The precision radius dressing device is supplied with 3 replaceable dressing sets and dressing bracket. Optional are 2 additional brackets with a larger withdrawal radius range.Bracket 3 with raiser foot for dressing larger radius ranges.

Accessories:Diamond dresser:SAV 401.01 – K10, available against price adder.

Precision Radius Dressing Device SAV 434.01 - 1 - 2 - 3Name SAV - No. - Bracket

Axle height mm 100 Max. grinding wheel diameter mm 400 Diamond diameter mm 6.2 Taper for diamond 1:10 Weight kg 18.0

Bracket 1 2 3 Withdrawal Radius concave in mm 19 - 112 0-22 / 108-155 151 - 199 Withdrawal Radius convex in mm — 0 - 25 21 - 68 Bracket length A in mm 143 143 158

A

98.5

140

128

128

100

100

Examples of profiled grinding wheels

236 Chapter 12



Precision Angle Dressing Device SAV 434.03For angle dressing of grinding wheels

Use:Using this tool grinding wheels can simply be dressed in any angle or shape.For dressing of straights, angles and side faces necessary for grinding flat faces, slot but also accurate angled surfaces.Especially suitable for use on grinding machines without automatic dressing systems.

Design:Can be tilted over 90° in both directions from vertical position.Adjustable using degree scale on face side.

Accessories:Diamond dresser:SAV 401.01-06 available against price adder.

Base plane approx. in mm 70 x 75Max. stroke in mm 60Drilling for diamond in mm 6Weight in kg 4.1Tilting range in° ±90

Precision Angle Dressing Device SAV 434.03Name SAV - No.

86

52

70 75

40

ca. 1

03

12

60

30°

Adjustable in-feed head for diamond SAV 439.60 (in scope of supply)

237



Precision Angle Dressing Device SAV 434.05For angle dressing of grinding wheels

Use:For precise grinding wheel dressing, according the sine principle on surface-grinding-machines.

Design:All parts hardened to HRC 60 and precision polished. The starting position of the dresser lies at 45 degrees.

Angle accuracy: 5 sec

Accessories:Diamond dresser for SAV 434.05 – 45:SAV 401.01 – K10Diamond dresser for SAV 434.05 – 100:SAV 401.01 – MK1

Application:The required angle is adjusted with end gauges according to an accompanying table (sine principle).

Precision Angle Dressing Device SAV 434.05 - 100Name SAV - No. - Max. dressing range

Max. dressing range A in mm 45 100

Base plate B x C in mm 140 x 70 245 x 78

Height D x E in mm 142 x 172 232 x 302

Carriage width F in mm 40 48

Initial position ° 45 45

Overall adjusting range ° 0 - 90 0 - 90

Centre distance G in mm 6.2 / 1:10 MK1

Weight in kg 4.75 13.5

SAV 434.05 - 45; Dressing range: 45 mm

SAV 434.05 - 100; Dressing range: 100 mm

D

E

C

F

B

G

A

B

G

A

238 Chapter 12



SAV 434.06Precision Wheel Side DresserFor dressing the side faces of grinding wheels

Use:For dressing the side faces of grinding wheels, for grinding slots; setting from 0.5 to 28 mm.

Design:Produced from hardened tool steel HRC 60.Available with (K) or without (N) cooling system on request.

Accessories:Diamond dresser; SAV 401.01-08, Type D available against price adder.

Wheel-Side Dresser SAV 434.06-K, with cooling system

Wheel-Side Dresser SAV 434.06-N in normal execution, without cooling system

Base plate mm 190 x 72 Height mm 115 Setting range mm 0.5 - 50 Max. wheel thickness mm 50 Feed per turn mm 1 Setting resolution thickness mm 0.010 Bore for diamond mm 8 Weight kg 5.0

190

230

65

115

max. 50

Precision Wheel Side Dresser SAV 434.06 - K Name SAV - No. - Execution

239



Precision Punch Grinder SAV 434.07For grinding of punches and profiling of grinding wheels

Width 105 mmTotal height 132 mmHeight of centers 76.2 mmDepth 202 mmLength of prism block 40 mmClamping range prism ø 4 - 25 mm Max. withdrawal radius concave 100 mmMax. withdrawal radius convex 50 mmMax. withdrawal length 10 mmReceptacle for diamond 10 mmWeight 5 kg

Precision Punch Grinder SAV 434.07Name SAV - No.

Exemple of produced punches

Radius dressing bracket for grinding wheels upto ø 200 mm in scope of supply

Angular dressing bracket SAV 434.07-01

132

105

202

76.2

40

80

ø30

Examples of profiled grinding wheels(* angular dressing bracket required)

* * * *

Application:For grinding of punches with highest accuracy as well as for profiling of grinding wheels.

Design:Completely made of steel with the highest accuracy. All parts are hardened and ground. Radius dressing bracket for grinding wheels up to diameter ø 200 mm is standard part of scope of supply.

Handling:The settable stops and a stop pin make it possible to set every desired angle. The stops are, to achieve the highest possible holding force, clamped to a conical strip.The setting screw is used for uncomplicated setting of the prism rest. The required angle is set with the adjustable stops, stop pin and a gauge, according the sine principle.The prism is led in a T-slot, positioned in the middle of the indexing plate.A single bolt is clamping the prism in every position without deviation.Index pin and index disc with 24 notches and 15 degree graduation with an accuracy of ± 30 sec.Equipped with handle for light turning of index disc. Through hole 30 mm for long punches.The L-shaped execution of the base gives the device additional stability and stiffness.

Accessories:Angular bracket SAV 434.07-01Dressing diamond SAV 401.01-10-92Both against price adder

240 Chapter 12



Dressing Diamonds SAV 401.01

Use:For use in dressing and punch grindingdevices

For dressing of grinding wheels

Dressing Diamond SAV 401.01 - 06Name SAV - No. - Type

ø10

ca. 91.5

Dressing diamond SAV 401.01 - 10 - 92:Suitable for Precision Punch GrinderSAV 434.07

Diameter 10 mmQuality 0.5 carat

Dressing diamond SAV 401.01 - 08:Suitable for Precision Wheel Side Dresser SAV 434.06.


Dressing diamond SAV 401.01 - MK1:Suitable for Precision Angle DresserSAV 434.05 - 100.

Diameter 12.065 mmMorse taper MK 1Quality 0.5 carat

Dressing diamond SAV 401.01 - K10:Suitable for Precision Dressing DeviceSAV 434.05 - 45 and SAV 434.01.

Diameter 6.2 mmCone proportion 1 : 10Quality 0.5 carat

Dressing diamond SAV 401.01 - 06:Suitable for Precision Dressing DeviceSAV 434.03 and SAV 434.02.


ø8

30

ca. 54

17.5

ø6.

2

ca. 23.5

12

ø8

1 : 10

ø6

ca. 16.5

8.5

ø9

241



NC Rotary Indexers, Indexers with direct driveExamples and possibilities of SAV

SAV 434.47Digital precision indexer with sine setting (0-90°),Heidenhain encoder and display unit.For grinding and measuring. With receptacle MK4.

SAV 434.49Vice indexer for collets DIN 6388 and ER.With index 15° and 90°

SAV 434.51NC Rotary indexer for universal use. Sealed execution forwire erosion available.Standard with SAV control. Optionally also available forSiemens, Heidenhain and Infranor controls.

SAV 434.52Rotary indexer with direct drive. Also suitable for use as extra machine axis. Available in horizontal and vertical execution.With hydraulic clamping through 6 bar pneumatic supply.Standard supplied with Simudrive 611U.

242 Chapter 12



Precision Clamping Blocks SAV 207.11For clamping of circular parts, also stainless execution (RF)

UseFor simple, quick and secure clamping of round parts on which, for instance, 3 or 6 surfaces must be ground, eroded or milled.

DesignOutside precision ground. Made of tool steel hardened to 60 HRC.Receptacles suitable for Deckel collets with tightening thread S20x2 mm and Schaublin 470E (ER32) Suitable for clamping direct on a magnetic chuck or in a machine vice.

Supplied without 355E and 470E collets!

Collet receptacle: Deckel 355E (D) and Schaublin 470E (Sch)

Angular accuracy: 3 sec.

Parallel-accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm

Weight PSV 10 / D / Sch: 1.6 kg / 2.15 kg

Weight PSS 20 / D / Sch: 1.4 kg / 1.85 kg

Precision Clamping Block SAV 207.11 - PSV 10 - DName SAV - No. - Type - Receptacle

light milling

97

97 50

5055

S 20 x 2

PSV 10 - D55

PSS 20

PSV 10 - Sch PSS 20

ø 24

35

PSS 20 - SCH

PSS 20 - D

PSV 10 - SCH

PSV 10 - D


SAV 434.85 (1) (2) (3) (4)

Precision Circular Grinding Devices – with and without sine baseSpecifications available on request

Circular grinding devices with and without sine function. (1) Available with receptacle Schaublin 470E(2) SK30, (3) SK40

Supplied with control unit SAV 875.40.

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(4) Deckel 355E(5) Sine setting 0-45°(6) 0-35°

SAV 434.80 (1) (2) (4) (5) SAV 434.81 (1) (2) (4) (5) SAV 434.82 (1) (2) (4) (5)

SAV 434.86 (4) SAV 434.87 (4)

SAV 434.83 (1) (3) (6) SAV 434.84 (1) (3) (6) Control unit SAV 875.40

SAV 434.88 (4)

With base plate and tail stock Example workpieces

Manual operationAlso available as indexer Sealed to IP65

Sealed to IP65Driving motor on side

wit

h s

ine

fu

nc

tio

nw

ith

ou

t si

ne

fu

nc

tio

n

244 Chapter 12



Reading accuracy of dial gauge in mm 0.01Hught casing – reference surface in mm 49.5Hught of resilient touch pad in mm 51.5Diameter casing in mm 68Diameter touch pad in mm 45

Zero Setting Device – SAV Original SAV 483.02

ApplicationFor setting of tools (e.g. milling cutters) to “zero” and for determining the reference point of the machine spindle. No damage to the tools, no guiding gauge or arbours required.

DesignResilient touchpad and casing body made of of hardened tool steel, precision ground.Supplied complete with dial gauge (reading accuracy 0.01 mm) in rubber storage gauge.Version with end- stop for horizontal approach of the cutter is available under SAV Nr. 483.02-NE2.

Usage1. Bring the resilient touch pad and the reference surface of the device to the same height using a straight edge and set the dial gauge pointer at -0.50.

2. Place the zero setting device NE1 with the ground surface on the workpiece to be machined. For setting the reference point for horizontal spindle with the device NE2, put the lateral side on the workpiece, making

sure the side stop stands securely against the workpiece-edge.

3. Move the resting tool on the resilient touchpad, until the dial gauge pointer is at “0”.The milling cutter is now positioned exactly 50 mm

±0.01 mm positioned above the workpiece to be machined (NE1), or it is up to ±0.01 mm above the workpiece-edge (NE2). The reference point can now be entered into the machine control.

Vertical and horizontal

Zero setting device SAV 483.02 - NE 1Name SAV - No. - Type

Type NE 1

ø 68

49.5

50 ±

0.0

1

ø 45

Type NE 1 Type NE 2

28

Type NE 2



Precision pull-down vices Remarks SAV-No. Page

Precision pull-down vice for precise clamping 231.01 247

Precision mini pull-down vice for precise clamping of small workpieces 231.02 247

Precision pull-down vice also in stainless execution 231.06 248

Prism clamping block

Multiple-prism clamping block stainless execution 207.01 249

Precision machine vices

High precision machine vice for precise clamping 233.01 250

High precision machine vice for precise clamping 233.07 250



Execution with clamping slots (S)

Execution with T-slots (T)

All standard- and special clamping devices can be supplied with zero reference systems according specification.We adapt the system used by yourselves. We are glad to advice you of the different possibilities.

Special execution SAV 231.06

Multi-prism clamping device with hydraulic actuation.

Special solution for centric vice on turn-axis with scale.

247Chapter 13




light milling

SAV 231.01Precision Pull Down Vice

SAV 231.02Precision Mini Pull Down Vice

Product specification: - chromium steel through hardened to HRC 58 and ground on all sides- large capacity- pull-down-system- clamp-nuts on 4 sides- quick adjustment- stainless type on request


Optional:- wooden case against price adder- 231.01-35 and 231.01-48 only available in stainless execution (RF)- width 35 and 48 with quick adjustment over socket pins different from picture

Precision Pull Down Vice SAV 231.01 - 73Name SAV - No. - A

For precise clamping

For precise clamping of small workpieces

Precision Mini Pull Down Vice SAV 231.02 - RFName SAV - No. - Execution (optional)

A B C D E35 150 70 50 25 1.4 SAV 539.0348 180 75 50 25 1.9 SAV 539.0363 172 90 60 30 3.7 SAV 539.0373 190 100 70 35 4.6 SAV 539.0398 230 125 80 40 11.4 SAV 539.05

125 300 160 98 48 18.5 SAV 539.09150 350 210 100 50 24.9 SAV 539.09

Weightin kg


Dimensions in mm

Use:For precision grinding and EDM applications on small workpieces. Can also be used as electrode holding device for spark erosion SAV 581.05 Type EH 25.


Product specification: - chromium steel through hardened HRC 55 and ground on all sides- pull-down-system- mounting threads for use as electrode holder- stainless type on request (RF)


A B C D E25 65 20 30 10 0.3 SAV 539.01

Weightin kg

Dimensions in mm Wooden case optional ord.no.

D

C

EB A

C

E

D

B A

248 Chapter 13



SAV 231.06Precision Pull Down ViceFor precise clamping

Product specification: - chromium steel through hardened HRC 60 and ground on all sides- pull-down-system- quick adjustment with socket pin- clamp-nuts on 4 sides- mounting threads for use with workpiece-stopworkpiece-stop fixed and moveable - prism in moveable jaw optional (P)- stainless type on request (RF)


Precision Pull Down Vice SAV 231.06 - 60 - RFName SAV - No. - A - Edition (optional)

Scope of supply:- hexagon key- workpiece-stop fix and moveable- 4 clamps- wooden case optional

light milling

A

FC

E

B

fixed workpiece stopmoveable

workpiece stop

optional

D


Clamping force

in daN

Wooden caseoptional ord. no.A B C D E F

60 175 80 56 28 40 2.8 1000 SAV 539.0375 220 100 75 40 50 5.8 2000 SAV 539.03

100 260 120 87 45 55 10.9 3000 SAV 539.07125 330 160 100 50 65 19.8 4000 SAV 539.09125 350 180 100 50 65 20.4 4000 SAV 539.16125 370 200 100 50 65 21 3500 SAV 539.16125 430 260 100 50 65 27 3000 SAV 539.16160 370 200 126 60 70 38.0 5000 SAV 539.16

249



SAV 207.01Multiple-Prism Clamping BlockFor rational multi-clamping

Use:Rational simultaneous clamping of round, square and rectangular workpieces like hole punchers, ejector pins and mould inserts.

Design:- variable use by changeable base-stands (optional on request) in heights 25/50/75/ 100/150/200 mm or according specification - single positioning and clamping of workpieces- tool steel, through-hardened and ground on all sides- execution SAV 207.01-150 with slots on the side, as recess for workpieces provided with collar, nose or head- special shapes and workpiece-specific solutions possible on request

Technical data:Square accuracy : 0.01 / 100 mmParallel accuracy : 0.01 / 100 mm

Scope of supply:Wooden case.

Multi-Prism Clamping Block SAV 207.01 - 320Name SAV - No. - length

SAV 207.01 - 150 with stands

SAV 207.01 - 320 also available in stainless execution – RF (see chapter 8)

Length (C) mm 150 320Width with prism (A) mm 60 95Height (B) mm 70 561st side for quantity x ø mm 15 x 0 - 7 8 x 14 - 322nd side for quantity x ø mm 8 x 0 - 14 8 x 14 - 40Weight kg 8.5 22.5

Aca

. A +

55

B

90°C

250 Chapter 13




High Precision Machine Vice SAV 233.07

High Precision Machine Vice SAV 233.70 - 150 - PR - RF Name SAV - No. - A - Prism - Stainless

For precise clamping

Execution:- Produced from tool steel- through-hardened (HRC 58) and precision ground- for precise clamping- Square accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm- Parallel accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm

Use:Grinding, drilling , measuring, milling

Optional:- available with horizontal ground prism in moving jaw (PR) against price adder- available in stainless execution (RF) against price adder- Wooden case against price adder (SAV 539.03)


Wooden caseoptional ord. no.A B C D E

30 92 30 30 15 0.5 SAV 539.0350 155 65 50 25 2.0 SAV 539.0365 175 70 65 30 4.5 SAV 539.0380 215 110 65 35 7.5 SAV 539.03

100 285 140 80 40 12.0 SAV 539.16125 285 140 80 40 18.0 SAV 539.16150 320 170 90 40 27.0 SAV 539.16

C

A

B

D

E

SAV 233.01High Precision Machine ViceFor precise clamping

Execution:- Produced from tool steel, hardened to HRC 58 and precision ground.- Clamping slots on long sides- Prism in moving jaw optional- Wooden case optional- Hexagonal socket wrench


Scope of supply:- Wooden case optional- Hexagonal socket wrench

High Precision Machine Vice SAV 233.01 - 96Name SAV - No. - A

A B C D E F G48 140 75 55 25 43 30 2.7 SAV 539.0363 160 85 69 30 51 30 4.6 SAV 539.0373 180 95 78 35 56 40 6.4 SAV 539.0396 230 120 92 45 70 40 13.0 SAV 539.07

Weightin kg


Dimensions in mm

BA G

FD

C

E

light milling



Vacuum workholding Remarks SAV-No. Page

Vacuum clamping technology Information and application examples – 252

Vacuum grid chuck, modular for universal use 249.03 253

Vacuum mat chuck, modular with rubber vacuum mat 249.05 / 249.85 254

Vacuum circular grid chuck with radial grid 249.42 255

Vacuum rotary connector, compressors

Vacuum rotary connector for circular vacuum chucks 249.70 256

Modular vacuum compressor for coolant and lubricants 249.72 257

Vacuum auxiliary storage, accessories

Vacuum auxiliary storage for relief of vacuum compressor 249.73 258

Vacuum seal for vacuum grid chucks 249.76 258

Vacuum safety switch ensures safety through machine interlocking 249.74 259

Accessories for vacuum workholding for use with vacuum chucks – 260


Grid-chuck

Grid circular chuck

Recommendations and examples on how to use

Vacuum Clamping Technology

Vacuum equipment can be used when non-magnetic materials, like light alloys, heavy and non-ferrous metals, carbides, plastics, glass, wood and non-magnetic steels and irons etc. are to be machined.The workpieces to be clamped shall have a smooth and flat surface and cannot be porous.During clamping a vacuum is created between workpiece and vacuum chuck. A wide variety of vacuum clamping systems is available for different types of machining tasks. The size of the workpiece surface, the workpiece shape and the evenness are critical factors with regard to the attainable holding forces.Furthermore, in certain conditions the workpiecestiffness is a critical factor for the machining results.

Vacuum-Hydraulic clamping systemEnergizing through machine table

Vacuum chuckCombination with mechanical clamping system

Due to its significant effect on the overall holding force, the sealing of the workpiece to the vacuum system is of the utmost importance. The leakage losses are proportional to the workpiece size. In order to keep the pressure losses as low as possible, the capacity of the vacuum pump must be chosen to fit workpiece and chuck size.

For safety reasons it is recommended that an auxiliary vacuum storage is used in combination with machine interlock. The auxiliary storage provides sufficient vacuum in case of mains drop. Additionally it prevents the compressor to run continuously, leading to overheating and wear due to dirt and chip contamination. Furthermore it provides reduced clamping times.

Grid-chuck

Mat-chuck

< 100 cm2 3 < 1200 cm2 6 < 5000 cm2 16 < 1.0 m2 21 < 2.0 m2 63 < 3.0 m2 100 < 4.5 m2 160

Chuck size

Capacityin m3/h

Application criteria and holding forcesof vacuum clamping systems:

Due to the increasing use of light alloys and fibre composites – which cannot be clamped magnetically – the use of vacuum clamping solutions increased in the past years.Despite the limited holding forces, whencompared with magnetic workholding (approx.factor 1:10), vacuum technology can be a competitive solution. In case of unwanted residual magnetism, a combination of vacuum and magnetic clamping technology is possible. Further advantages lie – like magnetic systems – in the overall surface force distribution and is therefore especially suitable for parts sensitive to distortion and vibration. Since the atmospheric air pressure fluctuates from 930 to 1013 hPa, the maximum available vacuum varies equally. This determines the maximum reachable holding force. Taking into account the leakage losses in the system, the flatness and roughness of the contact surface, a maximum holding force of approx. 9.3 N/cm2 can be reached.

253



SAV 249.03Vacuum Grid Chuck – modular

Use: Suitable for simple shaped workpieces with rough clamping surface for heavy machining.

Special advantages:- high holding force- universal application- secure clamping of unmachined workpiece surface due to high friction coefficient of clamping surface- sealing cord evens out any irregularities between workpiece and chuck surface

Application:- special shapes and sizes on request- the best suitable grid dimensions are determined by workpiece outline and size- clamping area is defined by neoprene sealing cords- vacuum chuck with fine grid for small workpieces with different shapes- forms the basis for many different special solutions in combination with special vacuum adapter chucks

Scope of supply:- 1 tubing nozzle- 7 vent plugs- 10 O-rings- 1 Connector LW12- 10 m sealing cord Ø 4 mm- 1 m vacuum tubing 18 / 12 spiral reinforced- eccentric side stops- 2 clamps

The Vacuum Grid Chucks are manufacturedfrom high density Aluminium (A). Steel execution (S) manufactured on request.Also other sizes available on request in eithersteel or aluminium.

Vacuum Grid Chuck SAV 249.03 - 600 x 400 - 25 - AName SAV - No. - A x B - Grid pitch - Aluminium / Steel

A B C300 200 32.5 12.5 5.0300 400 32.5 12.5 10.0600 400 32.5 12.5 20.0300 200 32.5 25.0 5.0300 400 32.5 25.0 10.0600 400 32.5 25.0 20.0

Dimensions in mm

Grid pitch`Weight in kg

For universal use

A

BC

Designed for use with Sealing Cord SAV 249.76-35 andSAV 249.76-40. Specify required length on order.

254 Chapter 14



Vacuum Mat Chuck – modular SAV 249.05 / 249.85

Use:For finishing of workpieces, especially for milling pockets and cut-outs and for drilling, without loss of vacuum.

Design:Many vacuum spots in tight grid. The mats arepositioned on the chuck using 6 plastic lugs.For a modular set-up the clamping surfacecan be freely extended by connecting differentchucks over plug-in connectors. After throughcutting or milling the mats can easily be replaced. The vacuum mats are provided with fine suction openings. The black vacuum mats are closed and are used to close the unused fields.Vacuum mats thickness tolerance: ± 0.04 mmConcave upto: 0.1 mm

Scope of supply:For modular design:- 1 vacuum chuck- 1 tubing nozzle- 1 connector coupling- 7 vent plugs- 10 O-rings- 8 pressure blocks- 10 vacuum mats blue- 1 m vacuum tubing 18 / 12 spiral reinforced

Required capacity: 1 chuck 3 - 6 m3/h≥ 8 chucks 16 - 21 m3/h≥ 20 chucks 40 - 63 m3/h≥ 50 chucks 100 -160 m3/h

Vacuum Mat SAV 249.85 - RedName SAV - No. - Colour

With rubber vacuum mat

A B C300 200 30 Single 5.0

300 400 30 Double 10.0

600 400 30 Quadruple 20.0


Design

Vacuum chucks SAV 249.05 Vacuum mats SAV 249.85


Vacuum Mat Chuck SAV 249.05 - 600 x 400Name SAV - No. - A x B

A B C Blue 300 200 2.42 Standard Green 300 200 2.42 Hard Red 300 200 2.42 Soft Black 300 200 2.42 Closed

Dimensions in mmColour Edition

A

BC

SAV 249.05 - 300 x 400Modular Design

A

BC

BB

A

C

SAV 249.05 - 300 x 200SAV 249.05 - 600 x 400

Required suction capacity:

1 mat 3 - 6 m3/h≥ 8 mats 16 - 21 m3/h≥ 20 mats 40 - 63 m3/h≥ 50 mats 100 -160 m3/h

255



SAV 249.42Vacuum Circular Grid Chuck

Use: With this circular vacuum-chuck, disc and ring shaped workpieces can be clamped, for instance on lathes.Preferably for the glass- and plastic processing,but metal machining is of course also possible.

Scope of supply:- 10 m seal for 38 mm chuck height- 20 m seal from 48 mm chuck height

Available in high-tensile aluminium (A) or steel (S) execution.

Circular vacuum grid chucks are available in custom made executions for clamping of specialworkpieces.

Vacuum Circular Grid Chuck SAV 249.42 - 630 - SName SAV - No. - A - Execution

Dimensions in mm Weightaluminium

in kg

Weightsteelin kgA B C D E F Grid size

100 38 70 3 83 M 8 10.0 1.0 2.0125 38 95 4 108 M 8 10.0 1.0 3.0160 38 125 4 140 M 10 10.0 2.0 6.0200 38 160 4 176 M 10 10.0 3.0 9.0250 38 200 5 224 M 12 10.0 5.0 14.0315 48 260 5 286 M 16 12.5 5.0 14.0400 48 330 5 362 M 16 12.5 16.0 47.0500 58 420 5 458 M 16 12.5 31.0 89.0630 58 545 7 586 M 16 12.5 49.0 142.0

A

E

3 x

F

B

C

D

With radial grind

256 Chapter 14



SAV 249.70Vacuum Rotation Joints

Vacuum rotation jointsfor using with:- circular vacuum chucks on lathes with a hollow spindle- vacuum chucks on a rotating machine table with hollow spindle.

The rotation joint allows rotary movement of circular or normal chuck but with a stationaryvacuum supply without any vacuum loss.

Standard rotation joints are available for 3rotation speed ranges: upto 1500, 3000 and 6000 r.p.m.

The rotation joints are supplied including plastic tubing. The plastic tube connects the chuck through the hollow spindle with the rotation joint. The tube absorbes the torque force.

Scope of supply: - 1,5 m tube- connection parts

For circular vacuum chucks

TypeMax.rotation

speedin 1/min

Dimensions in mm Approx Weightin kg

Connectionin ZollA B

A 1500 35 85 0.3 R 3/8“ - R 3/8“B 3000 50 110 1.0 R 1/2“ - R 3/8“B 6000 50 110 1.0 R 1/2“ - R 3/8“

Vacuum Rotations Joints SAV 249.70 - 1500Name SAV - No. - max. rotation speed

B

A

Type B

Type A

BA

257



SAV 249.72Modular Vacuum CompressorFor coolant and lubricants

Special features:- vacuum storage with integrated liquid separator – additional liquid separator is not required- very compact design- transparent combined container for liquidseparation and vacuum storage offer quick

visible safety- different storage capacity can be achieved by exchanging the acryl glass container- integrated air filter, liquid separator, relays,

motor protection and differential pressure switch- available with different vacuum pumps

from 6 m3 to 63 m3. On request also avai-lable with dry running pumps.

- all pumps for the modular compressors are equipped with oil lubrication.

Also available with dry running vacuum pump for module compressor on request.

Scope of supply:1 interface unit, with:- 2 m vacuum tubing- 3/2 manual valve with air vent- 1 vacuummeter- 1 electric connector with 3 m cable

r n m

h

i

t

k

a

e

d

c

f / gs

u

l

p

a storage accumulator coverb storage accumulator bottomc acrylic glass cylinderd threaded stute mist collectorf profile sealg drainage plugh e-motori pressure difference switchk circuit relayl airfilterm oil filling plugn vacuum pumpp exhaust air valver oil level gauges Schuko / CEE-Plug with overvoltage relayt ON/OFF switchu wire spiral hose

Size DesignSuctioncapacityin m3/h

Motor drivein V/kW

Max.mbar dB (A)

Dimensions in mm WeightkgL B H

VM 6 - 230 Modular compressor 6 230 / 0.37 50 59 Ø 500 630 25VM 6 - 400 Modular compressor 6 400 / 0.37 50 56 Ø 500 630 25VM 16 - 230 Modular compressor 16 230 / 0.55 20 60 Ø 500 630 31VM 16 - 400 Modular compressor 16 400 / 0.55 20 60 Ø 500 630 31VM 21 - 230 Modular compressor 21 230 / 0.75 20 62 Ø 500 630 45VM 21 - 400 Modular compressor 21 400 / 0.75 20 62 Ø 500 630 45

VM 63 - 400 Modular mobilecompressor 63 400 / 1.50 20 65 600 600 1030 95

VM100 - 400 Modular mobilecompressor 100 400 / 3.00 50 67 700 700 1130 113

Modular Vacuum Compressor SAV 249.72 - VM 16 - 400Name SAV - No. - Size

258 Chapter 14




SAV 249.73Vacuum Auxiliary StorageFor relief of vacuum compressor

Use:The auxiliary storage serves to extend the vacuum storage of the vacuum compressor ensuring more and longer vacuum capacity. Additionally it prevents the compressor to run continuously, reducing clamping times.

Design:The auxiliary storage is equipped with two glassgauges and thus works as an additional filteror separator. The collected dirt or liquids can simply be drained.

Length Width Height

54 555 315 325 Inside R ¾” 18210 800 500 530 Inside R ¾” 30

Dimensions in mm Connection in inch

Volume in L

Weight in kg

Vacuum Auxiliary Storage SAV 249.73 - 54Name SAV No. - Volume

SAV 249.76Vacuum SealFor vacuum grid chucks

Use:This high quality neoprene seal is placed into the suction slot of a vacuum grid type chuck to restrict the clamping area.The seal diameter is depending on the cross section of the slot. If a plate is remachined then a seal with a smaller diameter will be required.

Minimum order quantity : 25 m

When ordering, please specify length in m.

Vacuum Seal SAV 249.76 - 100 - 50Name SAV - No. - length

SAV-No. Diameterin mm

249.76 - 20 2,0

249.76 - 30 3,0

249.76 - 35 3,5

249.76 - 40 4,0

249.76 - 45 4,5

249.76 - 50 5,0

249.76 - 55 5,5

249.76 - 60 6,0

249.76 - 65 6,5

249.76 - 70 7,0

249.76 - 80 8,0

249.76 - 100 10,0

259



SAV 249.74Vacuum Safety SwitchEnsures safety through machine interlocking

Use:Safety regulations require that machines with power actuated clamping devices are set in such a way that the machine main drive can only be switched on in case the clampingdevice has been completely energized.

Application:The safety interlock is a requirement for allpowerful machine tools and shall be integrated in the machine control. When the vacuum levelremains under the low threshold an optical signal is generated.

The built in potentially free contacts can be inte-grated into the machine control and can e.g. trigger an emergency stop (spindle stop, table shift stop, full machine stop).

The range between high and low vacuum can be set stepless. In case of utilising a magnet valve the clamping process can be controlled directly from the machine control panel.

Size Description Inside tubingin mm

Voltage Uin V Type

100 Safety control with electronic vacuum switch Ø 12 mm 24 V A


110 Safety control with electronic vacuum switch Ø 18 mm 24 V B



Vacuum Safety Switch SAV 249.74 - 105Name SAV - No. - Size

A

B


Accessories for Vacuum Workholding

For vacuum workholding systems, an extensive range of accessories is available:

Examples:

Vacuum electro-magnetic valves

Vacuum valve with slide

Quick coupling with male thread

Plug for quick coupling

Hose nozzles, hose nipples, reducers, double nippels, etc. on request

Specifications on request

Vacuum switch with LED-display



Magnetic Chucks Page

Evolution of magnetic workholding technology 262

Magnetic field and magnetic lines of force 263

Workpieces in the magnetic field 264

Maximum holding forces 265

Material properties 266-268

Magnetic clamping of workpieces 269

Influence on holding forces 270-273

Demagnetizing 274-275

Side stops for milling 276-277

Technical explanations and typical wording 278-279

Sales- and delivery conditions 280


Evolution of magnetic workholding technology

Mankind has been aware of the existence of magnetismfor centuries. The term magnet is derived from the ancientThessalonian landscape Magnesia. As far as 5 ages B.C., magnetic ore was found there as well as in other places. Back then, as today, therewas a certain fascinationattached to the for our senses inaccessible magnetic effect. The cause of earth’s magnetic field was also legendary. According to modern knowledge, the earth’s magnetic field arises from the rotation of earth which brings the electrons in earth’s interior (which consists of liquid iron/ nickel composites) into orderly circular motions. Within this circular motions, there arises therefore a magnetic field. The measured magnetic field on the earth’s surface can be reduced to one portion whose cause lies in the earths interior and an external portion which comes from variable electrical flow in the ionosphere andmagnetosphere.

This directional force of the earth is used, e.g. in magneticcompasses in order to determine the cardinal points.The magnetic needle orientates itself to the north/south direction of earths magnetic field. In 1820 the Danish physicist Hans Christian Oerstedt discovered the reciprocal relationship between electricityand magnetism and hence created the basis of thedevelopment of modern magnetic technology.

The earth’s magnetic field

1.2. Chronologic & table of the use of permanent magnetic materials in the last 100 years: The technical use of magnetic materials limited itself to compasses until the middle of the 19th century. The development of the electromotor by Jacobu (1834) and of the dynamo machine by Werner von Siemens (1866) required for the first time large amounts of magnetic materials. The chronological table below gives a short overview of the evolution of permanent magnetic materials.

Year Technical use Magnetic materials Attributes Production

1834 Carbon steel low strength, easy to demagnetize casting

1900 Wolfram steel 10w strength, easy to demagnetize casting

1917 Cobalt steel low strength, more difficult to demagnetize casting

1933 AlNi weak magnet with difficult demagnetization casting

1936 AlNiCo isotropic enhanced magnetic force with difficultdemagnetization

Casting, heat treatment

1938 AlNiCo anisotropic large strength, demagnetizationcomparable with AlNi

Casting, contin. cast.,cooling in magn. field

1952 Hartferrit weak magnet, higher resistance againstdemagnetization

Sintering, isotropicand anisotropic

1962 SmCo large magnetic strength, very difficult todemagnetize

Sintering, anisotrop, expensive raw material

1980 NdFeB strongest magnetic material with highestrobustness against demagnetization

Sintering, anisotrop, cheaper raw material

Today increasing use of NdFeB. lmprovements thro measures andcombination of several magnetic materials.

Elec

trom

otor

(Ja

cobu

, 183

4)D

ynam

o m

achi

ne (

Siem

ens,

186

6)Te

leph

one

(Bel

l-Gra

y, 1

876)

Loud

spea

ker

Bro

adca

stin

gTe

levi

sion

Mag

netic

wor

khol

ding

tech

nolo

gy

Wolfram steel Wolfram steel

Cobalt steel

AlNi

1. The evolution of magnetic workholding technology1.1. Origin of magnetic technology:


Magnetic field and magnetic lines of force

The space in which magnetic forces work is known as magnetic field. The magnetic effect is, at the same time, dependent on place and direction. A magnetic field develops between two or more poles, like poles repel each other and unlike poles attract each other. The clearest and easiest way to demonstrate a magnetic field is by sprinkling iron powder over a separating layer, e.g. paperor glass, that is lying within a magnetic field.

2.2. Magnetic lines of force: Magnetic lines of force run from the north to the south pole of a magnet. The magnetic field tries with the help of its leakageand effective flux to close over the air gap (fig. 2). If the magnetic field extends beyond the soft iron it always happensvertical to the surface. The lines of force course searches for the shortest occupiable distance between the poles.

By storing a rod magnet appropriately, it adjusts itself to the magnetic field of earth in known way. The pole which points in the geographically north direction is known as the “north pole” of the magnet. If a rod magnet is bent to a U-shape, a bipolar magnet system is created (horse shoe magnet fig. 2).

However, air offers the magnetic field a very high resistance, so that the magnetic lines of force prefer to proceed in ferro magneticmaterial (e.g. iron). The lines of force stand for the illustration of the magnetic flux Θ in Wb (Weber). For the effect of the magnetic field, e.g. the achievable holding force, the concentration of the lines of force per surface, or rather the magnetic flux density B in mT(1 Tesla = 1 Wb/m2) or G (1 Gauss = 0.1 mT) is the deciding factor. The cause of the magnetic field with its lines of force is the magnetic field strength H in A/m or 0e (1 kA/m = 12,56 Oersted). The connections between field strength and flux density can be seen as similar to the conditions between the electric voltageand the electric current.

Fig. 1: Field line course of a bipolar rod magnet

N S

Fig. 2: Illustration of the magnetic lines of force of a horse shoe magnet

N S

2. Physical basis of the magnetic workholding technology 2.1. The magnetic field:


Workpieces in the Magnetic Field

2.3. Iron workpieces in the magnetic field: Resting iron workpieces offer the magnetic field just a low resistance and therefore shorten the path of the lines of force. Therefore the magnetic field does not need to take the awkward path through the air any more (fig. 3). In comparison to e.g. air, the magnetic conductivity (permeability) of steel (St 37, A570, 4360-40) is approx 2000 times better. If the resting iron part is removed from the magnet, the force of the magnetic field opposes an enlargement of the magnetic resistance and therefore also a change in the magnetic energy. As the magnetic energy is related directly to the work to be used, in order to remove a ferromagnetic workpiece from magnets, it opposes an enlargement of the air gap or, the magnetic energy. That is why materials containing iron are attracted and hold. In order to keep a workpiece magnetic, at least a north and south pole must be overbridged with it.

2.4. Atomic interpretation of the magnetization: In magnetisable (ferromagnetic) materials, there are tiny magnetic fields, so called “molecular magnets“, available.Within the atoms, electrons circle the nucleus as tiniest electric charges, as well as also circling their own axis and generate - from the connection first observed by Oersted - a magnetic moment, or rather, a magnetic dipole.Without the influence of an external field, these magnetic dipoles are arranged at random in ferromagnetic materials and neutralizethemselves extensively in their effect. By feeding an external magnetic field, there follows an exact arrangement of the dipoles. A large number of arranged dipoles in small areas, the so-called ‘Weiss domain”, figure the smallest magnetic bodies. These molecular magnets arrange themselves under the influence of external magnetic fields and remain more or less in the imposedformation, depending on material, even after being distanced from the external field. The arrangement of the “molecular magnets”illustrates over and above that the demagnetizing effect of heat, impact, radioactive radiation or magnetic foreign fields.The relevant body, which areas arranged to such an extent contains, works together as one magnet. By complete arrangementof elementary magnets, further magnetizing is impossible. The material is “saturated”.

Fig. 3: Magnetic flux and the holding forces becoming effective while overbridging of a N- and a S-pole

N S

Fig. 4: Arrangement of the ‘molecular magnets” in Weiss domains by an adjacent magnetic field

externalmagnetizing field H


Maximum Holding Forces

2.5. Maximum possible holding forces and influences to be taken into consideration: The magnetic forces depend on several influences which are difficult to determine in praxis, so that the interpretation of magnetic systems needs a lot of experience. The following criteria are effective:

The maximum holding force FH max refers to the air gap surface Aairgap. However, the air gap surface does not always have to be identical to the workpiece surface, as it does with, eg. laminated pole plates. The individual factors take the following effects into consideration:

- constructive design and type of magnetic material - material composition and state of heat treatment of the piece to be clamped - ratio of pole pitch and workpiece thickness - contact between the workpiece surface and the magnet and its roughness - influence of magnetic coverage- influence of pole shoes - influence of operating temperature

The effect of the individual criteria will be thoroughly discussed in the following. To illustrate the influential sizes, there is a theoretical connection for the maximum holding forces to be expected given below.

The effects of workpiece thickness, pole shoes and operating temperature are not taken into consideration and so are mainly left to experience.

Resistance factor for considering material composition and state of heat treatment. The magnetic holding forces sink drastically with decreasing pure iron content.

The dispersion coefficient comprises the ratio between unused magnetic flux parallelto workpiece and effective flux in the air gap between the magnet and the workpiece. It is very dependent on the construction of the magnetic system and the workpiece geometry, and provides together with the dispersion coefficient - the big most critical at the calculation.

The ratio between the magnetic cross section and the air gap explains the increasingholding forces in the ratio between the magnet and decreasing workpieces. Borders are, however reached, when the workpiece material is saturated, which means that it cannot take ariy more magnetism.

The permanence stands for flux density of the magnetic material when there is a0 mm air gap. It is the deciding factor and mainly dependent on permanent magnetic material.

This is the permeability or induction constant. It amounts to 1.256 10-8 Vs/Am anddescribes the constant connection between field strength and flux density in the air gap.

The magnetic holding force decreases rapidly with increasing air gap (increasing of surface roughness).

τ:

σ:

A2magnet / A

2aigap:

BP:

µ0:

KLuftspalt:

airgap airgapairgap

magnet


Material Properties

3. Magnetic properties of materials

If one examines the reaction of various materials in a magnetic field, one recognises that there are three different materials in the area of magnetism.

1. non-magnetic materials 2. soft magnetic materials 3. hard magnetic materials

3.1. Non-magnetic materials: This inciudes materials like eg. brass, copper, aluminium, wood, glass, plastics and further metals which don’t react,or only react insignificantly to a magnetic field. Such materials can be flown through by a magnetic field like air or a vacuum. Therefore there is no interaction (attractive force) between the magnetic field and the material. These materials can not be magnetically chucked.

3.2. Soft magnetic materials:

This group consists mostly of iron, low alloyed steels, nickel, cobalt. Magnetic fields concentrate and strengthen themselvesin theses materials. They lose a lot of theireffect after removal of the magnetic field. Depending on alloying contents, a small residual magnetism can, however, remain.

3.3. Hard magnetic materials

This concerns permanent or continuous magnetic materials. After magnetization they show a magnetic field with very high energy density, which can be used technically in static or dynamically occupied magnetic circuits, that is, in magnetic circuits with a constant or variable air gap. A permanent magnetic material must show two qualities. Firstly, It must absorb enough magnetism (high remanence Br or saturation Bs), secondly the magnetism stored in the material must remain stuck to it (high coercive force Ho). Permanent magnetic materials are used for clamping and workholding systems, as well as motors, loudspeakers, measuringinstruments etc. Fig. 5 gives a general view of the partitioning of magnetic materials. Today hard ferrite, AlNiCo and SmCo are used for permanent magnets. Today NdFeB is found to have a further increased coercive force and use of residual flux density, alongside SmCo.

Fig. 5: General board for magnetic materials

soft magnetic materials semi-hardmaterials permanent-magnetic materials

Fe (silicon)

NiFe

high Ni-content

soft magnetized ferrites

NiFe

Fe

CoFe carbonsteels

FeCoVCr

Cr-, Co-steels

AlNiCoCrCoFeCoFeNi

CuNiFe

hardferrite

PtCoSmCo

medium Ni-content

2,5

2,0

1,5

1,0

0,5

0

T

10-1 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107A/mHC

BS sintering


4. Permanent or continuous magnetic materials

4.1. Metallic permanent magnets: made of AINiCo:

The main alloying components are aluminium, nickel, cobalt, iron, copper and titanium. This hard material is produced in a sintering or casting technique and can only machined by grinding. AINiCo magnets are almost exclusively anisotropically produced. During the production, they therefore receive a preferential direction of magnetization, which leads to better alignment of the “elementary magnets“ and therefore to better magnetic values. Through the generation of columnar crystals during casting and through a heat treatment under a feeded magnetic field, the anisotropy is achieved.

The measurement ratio between length and diameter L:D should be 4:1 in the open magnetic circuit in order to show a good demagnetizing resistance. AINiCo can achieve the largest holding forces under given magnetic volume with this ratio. The more the magnetic circuit is closed, the shorter the chosen construction length can be.

AINiCo magnets have a high remanence, but a low coercive force. Because of this, these magnets can take up a strongmagnetic field, but they can also easy be demagnetized again. Due to this reason, they can be used in electrically switchablepermanent-magnetic chucks.

AlNiCo magnets are usable in a proportionately high temperature range up to ca. +400 °C and irreversibly lose theirmagnetization at the so-called ‘Curie-temperature,

4.2. High-energy “rare earth magnets”: made of samarium-cobalt (SmCo5 / SmCo17) or neodymium-iron-boron (Nd2Fe14B)

This deals with sintered, metallic permanent magnets with a very high energy product from the group of rare earths’.The rare earths are 15 elements with the atomic numbers 57 - 71 in the periodic table of elements. The costly processing and the expensive raw materials result in a relatively high price. These magnets always maintain a magnetic preferential direction (anisotropy) during the production. Even strong retarding potentials have no influence on the magnetic field. a) Samarium-cobalt:The magnetic material with excellent magnetic values is very hard and brittle an can only be machined by grinding or by using diamond tools. The maximum operating temperature is ca. +200 °C.

b) Neodym-iron-boron: Using this magnetic material which is the strongest available at the moment, the highest magnetic values can be achieved,which can be produced economically. The energy product is approx. double as high as the samarium-cobalt. The energy product stands for the quality of the magnets and is the product of flux density and field strength (BxH). The maximum operating temperature is approx. +80 °C.

Material Properties


4.3. Hard ferrite magnets according to German industrial Standard 17 410: They consist of ca. 80% iron oxide and 20% barium or strontium carbonate. These raw materials are available in amounts and therefore relatively cheap.

Like all ceramic materials, these magnets are very hard and brittle. Therefore they can be only machined with diamond tools. Hard ferrite magnets are produced anisotropic and isotropic, in other words with and without preferential direction. Isotropic magnets show only a low energy density after magnetizing.

In relation to remanence, the coercive force in anisotropic magnets is high. Therefore a large magnetic pole surface is necessary.

The maximum operating temperature is +200 °C.

Fig. 7: Comparison between the maximum energy products for various magnetic materials

In the ratio of the maximum energy products (BxH)max there are likewisethe maximum attainable holding forces.The numbering after the magnetic typesgives the maximum energy product ca. in GOe.

NdFeB 2700, 2850, 3600, anisotropic SmCo

AINiCo 600, 450, 500, crystal orientated, heat treated, anisotropicAINiCo 360, 450, 500, heat treated, anisotropic

Hard ferrite 270, 330, 380, anisotropic Hard ferrite 100, isotropic

Hard ferrite isotropic

AINiCo anisotropic

AINiCo anisotropic

SmCo-magnets

NdFeB-magnets

0

100

200

300

400

(B x

H) m

ax in

kJ/

m3

Fig. 6: Magnetic volumes for different magnetic materials with the same magnetic energy content

F

F

F

F NdFeB-magnetV = 0.30 cm3

SmCo-magnetV = 0.86 cm3

Ferrite-magnetV = 25.4 cm3

AlNiCo 500-magnetV = 19.5 cm3

The example shows the volume reduction at only 4.4% or 1.6% of the output volume during the use of high-energy magnetic materials SmCo or NdFeB. At a distance of 5 mm, an equally strong magnetic field of B = 100 mT arises at any time, which leads to equal holding forces at any time.

4.4. Short comparison between permanent magnetic materials:

Material Properties

Hard ferrite anisotropic


Magnetic Clamping of Workpieces

5. Magnetic clamping of workpieces:

5.1. Holding and sliding forces in the magnet technology: Pole pitch, workpiece shape, surface quality and material have a large influence on the holding and sliding force of a workpiece.

a) The holding force is the break-off force of a clamped workpiece vertical to the clamping surface.

b) The sliding force is the force necessary to slide a workpiece parallel to the clamping surface. Depending on the surface quality, the sliding force comes to about ca. 15 to 30% of the holding force.

Unless specifically mentioned, the given nominal holding forces for our products, they are valid for a ground test specimen of St37, with the dimensions 100 x 100 x 40 mm.

5.2. Influence of the pole pitch and workpiece thickness: In order to achieve a consistent holding force over the entire clamping surface and also to clamp smaller workpieces, magnetic chucks are produced with various pole pitches and pole clearances. Therefore the clamping surface is designed with alternating north and south poles (fig. 12). The pole gap consists of a non-magnetic material, like brass or epoxy.

Fig. 11 Holding and sliding forces of magnetic chucks

Fig. 12: Definition of pole gap and pole pitch in magnetic chucks

Pole gap Pole pitch P

N N NS S S

Holding force

Sliding force

Magnet


Influence on holding forces

The magnetic field of the rested workpiece goes from one pole to the next in half circles.

5.3. Influence of contact surface and surface condition: Any surface of the workpiece which is actually touched by the magnet surface is to be seen as a contact surface (fig. 15).

a) Dependence of holding force on the workpiece shape:

Fig. 13: Lines of force course in workpiece thickness > pole clearance

Fig. 14: Lines of force course in workpiece thickness < pole clearance

If the workpiece thickness is significantly smallerthan the pole clearance, the workpiece will notentirely absorb the magnetic field. This results in a reduction of the holding force. When all lines of force are running within the workpiece, the best holding forces are attained.

When there are larger pole pitches, a larger penetration of the magnetic field can be attained for thicker and raw workpieces and therefore a larger holding force is attained.

Fig. 14a: Holding forces depending on pole pitch relation

Fig. 15: Rough illustration of the reduction of holding force because of unfavourable workpiece shapes

continuouscontact

interruptedcontact

line contact

100 % 60 % 15 %

Workpiece Magnet

N N NS S S

Workpiece Magnet

N N NS S S

Workpiece thickness / Pole pitch

Hol

ding

forc

e in

%


b) Holding force dependence of surface quality The surface quality is very important for the holding force of a workpiece, as it decreases rapidly with increasing roughness. The best values are achieved with a finely polished surface without air gap (fig. 16).

c) Holding force dependence on air gap Air gaps on workpieces can never be prevented. They are for instance caused by material deformation in the pre-manufacturing,shrink holes and unevenness on casted parts, roughness after mechanical machining, layers of paint and non-magneticprotection surfaces.

As air creates a very large magnetic resistance, fewer field lines can be built-up and the holding forces will reduce quickly.This can be seen in the example diagram below.

The air gap sensitivity is mainly depending on the workpiece size in relation to the magnet size, the material properties and the pole pitch of the magnet. Generally speaking, magnetic systems with bigger primary pole pitch can easier bridge the air gaps. In comparison to electro-permanent magnetic chucks, the electromagnetic chucks create deeper magnetic fields and are therefore less sensitive to air gaps.

Fig. 16: Influence of workpiece surface on the attainable holding forces

WorkpiecesWorkpieces

Holding forces vertical to the magnet

20 % - 50 % 50 % - 70 % 70 % - 80 % 80 % - 90 %

Magnet

Fig. 16a: Influence of air gap on the attainable holding forces

Airgap in mm

0 %

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %10 %

Hol

ding

forc

e in

%

0 0,1 0,2 0,4 0,5 0,60,3



5.4. Material composition of workpieces: The highest magnetic flux values and therefore the highest holding forces can be achieved with technically pure iron.In practice, a number of materials with different magnetic qualities are found.

5.5. Influence of pole plate coverage: As has been shown, the holding force per workpiece surface is dependent on the size of the pole plate coverage,Measurements gave the below listed reduction of maximum holding force per workpiece surface (example):

Further, the heat treatment also influences the magnetizability of the workpieces, because this changes the physical structureof the material. Hardened workpieces do not conduct the magnetic flux that well.

Fig. 18: Influence of heat treatment on the holding forces (example)

Fig. 17: Material dependency of the holding forces

Arrangement

a workpiece with 50 x 100 mm < contact surface < 150 x 300 mm

a workpiece with contact surface > 150 x 300 mmorseveral workpiece with50 x 100 mm < contact surface < 150 x 300 mm

Holding force perworkpiece surface

120 N / cm2

80 N / cm2


100 % technical pure iron

95 % St37

95 % C15

94 % 34CrNiMo6

93 % St52-3

92 % 90MnV8

90 % C45

87 % Ck45

86 % C60

84 % 42CrMo4

75 % St50

72 % X155CrMo12

65 % X210CrW12

50 % 20MnCr5

30 %

0 %

GG (Cast iron)

Non metallic materials

49%

44%

84%

100%

Holding force in %

Tool steelquenched

Tool steelhardened

Tool steeltempered

St 37tempered


The reasoning lies, first and fore most in the magnetic parallel connection of the workpieces, as in the second case, the magnetic flux is distributed over a larger surface. As a result, the flux density sinks, and therefore the available holding force does too. However, the holding forces per surface do not sink that much on bigger surfaces as one would expect from the quadratic connection mentioned in section 2.5, as the leakage flux outside of the workpiece and the effective air gap in increasing workpiece surface reduce themselves:

5.6. Influence of pole raisers: In case pole raisers are necessary for solving a workholding problem, these are not only effective as magnetic resistancebut also increase the leakage flux simultaneously. It should therefore be observed that, for instance, pole raisers witha height up to 140 mm can have a drop in holding force of up to 20%.

Due to the effects described in 5.5 this loss of holding force is balanced out with suitable dimensioning, and can possibly even increase. Under all circumstances the pole raisers are not allowed to bridge the pole gap, because then there will be no magnetic flux available in the workpiece.

5.7. Influence of the application temperature: Temperature influences can significantly influence the qualities of a magnetic clamping system, so they are to be taken in consideration when choosing and constructing a magnetic clamping device. Increasing temperatures lead to reduction of the remanence and therefore the holding forces and to an increase of the coercive force. Above the Curie-temperature, the magnetic materials lose their magnetization irreversibly.

Material Max. application temperature Curie-temperature

Hard ferrite 200 °C ca. 450 °CAlNiCo 450 °C ca. 850 °CSmCo 350 °C ca. 750 °CNdFeB 80 °C ca. 300 °C

Fig. 19: Influence of the pole raiser height on the attainable holding forces


Pole raiser height in mm

Hol

ding

forc

e in

%


Demagnetizing

6. Demagnetizing of materials

When ferromagnetic workpieces are magnetically clamped or held, the still retain a low residual magnetism (remanence) after the magnetic field has been switched off.

In practice, this side effect, which is often disturbing, can be removed with the following equipment:

6.1. Electronic polarity-reversing control units: The units serve both as a direct current supply and a demagnetizing fixture for all electro and electro-permanent magnets. During polarity-reversing and demagnetizing, a process (excitation and counter excitation) occurs with progressivelydecreasing energy until the residual fields are eliminated. Therefore the magnetization created by the holding magnet can be mostly removed.

It is guaranteed thereby, that workpieces without residual force can be lifted from the holding magnet. The use of equipment such as holding or transporting magnets guarantees an immediate and precise loosening of the parts.

If, however, a high demagnetization quality is required, an additional treatment of the workpieces with a demagnetizer must be carried out.

6.2. Demagnetizers:

This equipment serve to remove the often disturbing residual magnetism in the workpieces. An extensive demagnetization is necessary for many products like cutting, punching and measuring tools or roller bearings.

The unorientated ground state of the molecular magnets is thereby achieved, by exposing the workpiece to a permanently alternating, strong magnetic field with a decaying amplitude. Therefore demagnetizers are operated with alternating current, where the polarity alternates in the mains frequency 50/60 Hz.

The decaying amplitude can be attained by leading the workpiece out of the alternating field slowly and steadily. The part to be demagnetized should be moved through the alternating field at ca. 0.2 m/s. At a distance of 20-30 cm,the alternating amplitude is approx. 0.

Fig. 20: Decreasing magnetic alternating field for demagnetization

max.

0 0


a) Table demagnetizers:

With this equipment a laminated iron system leads the alternating field on to the plate surface. Thereby a very strongmagnetic field with large penetration is achieved. The pole surface is halved by a non-magnetic gap. The workpiece must be led over this parting line (fig. 21).

Table devices are suitable for the demagnetizing of parts up to approx. 50 mm thickness. Thicker parts must be treated from both sides. The apparatus serve as table equipment or can be installed in automatic conveying devices (fig. 22).

If the parts are very heavy, it is possible to lead the demagnetizer over the workpiece (fig.23). Mass production parts can also be led over the device in plastic containers.

b) Tunnel demagnetizers: Tunnel demagnetizers consist of a coil protected by non-magnetic material. The equipment is especially suited to the demagnetizing of parts with large surfaces like, e.g. tubes, bars, profiles - and to bundled and packaged parts. They can likewise be installed in conveying devices (fig. 24) or be arranged ca. 30 degrees diagonally (fig. 25), so that the parts can slip through.

c) Low-frequency generators: As already described, table and tunnel demagnetizers operate with the normal mains frequency of 50/60 Hz. Better demagnetizing results can possibly be attained by using a lower frequency, especially on high alloyed and hardened materials. Low-frequency generators lower the mains frequency to 16 Hz.Such devices can simply be connected before the table and tunnel demagnetizers.

Fig. 21 to 23: Use of table demagnetizers

Fig. 24 and 25: Tunnel demagnetizers with band conveyor and chute

Fig. 24 Fig. 25

non-magneticchute

30°

Demagnetizing

Fig. 21 Fig. 22 Fig. 23


Side Stops at Milling

7. Machining forces during milling

7.1. Standard milling:

The milling cutter tries to lift the surfaces that are to be machined and to slide them along the chuck. As illustrated below, the machining force F forms a tangent to the milling cutter. The Iefthand end stop and the frictional forces between the workpiece and the clamping surface counteract their horizontal component.

The vertical component F faces the tensile force of the chuck. The picture illustrates two important aspects:

- The task of the chuck is to keep the workpiece in its fastened state. - The task of the end stops is to avoid lateral displacing. For this reason the end stops should always be used.

7.2. Down-cut milling:

Here the machining force F has a component directed against the chuck and in addition one directed towards the bottom right-hand corner of the workpiece. That is why the end stop is to be fastened to that position where the milling cutter is placed. At moving milling cutters the machining forces help to hold the workpiece on the pole plate surface, whereby higher cutting rate, as in standard milling cutters, is made possible. This is why down-cut milling is to be recommended from the point of view of clamping technology.

Fig.26: Force conditions at standard milling

WorkpieceF

FH

FV

n

FV

Fig. 27: Force conditions at down-cut milling

Workpiece

F

FH

n

End stop


7.3. End milling:

In concentric end milling, the machining forces work on towards the left end and the lateral end stop, as the centre line of the milling cutter path corresponds with that of the workpiece. This requirement does not always fulfill itself. Sometimes the workpiece has to be clamped off-centre to the milling axle. During this so-called off-centre end milling, the workpiece is moved to the same side, but to the right-hand end stop.

It is recommendable, therefore, to check that the workpiece, end stop, lateral end stop, packing and compressing pieces are all in the correct position in order to fulfill their conditions, before switching on the feed.

Fig. 28: Force conditions at end milling

concentric end milling

off-center end milling

Lateral end stop

End stop

Center line Workpiece

Center linemillingcutteris equalcenter lineworkpiece

F

Lateral end stop

End stop

F

Side Stops at Milling

Center linemillingcutternot overcenter lineworkpiece


Technical Explanations and Terms

8. Technical explanations and terms from magnet technology:

Induction: Induction is the change which is effected on a material by a feeded magnetic fied.

Isotropy: The equality of magnetic characteristics in all directions of magnetic material.

new curve

B

H

BR

HC

Air gap : Clearance between magnet and counter pole (workpiece).

AINiCo: Aluminium-nickel-cobalt magnetic material. Metallic permanent magnet with high remanence and comparatively lower coercive force.

Anisotropy: Anisotropic materials are described aspreferential-directioned. During their production (casting, sintering and alloying-in) they are exposed to a magnetic field or particular layering process.

A/m: Ampere per meter; unit of the magnetic field strength (1 A/m = 0,01256 Oersted)

(BxH)max: Biggest product from B and H on the demagnetizationcurve in kJ/m3 or GOe (1 GOe=79,6 10 kJ/m3). The biggerthe (B x H)max-value, the smaller the volume of themagnetic material for the same holding force can be, but under unchanged conditions.

Coercive force BHC: Size of required retarding potential strength in kA/m or 0e, to bring a saturated magneticmaterial back to zero with the existing retarding potential.

Coercive force JHC: Size of required retarding potentialstrength in kA/m or 0e, to bring a saturated magneticmaterial back to zero, even after the retarding potentialhas been switched off.

Curietemperature: At this temperature magnetic materialsirreversibly lose their magnetization.

Diamagnetism: Term for all materials who only reactinsignificantly to a magnetic field eg. plastics, fluids,organic materials etc,

Demagnetizer: Equipment to remove the residual magnetism(see remanence) from workpieces which have beeneffected by a magnetic field.

Demagnetizing: Reduction of magnetization by using a retarding potential or a decaying alternating field or also by using temperature influences.

Demagnetizing curve: That part of a hysteresis loop, which runs in the second quadrant of a rightangledcoordinate system. The course of the demagnetizing curveand its targets Br (remanence) and H(coercive force) mark the significant magnetic qualities of a permanent magnet.

Diamagnetism: Term for all materials who only reactinsignificantly to a magnetic field eg. plastics, fluids,organic materials etc,

.

Dimension ratio: The ratio L/D = length/diameter of a rod magnet, has an optimal value for every magnetic materialin the optimal work point.

Dispersion coefficient :The dispersion coefficient takes into consideration that part of magnetic flux which is not available for, eg. clampingof the workpiece. It is heavily dependent on the clamping system and workpiece.

Ferromagnetism: Generic term for all materials which shows a more or less large magnetization after the feedingof an external magnetic field.

Flux density: Density of the lines of force of the induction field. Unit: 1 Tesla = 10 Gauss.

Gauss (G): Old unit of magnetic induction.

Holding force FH: Work force of a magnet or magnet system. The holding force refers to a vertical workpiece break-off and a precisely defined test specimen.

Hard ferrite magnet: Oxide magnet made from iron oxide,barium or strontium carbonate with relatively lowremanence and coercive force.

Hysteresis loop: Graphic representation of the magnetizingand demagnetizing cycle.


Lines of force: Grafic representation of the magnetic field.

Magnetic flux Θ: The magnetic flux in Wb (Weber). Stands for the “number”of lines of force.

Magnetic system: Magnet with one or more fastened pole shoes as well as two or more magnets which operate in a functional unit.

Magnetization M: Value in kA/m. The magnetization by the aligned elementarymagnets. For practical use it is considered by the relative permeability.

Magnetizing: Alignment of elementary magnet ranges by feeding an external magnetic field.

NdFeB: Neodymium-iron-boron magnetic material. High-energy magnet with the highest remanences at present. workpiece.

Oersted: Old unit of the magnetic field strength. 1 Oer-sted = 79,6 Nm.

Operating temperature max: A magnet can be used upto this temperature without losing its magnetization.

Permanence BP: The permanence gives the maximum flux density of the magnetic material by 0 kA/m field strength. The differencebetween this and remanence Br is that permanenceadjusts itself to continually changing air gaps.The permanence is always smaller than remanence.

Permeability µo: Also known as induction constant. “Conductivity” for magnetic lines of force in a vacuum. Ratio between magnetic induction B and magnetic field strength H in a vacuum.

Permeability, absolute µ “Conductivity“ for magnetic lines of force, ratio betweenmagnetic induction B and magnetic field strengthH. µ = µo x µr

Permeability relative µ: The relative permeability considers the magnetization of the material.

Pole gap S: Clearance between a north and a south pole which consistsof non-magnetic materials – mostly brass, epoxy or stain-less steel.

Pole pitch P: Clearance from one north to one south pole. The pole pitch always contains a pole gap.

Pole shoes: Also known as pole extensions or raisers. They are al-ways used in connection with magnet systems to lead the magnetic field into the workpiece. Pole shoes facilitate a 5-sided machining and also allow complicated workpiece shapes to be clamped.

Preferential direction: See anisotropy.

Remanence Br: Size of the remaining field strength of a magnet in a closed circuit.

Resistance factor T: Factor which considers the loss of field strength at the transmission point and in the workpiece.

Saturation: The saturation flux density BS is achieved, when the workpiece cannot absorb any more magnetization.

Screened magnet system:Leading and concentration of the magnetic field through an iron pot around the back and lateral surfaces of a magnet.

Sliding force:Force of a magnetic clamping system which stands ver-tical to the holding force and therefore lies parallel to the pole plate.

SmCo: Samarium-cobalt magnetic material. High energy magnet with large remanence and large coersative field strength.

Temperature coefficient of the remanence TKBr: Value given in % which illustrates the lowering of the remanence during increasing ambient temperatures.

Temperature coefficient of the coerciveforce TKHC: Value given in % which illustrates the increasing of the coercive force during increasing ambient temperature.

Tesla: Unit of magnetism induction. 1 Tesla= 104 Gauss.

Technical Explanations and Terms

Technical explanations and terms from magnet technology:


1. General and contract conclusion a) all agreements and offers are based on our conditions; they apply as accepted through placement of order or acceptance of the supply. Deviating conditions of the customer, which we do not accept expressly in writing, are noncommittal for us, even if we do not contradict explicitly.b) For the scope of supply our confirmation of order is determining. Verbal, telephonically, telegraphic and telefaxed special agreements and additional contract modifications have validity only if they are confirmed in writing by us. The same applies to assured properties of the supplied article. All data in our designs, illustrations, measurement tables, weight tables etc. are - so far not explicitly confir-med by us - only approximate values. The documents belonging to the offers remain our property, are subordinate to our copyright and may not be made accessible to third parties or only with our written approval.c) The order acceptance by us takes place in writing. If we should deviate slightly in our order confirmation in relation to the order of the customer, then our order confirmation is obligatory, if within eight days - in urgent cases by telephone call, telegram or telefax - one does not contradict to these. Hereunder applies the principle that a wrong transmission always goes debited to the customer, and will not be borne by us.d) Place of delivery for all obligations developing from the contractual relation is Nuremberg Germany. Area of jurisdiction for all from the contractual relation as well as law cases rising over its developing and its effectiveness is Nuremberg; after our choice also seat of the customer (with foreign contracts: also court of the capital of the country, in which the customer has his seat). The contractual relation is always subject to the German material right under exclusion of international purchase rights.e) All written or oral offers are, unless no other agreements are made or confirmed by us, not binding.

2. PricesThe prices are in Euro. The prices apply, if not explicitly differently agreed, purely net ex works including loading, excluding packing, freight, insurance, assembly and other additional expenses. All increase of freight and tariffs, value added tax, material prices and wages are for the account of the customer. With supplementary orders the prices are newly agreed upon.

3. Delivery time. The delivery time is specified after best discretion and is therefore to be understood as approximately, excluding explicitly firm designated agreements. The time for delivery starts only from the time, in which written agreement exists over the final supply and all questions necessary for the trouble-free execution of the order are clarified. The time for delivery does not begin before the time that all documents are made available to us, the necessary official and private explanations, permissions and releases etc. are available and the customer has fulfilled the agreed payments and other obligations.The delivery time is considered as firm, if the shipment has left our works within the agreed delivery time. If the delivery is delayed for reasons not attributable to us, then the time for delivery is considered as firm with the message that goods are ready for dispatch within the agreed delivery time.

The time for delivery extends - also within a delivery delay appropriate at occurrence of foreseen events, which we could reasonably not prevent despite the circumstances of the case – equally to events in our work or at possible subcontractors - for example operational disturbances, wasting of an important working part, delays in the delivery of substantial raw materials and delivery parts, strike, lockout, mobilization, war and riot as well as in delay of the customer from this or another contract.

At later changes of the contract, which can affect the delivery time, the delivery time extends, unless special agreements concerning this can be made, to appropriate extent. Consequential loss or damage because of late supply with negligent behaviour by us or our personnel are explicitly excluded. In any case we are responsible for such damage only up to the invoice amount excluding V.A.T., whose cause and extent could have been foreseen by us. Partial deliveries are permissible. For special and customer specific products a withdrawal is not possible.

4. Terms of payment Our invoices are payable within eight days from invoice date with 2% discount or within 30 days net. Repair and spare part invoices are immediately payable without any deduction. The retention of payment due to whatever unrecognized or legally invalid counterclaims of the customer is just as inadmissible as the set-off with such counterclaims.Cheques and discountable changes are accepted only after special agreement and only when all additional collection and discount charges are paid. When payment is received after the due date, interests according the usual bank interest on debit balances plus 2% as well as all arising additional fees or other costs can be charged.With call-off orders we are entitled make our invoices payable at readiness for dispatch. With call-off delays, starting 14 days after announcement of readiness for dispatch, the additional charges for storage, care and shifting of the commodities can be charged.With payments by instalments which were accepted by us the entire remainder becomes immediately due, if the customer with a due payment is over 10 days in delay or in his financial circumstances nature-due, if the customer with a due payment is over 10 days in delay or substantial degradations in his financial circumstances occurs.In addition we are entitled to reject all pending supplies subject to payment, or to insist on acceptance and/or if necessary validate claims for damages in accordance with the condition of the previous paragraph.

5. Transfer of riskThe risk is passed-on to the customer, even if freight-free delivery was agreed:a) At delivery of the supplies by us or one of our assigned transporters, however latest at leaving of our works or warehouse. The packing takes place with best care. The dispatch takes place after best discretion of the supplier. On request and for the account of the customer the delivery is insured by the supplier against breakage, transportation- and fire damage.b) If the dispatch, the delivery or the acceptance are delayed for reasons, which are not attributable to us, then the risk is transferred to the customer on the day of readiness for dispatch; however we are prepared to take out a desired insurance on request and for the account of the customer.

6. Receipt Delivered articles are to be received by the customer, even if they show insignificant defects. Partial deliveries are permissible.

7. Guarantee If a commodity is defective, is missing assured characteristics or will loose characteristics during the guarantee period due to production or material failures or will it become defective during the guarantee period due to production or material failures, then we will, under exclusion of further guarantee claims of the customer, according our choice supply a replacement or have the commodity reworked.If this is not possible, the rework fails or is refused by us or unreasonably delayed, then the customer has the right to a replacement or reduction. Damage claims because of non-fulfilment or consequential damage are explicitly not accepted, except for mandatory liability because of guilt.For consequential damages we only take responsibility, if the customer should be secured by the warranty against such consequential damages. In these cases we are liable only up to expectation interest, maximum up to 2-times the value of the supply, excluding value added tax.Determination of all defects must be announced immediately - with recognized defects at the latest within 8 days after receipt of the commodities, with non-recognized defects immediately after determination - in writing.Costs of the rework are for our account up to the value of the defective part, beyond that it is for the account of the customer.Wear or damages, which are due to careless or unsuitable use, excessive load, unsuitable equipment, inadequate construction work, is excluded, as far as unknown to us at completion of contract and the use was expressly assured.When improper changes or repairs are made by the customer or a third party, our liability for the consequences caused by this is waived.For improvement work and spare pieces we are liable to the same amount as for the original delivered commodity, and only up to the expiration of the guarantee period of the original delivery commodity.For sub supplied commodities our total liability is limited to passing on the liability claims, which we have against the supplier of these commodities.Only if these were claimed without result, our liability according paragraph 1 is revived again.In all cases only such damages, whose cause and extent were foreseeable for us, are replaced. The guarantee claims expire 12 months after delivery.

8. Other claims for damages, resignationClaims for damages from impossibility of the performance, delay, positive violation of contract, debts at completion contract or tortuous liability are excluded, unless, these are based on intent or gross negligence of us. Claims for damages are limited in each case to the value of the supply.When the performance becomes impossible to us or the customer, then general rights of law apply under the following condition:If the impossibility is due to our fault, then the customer is entitled to require compensation of damages. This is limited to half of the value of the supply, excluding value added tax, of the part of the supply or performance, which cannot be taken in useful service because of the impossibility.The right of the customer to the resignation remains unaffected. If unexpected events in the sense of number 3 of the economic meaning or the contents of the supply or performance change substantially or considerably affect on our company, the contract will be changed proportionally.As far as this is economically not justifiable, a right of resignation is entitled to us. If we want to make use from this right, then we will communicate this to the customer immediately after determination of significance, and also then, when even at first with this an extension of the delivery time was agreed upon.In all cases only such damages, whose origin and extent were foreseeable for us, are replaced.

9. Right of ownershipThe supplied commodity remains our full property until full payment, also the future developing demands, indifferently from whatever argument this developed, even if payments for particularly designated demands were made. With open invoices the reserved property applies as security of our demand for balance.a) By machining and processing of the reserved commodities, the customer does not acquire the property of the new item in accordance with. § 950 BGB. The processing is performed by the customer for us, without resulting in any obligations to us. If the reserved commodities are processed, connected, mixed or integrated with other items not belonging to us, we acquire the property of the new item in relationship to the value of the reserved commodity to the other finished items.

b) The allowances of the customer from resale or rental of the reserved commodities are directly assigned to us and without consideration, if the reserved commodities are without or after processing, connection, mixture or integration and if they are resold to one or multiple customers.These demands serve as protection only upto the value of the already sold reserved commodities.In case that the reserved commodities are sold together with other items not belonging to us, with or without processing, the transfer of the demand for purchase price applies only to the amount of the reserved commodities , which is, together with other items, the subject of this contract.Regardless of the transfer and our right to resignation, the customer is entitled for resignation in so far, when he fulfils his obligations to us and does not come into financial collapse.On request the customer has to give us the details necessary for the resignation of the resigned demands, and communicate the resignation to the debtors.The customer has to inform us immediately about the execution measures of third parties in the reserved commodities or the in advance resigned demands, by handing over the documents necessary for an intervention. The customer bears the cost of our intervention.c) The customer has the obligation to keep the commodities in proper condition during the duration of the right of ownership and will directly have the necessary repairs - apart from emergencies – performed by us or by one of our recognized repair workshop at own expense.

10. Transfer of the contract The transfer of demands on us to third parties is impossible, if we do not agree in writing.

Conditions of sale and deliveryTranslation: the original version in German of these conditions takes precedence over any translations thereof

Documents

SAV Precisioncatalogue